ã€ŠThe Undying Magician: A Dystopian High Fantasy Seriesã€‹


 B1 | Chapter 1 - Evaluation

    Map of Aria

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 5 | Day 6

    I pat mom on the back as she hugs me with tears flowing from her eyes. Meanwhile, I glance over her shoulder to see dad lightly nodding his head with a stern look on his face.

    It takes the bus parked in front of our house honking to get mom to let me go before she grabs my shoulders, looks me directly in the eyes, and finally says, ¡°Stay safe, and don¡¯t let anyone know.¡±

    I nod my head before looking at dad again as he adds, ¡°Especially anyone from one of the families.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll be fine,¡± I reassure them while opening the front door and stepping out of my family¡¯s two story house onto the grassy front yard. The yard doesn¡¯t have any signs or anything of the like, and it only has a few trees to it, but it¡¯s still the yard that I grew up with, so it¡¯s a bit melancholy to know that this might be my last time seeing it.

    As I continue walking towards the black military bus parked in front of our driveway, I raise my head to look up at the sky through squinted eyes; at the two suns beating down on me with their seemingly endless heat. When I lower my head again to look at the bus, I hear the driver shout with a less than pleasant look on his face, ¡°Hurry up, boy!¡± as he taps his fingers on the steering wheel in front of him.

    I hide my displeasure at his treatment of me as I walk down the driveway towards the bus. While I¡¯m walking, one of the bus¡¯s windows rolls down before my best friend ¨C Aidan Hawkins ¨C sticks his head out, letting his shoulder-length black hair fall into his face as he says, ¡°Hey, Nathan!¡±

    His actions noticeably anger the driver even further as he shouts back at him, ¡°Shut up and get back into your seat, cadet!¡±

    Okay, so this driver is a bit of an asshole.

    I keep my thoughts hidden from my face as I enter the bus and scan my new ID that had only come in the mail just yesterday on the scanner, next to the door.

    The ID itself has a picture of my face, showing my short brown, wavy hair, and my blue eyes as I stare straight ahead, along with a black and red border around it, showcasing the national colors of The Republic of Arcania. It also has a few other details, such as my name and ID number to the side of my picture, and the name of the school on the top of the card ¨C The Arcane Academy.

    As soon as the scanner beeps, recognizing my ID, I quickly move past the driver in an attempt to avoid any more interaction with him before navigating my way towards Aidan and sitting down next to him.

    The rest of the people within the bus all avoid looking at the driver, apparently also sick of the man, before he turns to face forwards again and the bus door closes itself. As he is starting the military bus again, he points his hand towards us, palm outwards, before a green circle with several hundred tiny lines of text running back and forth across it along with a star appears in front of his palm. Seconds later, the magic circle grows slightly before vanishing inwards into itself as a strange, green barrier appears in between us and the driver. He then starts to leave my neighborhood as the people within the bus begin to chatter away.

    Huh, I guess the driver doesn¡¯t want to bother with us unless he has to.

    The driver¡¯s use of magic aside, Aidan takes that as his cue to begin talking, ¡°So how¡¯ve ya been since graduation?¡±

    I close my eyes and put my hands behind my head as I answer, ¡°It¡¯s been okay.¡±

    A few seconds pass as the other people within the bus fill it with their chattering voices before Aidan exclaims, ¡°Are you excited to finally learn how to use your magic?¡±

    I slowly open my eyes again before glancing at him.

    Magic. The end all, be all of a person¡¯s position in our society. A society built on war, bloodshed, and military might. Where the nation with the strongest mages ¨C our nation ¨C reigns supreme.

    Am I excited to finally begin my formal training in magic?

    ¡°Not really,¡± I mutter while facing forwards again and closing my eyes.

    I hear Aidan gasp in surprise before feeling him shaking me back in forth as he practically shouts in my ear, ¡°But why!! Magic is amazing!¡±

    Without opening my eyes, I answer him, ¡°Because I don¡¯t have a choice in the matter.¡±

    Which is the honest truth.

    We¡¯re all being forcefully conscripted into the military just because we¡¯re magicians. And even if I wasn¡¯t trying to hide the fact that I¡¯m immortal from them, I would still hate the idea of not having a say in this.

    Aidan stops shaking me after hearing my answer before he moves his hands from my shoulder and quietly says, ¡°I guess that¡¯s true.¡±

    Neither of us say anything for several minutes as the bus continues to pick up cadet after cadet.

    ¡°Hey¡­ Nathan?¡± Aidan suddenly asks me, sounding a little nervous.

    I open my eyes and turn to him out of curiosity as I ask, ¡°What is it?¡±

    This sudden nervousness isn¡¯t like him. He normally has a rather bubbly attitude, with the ability to ask almost anything without¡­

    Oh.

    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    ¡°If it¡¯s about her, then I don¡¯t want to hear it right now,¡± I answer him with a frown before he can even ask anything.

    As I thought. His face clouds over with surprise as he exclaims, ¡°But the three of us are-¡±

    ¡°Were,¡± I cut in before he continues talking without missing a beat.

    ¡°-best friends!¡± he finishes with a sad look in his eyes. ¡°C¡¯mon, man! You can¡¯t cut out the six years that we were friends just because of one simple lie!¡±

    I grimace at the thought. He¡¯s technically right, but I¡¯m still not sure if I can really consider Amelia as one of my best friends anymore. Not after finding out that she had been lying about who she was from the very moment we met.

    ¡°Not only did she lie to us, but she¡¯s also from the Marshall family and therefore can¡¯t be trusted,¡± I state with a note of finality in my tone as I face forwards again while closing my eyes, practically quoting dad¡¯s words in regards to any of the top families of the Republic.

    I hear a familiar groan from Aidan, signaling his giving up on the subject once more.

    Amelia Marshall. The youngest heir to the Marshall family, the family currently ¨C and for the past several decades ¨C occupying the dark-magic council seat. A family that also apparently has a tradition of sending their kids to a public school under a fake name.

    Which also means that it would be dangerous to be around her, what with my body¡¯s condition and all. Adding on another reason to avoid her for the moment.

    If her family were to find out about it, then it could only mean bad things for me.

    After all, their matriarch ¨C who also happens to be Amelia¡¯s mother ¨C is part of the ruling council governing The Republic of Arcania.

    That said¡­

    I open my eyes while turning to look at Aidan, finding him staring out the window with a sad look on his face.

    It¡¯s not like I can tell him that. He doesn¡¯t know about my condition, nor does anyone else outside of my own family and the doctor.

    I close my eyes with a sigh before facing forwards again.

    Might as well take a nap as we wait.

    <hr>

    I wake up to Aidan shaking me as he shouts, ¡°Wake up! The Arcanian Gate is in sight!¡±

    ¡°The gate?¡± I mutter, still slightly out of it from my nap before the words register in my mind as I sit up straight again.

    The Arcanian Gate!

    I may not be interested in this academy, but I am a little bit interested in the gate at least. After all, it¡¯s a magic object that acts as both the entrance to the academy grounds, and the evaluator of a magician¡¯s talent level, as well as what magic they¡¯re able to use.

    And while I already know that I¡¯m a fire magic user, I never figured out what my talent level was.

    The talent levels range from 1 through 5, with a talent level of 1 meaning that the magician has only the bare minimum affinity for magic, and a 5 basically meaning that they were practically born to use magic and should be fostered with the utmost of care.

    That said, the thing that really matters in regard to the talent level ¨C to me at least ¨C is that the academy places you into different course levels depending on your talent. Talent levels 1 and 2 are placed in the low level courses and will be granted the rank of second lieutenant as soon as they graduate from the academy. Meanwhile, levels 3 and 4 ¨C the average and slightly above average levels ¨C are placed in the high level courses and will be granted the rank of first lieutenant upon graduation.

    Lastly, the level 5 prodigies will be placed in the advanced courses and granted the rank of captain upon graduation, allowing them to skip six entire ranks within the military.

    Of course, this is all with them passing the various tests for the officer ranks along with their classes. Because it would just be stupid to allow an idiot to be a captain just because they are talented in magic.

    ¡°What talent level are you hoping for?¡± Aidan asks without looking away from the window, ¡°I hope I¡¯m level 5!¡±

    A faint smile emerges on my face at his unrealistic wish before I mutter, ¡°I just want something in the middle. Preferably either level 2 or 3.¡±

    Level 2 would make me less noticeable, but I would also have less authority. And authority is something that I might need to keep my secret.

    As for level 3, I would be a little bit more noticeable, but I would still only be average. And I would have a little bit more authority whenever I graduate, so things should still work out well.

    Aidan sends me a strange look before shaking his head and muttering, ¡°That sounds like something you¡¯d say...¡±

    He then looks out the window again with his previous fervor. As if this conversation hadn¡¯t happened in the first place.

    I shake my head with a smile at this before the bus finally comes to a stop.

    A sudden ripping sound comes from the front of the bus as the driver rips down the sound barrier, followed by the driver¡¯s voice, ¡°Shut up and begin exiting the bus in an orderly manner!¡±

    I hold myself back from raising an eyebrow at his emphasis on the word ¡®orderly¡¯ as I get up from my seat and begin following the rest of the cadets out of the bus.

    It doesn¡¯t take long for me to completely lose track of Aidan after exiting the bus into a crowd of dozens of students, including those from other buses. Many of whom I notice sending me curious glances, likely due to my looking a little bit younger than most of them.

    None of them comment about it though, and after a brief moment of confusion, a loud voice calls out over the crowd, ¡°Everyone, please form one line down the sidewalk starting at the scanner. The person at the front of the line will scan their ID before moving on into the Gate. You will then wait on the other side with the instructors and advanced notice students for the rest of the students to finish making their way through.¡±

    I follow the crowd into the line, somehow ending up close to the front without even realizing it before the person several places in front of me at the very front of the line touches their ID card to the scanner and begins to walk towards the enormous gate.

    The Arcanian Gate itself spans several dozen meters in size so that it can fit people, vehicles, and anything else the academy might need to stick through it. It¡¯s red and black, symbolizing the national colors of The Republic, with an arc shape, and a light blue field of energy within the arc.

    After a brief moment of hesitation, the girl walks through the gate, following which a strange, robotic voice suddenly echoes throughout the area.

    ¡°Name, Rose Alexandra. Affinity, Nature magic. Talent, level 3.¡±

    My eye twitches slightly at the announcement.

    The gate announces everything right as you walk through? To everyone?

    Well, that¡¯s just building the academy up to have a caste system, now isn¡¯t it?

    This just reaffirms my desired levels. At least others won¡¯t try to make trouble for me ¨C most likely ¨C if I am average in talent.

    The next person touches his ID to the scanner and walks through the gate without any hesitation.

    ¡°Name, Blake Frost. Affinity, Water magic. Talent, level 2.¡±

    Soon after him, the next person walks through as well.

    ¡°Name, Arnold Smith. Affinity, Wind magic. Talent, level 1.¡±

    I wince for the poor fella before watching another person step up.

    ¡°Name, Joshua Hicks. Affinity, Dark magic. Talent, level 2.¡±

    At the rate it¡¯s going now, we should be finished a lot faster than I had originally expected.

    My eyebrows raise in surprise as the fifth person ¨C a tall girl with bright red hair ¨C steps through the gate.

    ¡°Name, Catherine Cline. Affinity, Fire magic. Talent, level 4.¡±

    A level 4 already? That was fast.

    The announcement of her level stuns the gathered instructors and cadets before one of the instructors says, ¡°Continue moving along.¡±

    This makes the next student hurry to scan their ID before moving through the gate as well.

    ¡°Name, Jack Roberts. Affinity, Wind magic. Talent, level 2.¡±

    A slight feeling of anxiousness builds in my chest as the next person directly in front of me scans their ID and begins to pass through the gate.

    I don¡¯t pay any attention to the name announced by the gate as I grab my ID and scan it on the scanner before walking up to and through the gate.

    But all of the tension leaves my body the moment I hear my talent level.

    ¡°Name, Nathan Fox. Affinity, Fire magic. Talent, level 3.¡±

 B1 | Chapter 2 - Meeting

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 5 | Day 6

    Before I can think much about my results, I find myself looking around as several voices enter my ears that weren¡¯t there before entering the gate. What I end up finding is a large, metallic, and fortress-like structure inside of an enormous bubble. The outer edge of the bubble is made up of some sort of golden liquid with a bluish hue to it, and it completely blocks out the suns. Yet, despite that, there¡¯s still plenty of light inside of the bubble; just as much as there was before entering through the gate.

    Meanwhile, the fortress-like structure ¨C which I am assuming is the academy grounds itself ¨C is even bigger than a damned castle, with four large towers on each of the four edges of the thing, along with one even larger tower at its center. Each of the four outer towers have walls connecting them, along with an entrance leading inside of the fortress on the inner corner of the tower.

    ¡°Name, Richard Argent. Affinity, Fire magic. Talent, level 2.¡±

    I turn around towards the noise to find the portal connected to the gate behind me, inside of the fortress itself, before I turn around again to look at the large courtyard that I now find myself in. At the center of the courtyard is a large fountain, with a brick path surrounding it splitting off into three different paths. The leftmost path leads to a relatively large building with the numbers 1-2 above the large double doors. The next path ¨C the rightmost path this time ¨C leads to another large building, but this time it is quite a bit bigger than the first, with a noticeably better appearance, and a 3-4 above its entrance.

    Lastly, the central path leads to an enormous structure with its own gate and inner courtyard behind the central tower. This one has three different fountains inside of the inner courtyard, along with a golden ¨C and quite flashy looking ¨C number 5 engraved above the gate.

    Meanwhile, in front of each of the buildings are several people, with the central building having the most people in front of it ¨C likely due to the seeded individuals who were raised by powerful families.

    ¡°Please head towards the dorm building for your talent level!¡± I hear echo across the courtyard.

    At that, I focus my attention on the rightmost building before heading towards it. As I¡¯m walking, I hear a name called from the direction of the talent level 5 building that immediately makes me frown.

    Deciding to ignore the name, I turn towards the 3-4 building before beginning to approach it.

    The group gathered in front of the 3-4 building notices me approaching and stops talking for a second before continuing again not even a few seconds later. Meanwhile, one or two of them looks back at the portal as another name is called, albeit less clearly, considering how far we are from it.

    ¡°Name, Cyria Argent. Affinity, Water magic. Talent, level 4.¡±

    Huh, another level 4 already? And wasn¡¯t that family name just called?

    Are they twins? Or do they just happen to have the same family name?

    Either way, I turn my attention to one of the instructors within the group as he looks directly at me and says, ¡°Wait with the group until the evaluation stage is complete.¡±

    I simply nod my head before going up to the building itself and sitting down while leaning against the wall with my eyes closed, slightly away from the group.

    Maybe I can get a short nap before the rest of the new cadets get evaluated. I never really was much of a people person after all.

    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.

    A few minutes pass by as names continue to get called out before I hear someone clear their throat and ask, ¡°Um, excuse me?¡±

    I open my eyes just in case whoever is speaking is talking to me, only to find a girl with long black hair and blue eyes standing right in front of me. The girl has on the same uniform as every other girl here, with a black, knee-length skirt, and a red and black blazer, along with a clear frown on her face. One that says just about as much as I need to know about how she feels being at the academy right now.

    ¡°What?¡± I ask her with a frown of my own.

    Why is someone bothering me?

    The girl just stares at me for a few seconds before asking, ¡°Would it be alright if I joined you?¡±

    I barely hold myself back from raising a brow at the question before I close my eyes again and answer, ¡°Sure.¡±

    Several minutes pass in relative peace as the group next to the dorm¡¯s entrance continues to grow from the new people, albeit nowhere near as quickly as the 1-2 dorm is likely growing.

    Eventually I open my eyes to look before finding an enormous crowd, over twice the size of the one at our dorm, standing in front of the entrance to the 1-2 dorm. Which is quite strange, considering the size difference between the dorms.

    Although all three dorms are a little too big for the number of students that will actually be attending the academy.

    After all, it¡¯s not like magicians grow on trees. So even level 1 talents are treated relatively well in the academy in regard to accommodations.

    It¡¯s mostly the other magicians that treat low talent level individuals rather poorly.

    I turn my head to find the black-haired girl leaning up against the wall of the building a few feet away from me with her eyes closed. Then, right as I am about to turn away to look at the portal linked to the gate again, the girl speaks up, ¡°What¡¯s your name?¡±

    This time I do raise an eyebrow.

    ¡°Nathan Fox.¡± Deciding to go along with it out of boredom, I answer her question before asking one of my own. ¡°And you?¡±

    The girl opens her eyes and looks at me without the frown from earlier this time as she answers, ¡°Cyria Argent.¡±

    Oh? That¡¯s the girl that I was wondering if she was siblings with that other Argent person.

    ¡°So why exactly did you come over here to talk to me?¡± I ask her with my eyebrow still raised in question. ¡°Because you don¡¯t exactly strike me as the social type.¡±

    Cyria just stares at me for a few seconds before closing her eyes and leaning her head back up against the wall as she answers, ¡°Because there¡¯re team assignments at this academy, and I wanted to find someone suitable to team up with before I ended up being randomly paired with someon. And you appeared to be the most suitable of the people here to me.¡±

    Well, someone¡¯s certainly preparing for the future¡­

    ¡°You do realize that I¡¯m only a level 3 talent, right?¡± I ask her, thinking it¡¯ll likely make her go away.

    It¡¯s not necessarily that I don¡¯t like her, it¡¯s more that she will probably attract attention to me due to being a level 4 talent.

    ¡°Doesn¡¯t matter,¡± Cyria answers, surprising me before continuing, ¡°I picked you because I thought you would work best with me out of the people here. Talent level is only a way to judge the affinity someone has for magic. Meaning the speed at which they will grow, and not how powerful they will be when they grow.¡±

    I stare at her for a few seconds before shaking my head slightly, closing my eyes again, and leaning back up against the building wall.

    That wasn¡¯t what I had expected.

    This girl might be more than I¡¯d thought she was.

    Although, if what she mentioned before about team assignments is true ¨C and I imagine it probably is ¨C then she could be of use. Even if I¡¯m immortal and all of the damage I take immediately gets rewound in both time and space, it would be good to have a water magic user in whatever group I end up in to act as a healer.

    For the rest of the group of course. But also, if I end up without a single scratch, or even any blood on my clothes, while everyone else in my group is injured pretty badly, then someone might begin asking questions. Or I might just be accused of not putting in any work.

    Either way isn¡¯t exactly a pleasant outcome for me.

    As for my group finding something off with me? The doctor already told me how to explain that. But it might not work for Class C or higher magicians, so it¡¯s best to keep the lie to a smaller number of people.

    My thoughts are interrupted as a loud bell echoes throughout the fortress, followed by the sound of a portal closing. After that, a loud voice echoes through the courtyard.

    ¡°All of this year¡¯s cadets have now been evaluated! From this point on, follow the instructor assigned to your course, and they will guide you through the rest of the process!¡±

    I open my eyes again before climbing to my feet and glancing at the other buildings.

    Where is Aidan?

 B1 | Chapter 3 - The Class C Magician

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 5 | Day 6

    As if on cue, I feel someone poking my shoulder before a familiar voice says, ¡°It looks like we¡¯re gonna be in the same course!¡±

    When I turn my head, I find Aidan with his usual grin on his face as he gives me a playful salute.

    ¡°Looks like it,¡± I answer, lacking the same bubbly excitement that he has before noticing Aidan¡¯s eyes straying to Cyria, who is still leaning up against the wall a few feet away from me as she watches the two of us interact.

    ¡°And who¡¯s this?¡± Aidan asks, his bubbly attitude fading away slightly at the presence of a stranger.

    Cyria just looks at him for a few seconds before turning to look at the instructor for our group as she answers, ¡°Cyria.¡±

    After that, the instructor ¨C who also happens to be the one who spoke to me earlier, telling me to wait for everyone else with the group ¨C begins to speak, stopping Aidan from giving any reply to Cyria.

    ¡°Let¡¯s get through this as quickly as possible, shall we? Every one of you will have a roommate of the same gender, but the dorms themselves won¡¯t be split up into any boy or girl sections. What you do amongst yourselves is none of our concern as long as you don¡¯t cause a fuss.¡± The man says with a serious look on his face; one that will clearly accept no arguments with his statement. He has on a military uniform ¨C one of a major within the military, surprisingly enough. The uniform has the usual red and black coloring, with a magi-tech under armor plating beneath a fancy looking tuxedo. On his shoulder is four bars, marking him as a major, along with a black and red circle with a star in the center. Meanwhile, the star itself has two of the five points filled in going from the center of the star all the way to the tip on each points, marking him as a Class C magician.

    Seriously? I didn¡¯t expect them to give us Class C magicians as instructors¡­ this could be bad.

    It would be best to avoid getting hurt near him.

    One of the requirements to become a Class C magician is the ability to sense the formation of spell circles, so he should be able to instantly see through my lie and tell that my immortality isn¡¯t just a ¡®spell that my family came up with.¡¯

    Why couldn¡¯t one of the other instructors that were here with him earlier be our instructor instead?

    The man continues speaking as his eyes move through each and every cadet in our group, pausing momentarily on Cyria, Aidan, and myself ¨C likely for our distance from the group. Or my young appearance, since I look like a fifteen or sixteen year old. ¡°I don¡¯t care about introductions as I¡¯ve already memorized each and every one of your names. With that said, I will introduce myself to you, seeing as I will be both your dorm head and magical circuitry class¡¯s instructor.¡±

    He stands up a little bit straighter at this point before pointing to the circled star on his shoulder, ¡°As you can tell, I am a Class C magician. My name is Leonidas de Ashford, and you will refer to me as Instructor Leo. Are we clear?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir!¡± Every single cadet in the group ¨C myself included ¨C answers with a salute. After the salute, however, a few whispers begin to break out amongst the cadets.

    Seriously? He''s also a member of the leading fire magic family in the Republic?

    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.

    That certainly complicates things.

    Uncaring of the reactions his name is giving the cadets, Instructor Leo continues speaking without any change in his demeanor, ¡°Now I will move on to how the classes will work for the first semester.¡±

    The man raises his hand, palm outwards, before a red magic circle appears in front of it. The magic circle ¨C just like with the one from the driver of that bus earlier today ¨C has hundreds of tiny lines of words running across it before it begins to shrink in on itself and five rows of six books appear in the air above our heads. The books each give off a small amount of smoke that disappears as soon as the magic circle vanishes, leaving them all to slowly float down to one student each.

    After all thirty students grab their books, the instructor continues speaking, ¡°These books will serve as a basic rundown for the classes accessible to you at this academy as first year high course students. You will also find a key inside of each book that will bond to you and the dorm room that you choose, along with the dorm roommate that you pick to room with. The keys will not bond if you attempt to room with someone of the opposite sex, nor will they bond if you try to bond with an already bonded room. Lastly, you must bond with a roommate¡¯s key first before you may bond with a room.¡±

    The whispers amongst the cadets grow louder at his words. At the same time, I turn to look at Aidan before quickly finding him nodding his head towards me.

    ¡°Roommates?¡± he whispers to me.

    I nod my head before taking my key out of the book.

    ¡°To sign up for the classes you wish to take, you need to go to a registrar located at one of those two towers,¡± Instructor Leo pauses as he points towards the two towers on the opposite corners of the fortress to the entrance portal. He then looks at each of us in the eyes and adds, ¡°Make sure that you register for at least five classes and do it before tomorrow at noon.¡±

    After that, he crosses his arms and says, ¡°That said, the class I teach, magic circuitry, is a requirement for all students going to the academy, no matter what course they are taking. But in your case? You will all be taking it with me, which will also take up one of your five required classes.¡±

    And with that, he raises his hand with his thumb and middle fingers together, says, ¡°That¡¯s all,¡± before snapping it, causing a large magic spell to appear as his entire body bursts into flames and he flies straight past us towards an open window on the fifth floor of the dormitory building.

    I guess there¡¯s no asking questions.

    So I turn towards Aidan, still with my key in hand.

    How do we bond our keys?

    Aidan simply looks between our keys and shrugs to himself before touching them together, causing a mixture of fire and electricity to sparkle around the key as I feel my mana begin to drain a little bit.

    Huh, I guess Aidan has the lightning specialized affinity. Neat.

    Putting that aside for the moment, the key in my hand begins to grow slightly warmer before the mana drain is cut off and the fire and electricity stop sparkling around the keys.

    Guess all it took was us touching the keys together.

    I look around at the other cadets, only to notice several of them watching me and Aidan before repeating what we did. After that, I turn to look at Cyria, who has a frown on her face.

    Poor girl. Looks like whoever told her about the team assignments forgot to mention the dorm situation.

    Actually, now that I think about it¡­ I turn to look at all thirty of us before counting the number of boys and girls.

    Well, that¡¯s interesting. There managed to be fourteen boys and sixteen girls total.

    Was it a coincidence that they both had even numbers? Or did Instructor Leo just not bother telling us what to do if we couldn¡¯t get a partner because he already knew that there was an even number of each gender here?

    Either way, it doesn¡¯t really matter much to me.

    I nod my head towards Cyria before starting towards the dorm building with Aidan following quickly behind me. When we reach the front doors, a strange sensation comes over me as if my person is being scanned for something before my key begins to glow slightly red.

    I turn my head to look at Aidan, only to find his key doing the same thing in his hand.

    Guess we can¡¯t enter if we don¡¯t have our keys.

    Which makes sense, considering that there are three different courses here. It wouldn¡¯t make sense to let all three courses roam free in the other course¡¯s dormitories.

    Anyways, the keys continue glowing for a few more seconds before the glow fades and the double doors in front of us open, only to slam shut again as soon as we walk through into the fancy looking entrance hall behind them.

 B1 | Chapter 4 - The Dormitory

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 5 | Day 6

    This nation really does love its red and black color scheme¡­

    The entire entrance hall is based around this, with a large, open space filling up the entrance. High up in the air, closer to the back of the room, is a floating platform where I¡¯m assuming announcements are probably made from. Meanwhile, on either side of the platform, there are two enormous, black and red spiral staircases that lead all the way up through all five floors of the building. Each floor has a long balcony that runs the entire way around each of the walls ¨C with the exclusion of the one behind us ¨C along with several hallways leading out of the room.

    Interestingly enough, each floor ¨C except the first floor ¨C has a number on the edge of the balcony for the floor, going from one to four.

    I look down at the book in my hands before opening it up and searching for the floor layouts. What I end up finding is that the bottom floor is for instructor dorms ¨C for the instructors that are actually living on campus ¨C while the rest of the floors are separated by year. The second floor is for first years, third floor for second years, fourth is for third years, and the top floor is for the fourth years.

    ¡°It looks like we need to find a room on the second floor,¡± I tell Aidan before starting towards the staircase on the right. As I¡¯m walking, I notice several people wearing the same uniforms as us walking around the different balconies, with several of them actually standing at the edge in groups chatting whilst watching us.

    The second through fourth year students, If I had to guess.

    I turn to look at Aidan before hearing the front doors open again. When I turn to look back at it, I find most of the rest of the students walking through. And ¨C surprisingly enough ¨C I actually find Cyria already walking with some other girl. The girl ¨C who I¡¯m assuming is her roommate ¨C has brown hair, with green eyes and a gentle but quiet demeanor about her.

    Figures that she would find someone else that doesn¡¯t talk much.

    Anyways, she sees me and Aidan rather quickly and nods before walking over towards us.

    I pause in my step to wait for her as Aidan continues going for a few steps. Once he realizes that I¡¯ve stopped, he stops and turns around whilst opening his mouth to speak, only to shut it again as he sees Cyria and the other girl with her walking towards us.

    ¡°And who is this?¡± I ask as soon as I think they are within hearing distance.

    Cyria looks at the girl with her before nodding her head and introducing her, ¡°This is Sophia, and she¡¯s my roommate.¡±

    I glance at the girl to find her looking between me and Aidan with curiosity. Meanwhile, Aidan does some stupid bow before saying, ¡°Hello, Sophia. My name is Aidan Hawkins. It¡¯s a pleasure to meet you!¡±

    Surprisingly enough, I catch a hint of a smile appearing on the girl¡¯s face before it vanishes just as quickly and she nods her head whilst saying, ¡°It¡¯s a pleasure.¡±

    Her casual response aside, she turns to look at me next with a slight tilt of her head.

    Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.

    ¡°I¡¯m Nathan Fox,¡± I answer with a slight nod of my head before turning around and continuing my way towards the staircase while calling out, ¡°C¡¯mon Aidan, we still have to find a room.¡±

    I hear Aidan say a quick goodbye to the girls before following after me as the voices of the other new cadets begin to spread through the enormous room. As I walk, I scan the faces of each of the other students of our course and year out of curiosity.

    Most of them don¡¯t stand out to me at all, and several of them are already beginning to form groups ¨C if they haven¡¯t already done so.

    Although there are two groups that catch my eye, each for opposite reasons. One of them is very much like the group that I had just been in with Aidan, Cyria, and Sophia, with it being a small group of only a few members. Meanwhile, the other group catches my eye strictly due to its large size.

    The second group has a total of ten people in it! I¡¯m not sure if they knew each other beforehand or not, but I do notice that most of them seem to be fussing over one girl in particular.

    A girl who ¨C interestingly enough ¨C doesn¡¯t seem to have much interest in them, despite the way they¡¯re all crowding around her.

    Suddenly, the girl turns her head and looks at me, making eye contact with me almost immediately.

    Huh, don¡¯t see golden eyes too often¡­

    Her eyes aside, I simply nod my head towards her before turning to look at Aidan, only to find him catching up to me with the other two girls following closely behind him.

    I turn back towards the stairs as we reach them before climbing up to the second floor. Once we get there, I peer through the closest hallway out of the entrance hall, finding it filled with doors all the way down the hall, each separated by quite a bit of distance.

    Uh, is it just me, or is this building larger on the inside than it is on the outside?

    Also, considering the distance between the doors, does each door have more than just a single room¡­?

    It looks like I underestimated how luxurious the dormitories would be. Although I do wonder what the low course dormitory rooms look like.

    I turn around to look at Aidan, only to find him, Cyria, and Sophia all following behind me.

    Are they really just gonna follow us?

    <hr>

    In the end, not only do all four of us end up walking together through the halls, but we also pick rooms directly across the hall from each other.

    So, I end up interacting with her anyways.

    I guess that''s fine. It''s not much worse than interacting with Aidan due to his specialized affinity.

    While specialized affinities aren¡¯t as rare as a level 4 talent, depending on what the affinity is, they can be extremely useful. Although, all a specialized affinity really is, is just someone with a normal affinity for one of the types of magic affinities, except with a particularly strong attunement to a specific type of magic within said affinity. So, in Aidan¡¯s case, he has Wind Affinity, but with a particularly strong attunement to lightning magic.

    Anyways, when we open our new room¡¯s door, we find a suite of four rooms inside of it instead of just a single room.

    ¡°This is great!¡± Aidan exclaims with a grin as he walks into the room with me following after while closing the door behind us. The main room itself is pretty big, with a few couches in one corner along with a tv, and a small kitchen in another corner. Lastly, the rest of the space appears to be just social room areas, along with storage.

    I walk up to one of the two rooms directly opposite of each other before opening the door on the left and finding a bedroom inside. It¡¯s surprisingly rather simple, with just a bed, a closet, two dressers, a desk, and some sort of screen that is mimicking a window.

    ¡°Imma take the room on the right, okay?¡± I hear Aidan call out from the other side of the suite.

    ¡°Sure,¡± I mutter before leaving the room that will be mine now and walking towards the last of the three doors. When I open it, I find a bathroom on the other side, equipped with a shower, a bathtub, sink, and a lock on the door.

    I look around the red and black themed suite for a few minutes before starting towards my room while calling out, ¡°I¡¯m going to start deciding on what classes I want to take!¡±

    Aidan¡¯s voice sounds out from his room a few seconds later, ¡°Right, I should do that too!¡±

    I chuckle slightly at that before closing my room¡¯s door behind me and approaching my new bed with the class guide in hand. The bed ¨C just like everything else in this entire building ¨C is a mixture of black and red, and it is king sized for some reason.

    That aside for now, I sit down on the bed and open up the book on my lap.

    Time to see what classes are offered here.

 B1 | Chapter 5 - Class Selection

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 5 | Day 6

    When I get to the first of the classes pages, I immediately find the one the instructor said was required at the very top.

    Basic Magic Circuitry

    Description: This class goes over the basics and fundamentals of building a magic circle, along with how to cast Tier 1 spells.

    Prerequisites: None

    That explains why the class is mandatory.

    I walk up to the desk before searching the drawers and finding some paper that was left there for the student who takes the room ¨C aka me. There are also some pencils, pens, and other supplies that might be needed.

    After placing the paper on the desk, I write down the class itself before looking at it again and finding the times the class is being taught at beneath the prerequisites. Then I turn my attention to the list of classes that follows the required one.

    Fundamentals of Wind

    Description: This class goes over the fundamentals of what the wind element truly is.

    Prerequisites: None

    Fundamentals of Water

    Description: This class goes over the fundamentals of what the water element truly is.

    Prerequisites: None

    Mana Manipulation

    Description: This class goes over how to train and split your arcs of mana, and how to effectively insert your mana into a magic circle.

    Prerequisites: None

    Magical Warfare

    Description: This class teaches you how to effectively fight on a battlefield of magicians and non-magicians.

    Prerequisites: None

    Meditation

    Description: This class teaches you the effective techniques to relax your heart, mind, and mana arcs so that your arcs of mana will regenerate mana at a faster pace.

    Prerequisites: None

    Tactics and Battle Strategy

    Description: This class goes over the basics of military tactics and battle strategies.

    Prerequisites: None

    ¡­

    Okay, there are a lot of classes to choose from¡­

    I continue reading down the list for a few hours whilst occasionally writing one of the classes down. It isn¡¯t until I hear a knock from the door to my room that I finally look up from the book and my notes to ask, ¡°What?¡±

    My door opens to reveal Aidan with his own sheet of paper as he walks in and asks, ¡°Have you finished selecting your classes yet? Because I just did.¡±

    ¡°Just about,¡± I answer him whilst turning back to look at my notes. ¡°I¡¯m just having trouble deciding between which of these last two classes to take.¡±

    Aidan walks up to me and looks at the list I have written out so far.

    Basic Magic Circuitry

    Description: This class goes over the basics and fundamentals of building a magic circle, along with how to cast Tier 1 spells.

    Prerequisites: None

    Fundamentals of Fire

    Description: This class goes over the fundamentals of what the fire element truly is.

    Prerequisites: None

    Mana Manipulation

    Description: This class goes over how to increase your arcs of mana, and how to effectively insert your mana into a magic circle.

    Prerequisites: None

    Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.

    Meditation

    Description: This class teaches you the effective techniques to relax your heart, mind, and mana arcs so that your arcs of mana will regenerate mana at a faster pace.

    Prerequisites: None

    Tactics and Battle Strategy

    Description: This class goes over the basics of military battle tactics and battle strategies.

    Prerequisites: None

    ¡°Those look almost exactly like the classes I chose,¡± Aidan says before leaning back again, ¡°although I¡¯m taking Magical Warfare instead of Tactics and Battle Strategy, and of course, Fundamentals of Wind instead of Fire.¡±

    That makes sense. Most of them are all beginner level magic classes; ones that are needed to build off of for a lot of the other classes taught here, and just to get started at being a magician in general.

    I turn to look at him before glancing at the two classes that I was debating over which to take.

    Magical Warfare

    Description: This class teaches you how to effectively fight on a battlefield of magicians and non-magicians.

    Prerequisites: None

    Magical Combat

    Description: This class teaches you how to effectively fight a magician.

    Prerequisites: None

    I''m required by the school itself to take one combat class this semester. But since there are two of them...

    ¡°I was actually trying to decide between taking Magical Warfare or Magical Combat as my last class,¡± I tell him before looking at all of the class times and frowning, ¡°but it looks like Magical Combat doesn¡¯t fit in my schedule. Not with Tactics and Battle Strategy.¡±

    Aidan nudges my shoulder ¨C to my dismay ¨C and says, ¡°Then just take Magical Warfare! It looks more practical than Magical Combat anyways, since it teaches us how to fight both magicians and non-magicians.¡±

    I agree with that logic. Although having to take a combat focused class at all makes me a little nervous about my secret coming out, but there isn''t anything I can do about that.

    I write down the Magical Warfare class as the last of my six classes before climbing to my feet with the paper in hand.

    ¡°By the way, why did you select six classes instead of five?¡± Aidan asks me with a curious look on his face.

    I glance at him before walking towards the door and answering, ¡°No real reason.¡±

    In truth, it¡¯s because I need to graduate as early as possible before people really begin to notice oddities about me. Specifically the fact that I¡¯m not aging.

    People have obviously already noticed my younger-than-average appearance, but that can at least be explained by my medical disease. The one that I¡¯ve had since I was born that makes me age slower and was mutated by the accident to make me immortal in the first place.

    But I¡¯m pretty sure people would notice the difference between aging slower and not aging at all. So it would be best to take as many classes each semester as possible in order to graduate faster.

    And while my reasoning is affected by how the doctor told me to graduate as early as possible, preferably even by my second year, it is also how I feel on the matter. Since if I look about fifteen or sixteen years old while actually being 22 or so by the time I¡¯m a fourth year, it would be stranger if someone didn''t notice that something was off. Even with my disease as an excuse.

    The only reasons I''m not taking even more classes right now are because I don''t want to completely overload myself in my first semester, and it physically wouldn''t be possible to fit all of the classes into my schedule.

    ¡°Uh huh, I¡¯m pretty sure you¡¯re just being a workaholic again,¡± Aidan says as he follows me out of my room, shutting the door behind himself, ¡°just try not to overwork yourself too much.¡±

    Okay, that''s not the reason, but It''ll work for an excuse.

    We continue walking through the common room of the suite before exiting our suite entirely into the hallway and locking the door behind us.

    ¡°After all, we don¡¯t want you passing out from exhaustion like you did in your second year of high school,¡± Aidan eventually says, dredging up the past.

    Back when I actually could pass out from exhaustion.

    Or at least, from physical exhaustion. I haven¡¯t tried it ¨C for obvious reasons ¨C but I think I can still pass out from mental exhaustion.

    My immortality only reverts my body back to perfect condition both in time and space, so it doesn¡¯t do anything to my mental health.

    Which also means that mental attacks might still affect me. They obviously won¡¯t kill me, but still.

    Then again, it¡¯s not like I can go around having someone test it out. Mental magic ¨C outside of one of the Special Magic affinities focused on a type of mental magic ¨C are almost exclusive to Tier VI spells or higher. And unless there just happens to be a trustworthy Class B magician lying around, then I doubt I¡¯ll ever be able to test it.

    ¡°What¡¯s this about passing out?¡± I hear someone ask. When I turn to look, I surprisingly find the two girls walking out of their own room on the other side of the hall from us.

    ¡°Oh, nothing much.¡± Aidan turns to look at them as he puts his arms behind his head and says with a slight nod towards me. ¡°Just this guy¡¯s habit of overworking himself until he passes out.¡±

    I frown at Aidan before crossing my arms and arguing, ¡°That only happened-¡±

    ¡°Three times.¡± Aidan suddenly cuts me off, holding out one of his hands with three fingers stretched outwards. ¡°It happened twice in your second year, and once in your first year.¡±

    Sophia chuckles at our interaction while Cyria just raises an eyebrow at me and asks, ¡°Workaholic much?¡±

    Deciding that I¡¯ve lost the argument, I just shake my head and turn around towards the entrance hall. I then begin walking whilst calling over my shoulder, ¡°Not sure what you¡¯re talking about, but I¡¯m gonna go register for my classes.¡±

    I hear quiet snickering coming from behind me, followed shortly by the sound of footsteps as they begin to follow me.

    That¡¯s just rude.

 Glossary

    Nathan Fox

    Description: 18 years old. Immortal due to a magical accident. Has short brown, wavy hair, blue eyes, a skinny but muscular build, and the permanent appearance of about a seventeen year old boy.

    Affinity: Fire

    Weapons: Arcadian metal sword and a sniper rifle.

    Classes:

    Semester 1:

    Magic Circuitry first

    Fundamentals of Fire second

    Mana Manipulation third

    Lunch fourth

    Magical Warfare fifth

    Meditation sixth

    Tactics and Battle Strategy seventh

    Aidan Hawkins

    Description: 18 years old. Energetic and friendly. In a relationship with Sophia. Best friends with Nathan.

    Affinity: Wind with a specialization towards Lightning.

    Weapons: One long dagger and one short sword.

    Cyria Argent

    Description: 18 years old. Daughter of the Healer General. Has long black hair and blue eyes.

    Affinity: Water

    Weapons: Uses a pistol and a sword.

    Amelia Marshall

    Description: 18 years old. Daughter to the Dark magic councilwoman. Has dark eyes, black hair worn in a single braid, and has sharp features on her face. Best friends with Nathan and like a sister to him.

    Affinity: Dark with a specialization towards Shadow.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Sophia Inverno

    Description: 18 years old. Has brown hair and green eyes, with a bit of an obsession towards anything magical. Is a member of a branch family of the Winters family.

    Affinity: Poison.

    Weapons: Pistol and a long metal staff.

    Rebecca Hunter

    Description: 18 years old. Part of the Hunter family. Has golden eyes and hair.

    Affinity: Gravity special affinity.

    Weapons: Bow and Knife.

    Jason Fox

    Description: Nathan''s father.

    Affinity: Wind magic with a specialization for Lightning.

    Weapons: Unknown

    Julia Fox

    Description: Nathan''s mother.

    Affinity: Not a magician.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Vilgeirr Thorn

    Description: Nathan''s Meditation course instructor. Captain in the military.

    Affinity: Unknown.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Leonidas de Ashford

    Description: Nathan''s Fundamentals of Fire instructor, his Magical Warfare instructor, and his Magic Circuitry instructor. Major in the military and a Class C magician. Member of the Ashford family.

    Affinity: Fire.

    Weapons: Sniper rifle and sword.

    Dawn Suess

    Description: Nathan''s Mana Manipulation instructor. Doesn''t like Nathan due to him defeating her son in a duel. Captain in the military and Class D magician.

    Affinity: Water with a specialization towards Flesh.

    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Anabel Walker

    Description: The Swordplay class instructor and the one who is teaching Nathan about swordplay. Also the Internship Supervisor. Major in the military and Class C magician who is getting close to Class B.

    Affinity: Enhancement.

    Weapons: Swords.

    <hr>

    Non-Magician Military Ranks:

    Private

    Corporal

    Sergeant

    Warrant Officer

    Magician Military Ranks:

    Second Lieutenant ¨C Initial rank for talent level 1-2 academy graduates.

    First Lieutenant ¨C Initial rank for talent level 3-4 academy graduates.

    Captain ¨C Initial rank for talent level 5 academy graduates.

    Major

    Colonel

    General ¨C 4 Generals in the army

    Council members above all of them.

    <hr>

    Before the next part is stated, to clear things up, just because they meet the minimum class of magician required to be a certain rank in the military does NOT automatically make them that rank. It is nothing more than one of the minimum requirements.

    <hr>

    Class E Magician ¨C Apprentice magicians ¨C Symbol is a circle.

    To be classified as a Class E Magician, one has to take a single lesson about magic from a sanctioned academy, be able to cast a Tier I spell, and have at least 10 arcs of mana.

    Class D Magician ¨C The most common class of magician ¨C Symbol is a circle with a star in the center, with one of the five points filled in.

    To be classified as a Class D Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier III spell and have at least 30 arcs of mana.

    Class C Magician ¨C The minimum class to be a major in the military ¨C Symbol is a circle with a star, with two of the five points filled in.

    To be classified as a Class C Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier IV spell, be able to sense the formation of spell circles, and have at least 60 arcs of mana.

    Class B Magician ¨C The minimum class to be a general in the military ¨C Symbol is a circle with a star, with three of the five points filled in.

    To be classified as a Class B Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VI spell and have at least 300 arcs of mana.

    Class A Magician ¨C The minimum class to be on the council ¨C Symbol is a circle with a star, with four of the five points filled in.

    To be classified as a Class A Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VIII spell and have at least 900 arcs of mana.

    Class S Magician ¨C Considered national treasures but aren''t directly under the control of the nation ¨C Symbol is a circle with a completely filled-in star.

    To be classified as a Class S Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier X spell, be able to free-cast, and have at least 3000 arcs of mana.

    The only people who have ever become Class S magicians have been Talent level 5s with only a couple of Talent level 4s due to the lower level talents dying from old age or other reasons before reaching that point.

    <hr>

    Tier I

    Capacity: Maximum of 2 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create small exterior spells, such as a weak barrier, or a fireball.

    Tier II

    Capacity: Maximum of 5 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger exterior spells, such as a large fireball, or a sound-proof barrier.

    Tier III

    Capacity: Maximum of 10 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create weak interior spells that directly affect someone¡¯s body, such as targeted healing spells, or curses.

    Tier IV

    Capacity: Maximum of 25 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire battlefield.

    Tier V

    Capacity: Maximum of 50 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger interior spells, such as shapeshifting.

    Tier VI

    Capacity: Maximum of 100 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that affect the mind, such as mind crush or telepathy.

    Tier VII

    Capacity: Maximum of 175 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger spells that can warp the mind.

    Tier VIII

    Capacity: Maximum of 300 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire city.

    Tier IX

    Capacity: Maximum of 500 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that permanently change someone¡¯s body.

    Tier X

    Capacity: Maximum of 1000 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create strategic scale spells that might even damage reality.

    <hr>

    Important families in the Republic:

    Marshall ¨C Specialize in Dark magic

    Ashford ¨C Specialize in Fire magic

    Luna ¨C Specialize in Light magic

    Winters ¨C Specialize in Water magic

    Wolf ¨C Specialize in Enhancement magic

    Griffin ¨C Specialize in Wind magic

    Umbra ¨C Specialize in Poison magic

    Silvius ¨C Specialize in Nature magic

    Hunter ¨C Specialize in Special magic

    <hr>

    Magical Affinities:

    Fire: Controls heat, flames, lava, etc¡­

    Water: Controls cold, water, ice, etc¡­

    Wind: Controls wind, lightning, air/vapors, etc¡­

    Nature: Controls the ground, nature, trees, healing etc¡­

    Dark: Controls darkness, curses, undead/unholy magic, etc¡­

    Light: Controls light, holy magic, healing, etc¡­

    Poison: Controls poisons and other afflictions.

    Enhancement: Enhances the body of the user in various different ways.

    Special: Unique magics and uncommonly seen magics that are rare and can be very dangerous or can do almost nothing.

 B2 | Prologue

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 8 | Day 14

    One and a half months after the first trip

    I block the other cadet¡¯s pulse of wind by raising a shield of flames in front of my hand as I charge straight towards them.

    ¡°Shit!¡± the cadet grunts as he begins to step backwards slightly in the plain battlefield we¡¯re on.

    After getting enough of the distance between us closed, I drop my shield and activate another spell, causing a burst of flames to explode out from behind me. This gives me a major speed boost as I narrowly dodge the remainder of the cadet¡¯s wind pulse and bring my sword about towards his neck, just for the battlefield simulator¡¯s safety function to activate at the last minute.

    I pull my sword back as I watch the cadet teleport out of the BFS with a grimace on his face before hearing the announcer declaring, ¡°And the winner is cadet Nathan Fox, making his win loss ratio for the semester a clean forty wins and three losses!¡±

    Hmm. Not bad.

    I make my way over to the platform as the walls of the BFS around me begin to turn transparent, showing me the cheering faces of the many cadets in the room.

    My eye twitches at the sight, but I soon find myself lowering down into the preparatory area beneath the BFS.

    At some point, the other cadets stopped showing me animosity and instead started sucking up to me in the hopes that I¡¯d give them the spell. And it¡¯s been really annoying.

    I quickly grab my stuff from the room before leaving out the back door to avoid the crowd. Just to immediately run into Aidan and Amelia, who are both waiting on the other side.

    ¡°Howdy,¡± Aidan says with a salute and a grin on his face. Meanwhile, Amelia just gives me a faint smile and a nod.

    ¡°With today¡¯s win, I should be in the top ten cadets competing in the arena for our grade,¡± I declare while adjusting my grip on my rifle¡¯s case.

    ¡°That¡¯s good,¡± Amelia says as we begin to walk over towards the talent level 3-4 dorms, ¡°now you just have to make sure you keep that position all the way through the last couple weeks of this semester, and the entirety of next semester.¡±

    I groan at the thought of how many duels I¡¯ll have to fight in during that time.

    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    The two next to me chuckle at my expense, but I pay it no mind as we continue walking.

    Eventually, we make it to our dormitory ¨C or to be more accurate, my and Aidan¡¯s dormitory ¨C before going inside.

    I glance at Amelia, who is still walking with us towards the stairs of the dorm.

    As it turns out, she is allowed to go anywhere on the entire campus grounds with no restrictions.

    Talk about favoritism.

    But from what I¡¯ve heard, she visited the academy several times before even getting into middle school. So¡­

    My thoughts are interrupted as I hear Sophia and Cyria¡¯s voices coming once we reach the second floor and begin making our way towards mine and Aidan¡¯s room.

    ¡°And then we-¡± Sophia cuts off the moment she and Cyria turn the corner of the hallway leading to our rooms and sees us. ¡°Hey!¡±

    Cyria looks at me and nods before glancing at Amelia and frowning slightly.

    I nod back without saying anything. Meanwhile, Aidan just leaves me and Amelia to go hug his girlfriend.

    They really do make a good couple. Even if their lovey-dovey stuff gets annoying sometimes.

    Especially when she comes to stay for the night.

    I¡¯m just glad we have soundproof walls.

    I proceed to walk past the lovebirds in the direction of my room with Amelia still walking next to me.

    ¡°It¡¯s good to see that he¡¯s found someone,¡± Amelia says after we get far enough away that neither of them can hear us.

    Without saying anything back, I nod my head in agreement.

    Ever since Aidan¡¯s mother passed away, he¡¯s been lonely. Even if he doesn¡¯t openly show it.

    But thanks to Sophia, he seems to be getting back on track again.

    A couple more minutes pass by in silence as we walk through the hall before Amelia eventually asks the same question she¡¯s been asking for a while now, ¡°Have you figured out what you¡¯re gonna do about my aunt?¡±

    And just like with the last few times she¡¯s asked, I answer, ¡°No. For now I¡¯m just going to have to deal with her.¡±

    Until I leave the school at least.

    I keep my eyes off of her as the thought runs through my head.

    It¡¯s just too bad that I don¡¯t know how exactly I¡¯m going to be leaving the school. Just that the doctor said that I would be leaving at some point around the end of the academic year.

    ¡°You know you¡¯re not going to be able to keep that attitude up for your entire time in the academy, right?¡± she says with just as much exasperation as usual. ¡°Not unless you want to be dragged along by her. And I don¡¯t want that for you.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry,¡± I tell her with a light wave of my hand as we finally reach my and Aidan¡¯s suite. ¡°I won¡¯t be dragged along by her.¡±

    Not when I¡¯m already being unwillingly dragged along by that damned doctor, who I¡¯ve recently realized was the fucking Class S space magician. It only took the sight of the man appearing through a purple portal for me to realize it.

    Why a Class S magician is working as a doctor in a children¡¯s clinic is beyond me, but just the thought that I¡¯d been meeting with him on a regular basis for so long¡­

    A shiver runs down my spine at the thought while I open the door to my and Aidan¡¯s suite of rooms, revealing the living room area.

    Also, I¡¯m not sure why the doctor stopped trying to hide his identity from me.

    Maybe something happened that I¡¯m not aware of?

    I shake my head at the thought before turning to glance at Amelia, who is closing the door behind her, and then walking up to the tv.

    Might as well check the news.

 B2 | Chapter 1 - News and Surprise

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 8 | Day 14

    ¡°Hello, I am Julia Sanders, and I¡¯m here with the latest news covering the recent Class S Split,¡± a news reporter immediately begins talking with a map behind her in some sort of nice and expensive room once I turn on the tv, making me raise my eyebrows at the timing of it. ¡°As a recap for the those of you who haven¡¯t already heard-¡±

    ¡°Meaning those of you who are living under a rock,¡± another voice, a male one this time, suddenly chimes in as the reporter is trying to talk.

    The reporter proceeds to ignore his words as she continues speaking, ¡°-the Class S magicians of every single nation have entered into a temporary non-aggression pact with each other, stating that they will not be used to fight the battles of the nations for them.¡±

    ¡°Some less willingly than others,¡± the male voice chimes in again, followed by the appearance of an old man who joins the reporter next to the map.

    Julia Sanders glances at the man and says, ¡°True enough. Some of the more nationalist Class S¡¯s wished to continue leading their nation as they were but were forced into this by the rest of the Class S¡¯s that did agree to join the pact.¡± She then turns back to the camera and adds, ¡°Furthermore, this change has caused a massive increase in the budgets of both the military and the academies of the Republic thanks to the increased need for magicians to fight.¡±

    ¡°Which Aunt Alexis is extremely happy about,¡± I¡¯m suddenly distracted from the tv by Amelia¡¯s voice, drawing me to look back and find her rummaging around in my and Aidan¡¯s fridge as if she owned the place.

    I raise an eyebrow at that before turning back to the tv and saying, ¡°I¡¯ll bet.¡±

    Just wish she wasn¡¯t strong-arming me into fighting in the arena. Even if it has been rather helpful thus far. What with getting the idiots targeting me off my back and getting me a lot more dueling experience.

    At that thought, the map shown on a screen floating behind the reporter and the man changes to show the terms of the nonaggression pact signed by the Class S magicians.

    ¡°No one knows who the first Class S magician was to suggest the pact, but by now every single one of the known Class S magicians have signed it,¡± the woman¡¯s voice continues, just for the screen to change to show a video recording of the Chairman of the Republic coming out of a limo and walking down a pathway into a very large and strategic building. ¡°However, what everyone is talking about even more than the Class S magician¡¯s current actions¡­¡±

    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.

    The reporter¡¯s words pause right at the same time as the recording freezes on the Chairman¡¯s face before continuing, ¡°¡­is how Chairman Artorius Hunter is responding to the situation.¡±

    I move over on the couch as Amelia sits down next to me.

    ¡°Or to be more frank,¡± the reporter continues as I lean back against the back of the couch, ¡°how Chairman Artorius Hunter isn¡¯t responding to the situation.¡±

    Oh?

    That¡¯s a little worrisome. Although it¡¯s also not really my problem.

    Not unless the doctor decided to drag me into it.

    Which I kind of doubt he would even bother dealing with it himself unless he had to.

    At that thought, my id card begins to chime, indicating a phone call. So I get up from the couch and make my way to my bedroom, leaving Amelia to lounge around on the couch watching the tv as I close the door behind me and pull up my id card.

    Dad?

    Wonder why he¡¯s calling.

    I answer the call while sitting down on my bed and setting the card to float in front of me.

    And the first thing I see on the video is the image of my dad¡¯s pale face as he rushes to say, ¡°Nathan, we have a problem.¡±

    My eyebrows instantly jump up at that, but I ask, ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡±

    ¡°I can¡¯t tell you everything about it at the moment, but know that your mother and I will be safe. Even if you can¡¯t contact us for a long time,¡± he continues rather cryptically.

    I furrow my brows at the, only to hear crashing sounds coming from the other side of the call, followed by the warping sound of a portal opening and the hanging up of the call without any other warning.

    The fuck?

    I wait for several minutes in the hopes that he calls me back, but it never happens. And eventually, I hear a knock on the door, followed by Amelia¡¯s voice, ¡°You still in a call?¡±

    Right as I¡¯m about to shout back in answer, my id card rings again. But when I look at who the caller id is, I freeze.

    What the fuck is he calling¡­

    Oh.

    ¡°Yes!¡± I shout back to her before immediately answering the call to see the doctor¡¯s emotionless face appear in the video feed.

    I glare at the video, just taking in his surroundings which appear to be my home before opening my mouth to speak, just to have my eyes widen in shock as a portal appears in front of my bed.

    ¡°Wha-¡± I begin to shout, only to remember Amelia in the other room and chomp down onto my tongue to stop myself.

    Not even a second later, the doctor steps through the portal and quickly notices the blood dripping out of my mouth from my tongue.

    He stares at it for a few seconds before eventually stating, ¡°Do not worry about your parents. They are safe.¡±

    My mouth drops open at his words, but I close it again a second later after realizing that he¡¯s just-

    ¡°So do not make a fuss, and continue your day as normal at the academy,¡± he continues, still with an emotionless look on his face before suddenly tossing something onto my bed and stepping back through the portal.

    -making sure I don¡¯t do anything he thinks might get in his way¡­

    I stare at the now-missing portal for several seconds before sighing and turning to the bed.

    If there¡¯s one good side to that man, it¡¯s that he never lies. So if he says that mom and dad are fine, then they are.

    A frown spreads across my face at the sight of a small orb that is now lying on my bed ¨C the very same item that the doctor tossed before leaving.

    But¡­ what¡¯s that?

 B2 | Chapter 2 - New Terminal

    Nathan

    Year 2849 | Month 8 | Day 14

    I narrow my eyes at the small orb for a few seconds, only to be broken out of my thoughts by the sound of another knock on the door, followed by Amelia¡¯s voice once again.

    ¡°Are you sure your okay? I thought I heart the start of a shout¡­¡± she tentatively asks from the other side.

    Without wasting a second, I quickly grab the strange orb and place it into my pocket, ignoring the odd tingling sensation that goes up my arm after making contact with it, before rushing to the door and unlocking it.

    ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry,¡± I tell her after opening the door. ¡°Dad was just surprised by how well I¡¯m doing in my duels.¡±

    Which is technically true. He was surprised when he first heard about that.

    Although not necessarily for the reasons she might think.

    I think he was more surprised by the fact that I was dueling in the first place.

    Anyways, she narrows her eyes at me for a second before sighing and saying, ¡°If you say so.¡± She then hoists her bag strap over her shoulder and turns around while saying, ¡°I¡¯m heading out anyways.¡±

    ¡°Alright,¡± I tell her with a single eyebrow raised.

    Not sure why she even came here in the first place. Especially considering that she only stayed for a very short period of time.

    ¡°See you tomorrow!¡± she calls out over her shoulder while leaving the small suite of rooms.

    I lock the door after her before waiting a few minutes and entering my room. I then reach into my pocket to grab the orb again, just to not find anything there.

    ¡°The¡­ heck?¡± I mutter while looking around at the floor of my room.

    Where did it go?

    After not finding it anywhere in my room, I move to the living room area and begin searching there.

    Several minutes go by with no success before I eventually give up and sit down on the couch with my arms sprayed out on either side of me.

    Well, that¡¯s just great.

    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    I reach up with one hand to run my hand through my hair to calm my nerves, just to notice something on the palm of my hand that definitely wasn¡¯t there the last time I checked.

    Uh¡­ what is that?

    For some reason, a small red circle is imprinted on the center of my palm ¨C one of the same color as the small orb that the doctor tossed onto my bed. It has what looks like small sparks of red energy coming off of it, along with what appear to be red veins streaking out through my hand with it as the source.

    ¡°Are you kidding me¡­¡± I mutter while staring at my palm out of both irritation and curiosity.

    Several seconds pass by before I realize that it¡¯s still there despite my immortality turning my body back in time.

    Just how the heck did the doctor manage to do that?

    Did he have a breakthrough that he didn¡¯t-

    Actually, he¡¯s probably had plenty of stuff that he¡¯s learned about my condition that he hasn¡¯t told me about. So there¡¯s no reason to be surprised now.

    At least this explains what that tingling sensation was earlier. Although I¡¯m kind of surprised that it didn¡¯t hurt.

    After all, it looks like whatever the orb was that the gave me burrowed into my hand somehow and is still there.

    Sounds like something that would hurt.

    I¡¯m also glad that she didn¡¯t see my-

    Wait, could she have seen my palm and just not point it out?

    My brows furrow at the thought, but I¡¯m distracted as my palm begins to heat up before a flame bursts out from it, making me stumble backwards in surprise. However, the flames just follow me and form a small screen above my hand that looks eerily similar to the screen on the id cards, making me narrow my eyes.

    Did that bastard of a doctor really insert some sort of magical terminal in my hand?

    Why the hell would I-

    The screen suddenly changes to show the doctor¡¯s face as clear as day, once again making me stumble backwards from surprise.

    ¡°What the hell is going on?¡± I ask him, barely hold myself back from shouting.

    Leodmir just stares at me with his usual emotionless face as he answers, ¡°This is a custom-built magi-tech terminal that allows a one-way connection to the hypernet, unlike that id card of the academy that uses a two-way connection. You¡¯ll need this to keep in contact with me after you leave the academy.¡±

    I open my mouth to speak, only to get shot down as he says, ¡°You won¡¯t be able to contact your parents with it, or anyone else for that matter. So don¡¯t even bother trying.¡±

    I close my mouth again in response before furrowing my brows in thought.

    ¡°Is there any particular reason for it? Other than the fact that no one will be able to tap into our calls,¡± I ask him, hoping to get some more information out of him.

    And surprisingly, it actually seems to work as he answers, ¡°Yes. The reception for your id card won¡¯t be able to reach where you will be going after leaving the academy.¡±

    My eyes widen at that, but the doctor just says, ¡°Try to find a glove to cover it up,¡± and hangs up the call before I can say anything.

    I¡¯m then left staring at a home screen made out of flames with several different applications scattered through it.

    He really just¡­ seriously?

    I mean, yes, this is normal for him. But seriously?

    Just drop a random piece of what looks like brand new, breaking-news technology on me and not even bother explaining anything about it except for why?

    That¡¯s just¡­

    I take a few seconds to think of something before letting out a sight and beginning to mess with the screen, which responds to my fingers just like the other screen. Surprisingly without actually hurting me from the flames.

    Guess it¡¯s up to me to find out what this thing can do.

    I glance down at my palm, which is facing straight up.

    And to find some gloves.

 Glossary

    List of Affinities:

    Fire: Controls heat, flames, lava, etc.

    Water: Controls cold, water, ice, etc.

    Wind: Controls wind, lightning, air/vapors, etc.

    Nature: Controls the ground, nature, trees, healing etc.

    Dark: Controls darkness, curses, undead/unholy magic, etc.

    Light: Controls light, holy magic, healing, etc.

    Poison: Controls poisons and other afflictions.

    Enhancement: Enhances the body of the user in various different ways.

    Special: Unique magics and uncommonly seen magics that are rare and can be very dangerous or can do almost nothing.

    List of Terms:

    Magician: A person with an affinity and the ability to manipulate their own personal mana. They are born with mana arcs in their body which store their mana and act as muscles to use it. Magicians are more often than not incredibly selfish and are willing to do terrible things to get stronger.

    Arcane Academy: The academy that eighteen to nineteen year olds who have an affinity with magic within the Republic of Arcania go to after graduating from high school. This place is meant to teach them how to use magic, however it is not meant to turn them into soldiers. It''s set up this way because of the way most magicians work, and how they will only be serving for a limited number of years before working on their own, outside of the Arcadian government''s direct control.

    List of Ranks in the Republic of Arcania''s military:

    Non-Magician Ranks:

    Private

    Corporal

    Sergeant

    Warrant Officer

    Magician Ranks:

    Second Lieutenant

    First Lieutenant

    Captain

    Major

    Colonel

    General ¨C There are only 4 Generals in the army.

    There are nine Council Members above the military.

    Magician Classes:

    Class E Magician ¨C Apprentice level magicians whose symbol is a circle. To be classified as a Class E Magician, one has to take a single lesson about magic from a sanctioned academy, be able to cast a Tier I spell, and have at least 10 arcs of mana.

    Class D Magician ¨C Most common class of magician whose symbol is a circle with a star in the center, with one of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class D Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier III spell and have at least 30 arcs of mana.

    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it

    Class C Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be a major in the military and its symbol is a circle with a star, with two of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class C Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier IV spell, be able to sense the formation of spell circles, and have at least 60 arcs of mana.

    Class B Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be a general in the military and its symbol is a circle with a star, with three of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class B Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VI spell and have at least 300 arcs of mana.

    Class A Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be on the council and its symbol is a circle with a star, with four of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class A Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VIII spell and have at least 900 arcs of mana.

    Class S Magician ¨C Class S magicians are considered national treasures and do not directly serve under any government no matter how much the governments dislike it, and their symbol is a circle with a star, with all of the five points filled in. However, some of them do sometimes assist the government they used to be a part of before becoming a Class S. To be classified as a Class S Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier X spell, be able to free-cast, and have at least 3000 arcs of mana.

    List of Spell Tiers:

    Tier I

    Capacity: Maximum of 2 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create small exterior spells, such as a weak barrier, or a fireball.

    Tier II

    Capacity: Maximum of 5 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger exterior spells, such as a large fireball, or a sound-proof barrier.

    Tier III

    Capacity: Maximum of 10 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create weak interior spells that directly affect someone¡¯s body, such as targeted healing spells, or curses.

    Tier IV

    Capacity: Maximum of 25 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire battlefield.

    Tier V

    Capacity: Maximum of 50 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger interior spells, such as shapeshifting.

    Tier VI

    Capacity: Maximum of 100 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that affect the mind, such as mind crush or telepathy.

    Tier VII

    Capacity: Maximum of 175 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger spells that can warp the mind.

    Tier VIII

    Capacity: Maximum of 300 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire city.

    Tier IX

    Capacity: Maximum of 500 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that permanently change someone¡¯s body.

    Tier X

    Capacity: Maximum of 1000 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create strategic scale spells that might even damage reality.

 B2 | Chapter 59.2 - The Assault Part II

    A Cliff Located Hundreds of Meters Away

    Year 2850 | Month 2 | Day 1

    Frost immediately collapses to the ground in exhaustion along with the several other magicians around them, the only one amongst them able to continue standing being the teleportation magician in charge of the Interconnection. And out of the corner of his eye, he sees that very magician moving around to mess with the devices around them, turning them all on to show a zoomed out video feed of the cave from far outside of the massive tornado.

    After a few seconds, Frost manages to regain enough strength to at least move himself into a position on the ground that lets him clearly watch the video. And the other magicians all do the same, each having signed a binding magical contract agreeing to a temporary non-aggression pact during this assault so that they wouldn¡¯t just take advantage of the others¡¯ weakness to kill them.

    And what they all see has them both in awe and relaxing ever so slightly. Because the screen shows a massive tornado ¨C one that they can actually see from here even without the screen ¨C focused on a single spot so much that it isn¡¯t even damaging the rest of the surroundings anymore. Not after it focused in on the Undying Magician at least.

    What has them all relaxing though isn¡¯t the sight of the enormous tornado filled with various different dangerous elements. It¡¯s the sight of the Undying Magician being attacked by so many different spells amidst the tornado from so many different elements that his entire body is beginning to disintegrate, not even getting the chance to heal from it.

    ¡°We did it¡­¡± Frost mutters with his exhaustion clear in his tone. And all of the other magicians nod their heads while showing relief on their faces.

    None of them say anything else as they simply watch the tornado continue to tear the magician apart until there is absolutely nothing left of him. And even then, the Tier IV spell, which at this point is bordering on the level of a Tier VIII spell instead continues to grow, slowly starting to expand to turn the forest around the cave into a wasteland.

    Frost¡¯s eyes narrow for a moment as he realizes that the refugees are perfectly safe from the spell thanks to being underground in the cave. But he shakes his head a second later.

    No need to kill them. Better to just let them stay there and serve as a reminder to the other cities and rogue magicians after we loot the Undying Magician¡¯s equipment.

    On that thought though, Frost can¡¯t help but glance at the others.

    But who will be getting what? We never did agree on that.

    ¡°I vote we leave the Undying Magician¡¯s belongings untouched for two days¡¯ time while we all recover and then decide on what to do with it then,¡± Archon suddenly speaks, making Frost realize that he wasn¡¯t the only person thinking about that particular subject. And soon enough, everyone agrees. Even the teleportation affinity magician, who is still almost peak condition.

    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    Probably agreed because he doesn¡¯t want all of our cities to attack his. Especially since his affinity isn¡¯t directly combat related, even if he can use it in combat.

    Without any hesitation, everyone begins to negotiate amongst themselves, trying to get the best benefits from this assault. And throughout this, no one pays any more attention to the screen. No one but Frost, whose eyes are practically glued to it as he continues watching just to make sure the Undying Magician is actually dead.

    The number of times my men have thought him to be dead only to realize just how wrong they were have been too great to count. I will not let my guard down like they did.

    Seconds pass, then minutes, and eventually the others finally notice his absence from their conversation.

    ¡°He¡¯s dead, Frost,¡± Archon says, enough time having passed by now for the magician to climb to his feet and move over to Frost, who is also now standing again. But Frost just frowns and says, ¡°I sure hope so.¡±

    Archon just shakes his head and focuses on the screen himself, finding the massive tornado of ice, wind, and lightning still raging on, although with less strength than before. Time then continues to pass until Archon asks, ¡°So how long is this spell supposed to run anyways?¡±

    Frost¡¯s frown grows deeper as he answers, ¡°I set it to last for ten minutes because of his supposed weakness to prolonged damage. But the worst of it should already be over.¡±

    The other magician nods his head at that, and they continue staring until the tornado finally begins to die down, leaving nothing behind but a sword and a magical storage device that managed to survive the spell somehow.

    After several seconds of silence, the other magicians having turned to focus on the screen as well, each of them climbing to their feet as well, Frost¡¯s frown finally begins to fade.

    It looks like he really is dead then. That¡¯s good.

    ¡°This is what happens when a magician with a unique constitution or magic gets too arrogant,¡± Archon says, and Frost can¡¯t help but nod his head at that.

    He certainly makes a good example of what not to do.

    ¡°Still¡­¡± Archon mutters, a frown of his own appearing. ¡°I wish I could¡¯ve studied him to find how he messed with his aging process.¡±

    Frost and all of the other magicians nod in agreement with that, some of them voicing theirs along with the nod.

    Everyone continues staring at the screen for a few more seconds before half of the magicians begin to return to their negotiating. And right when Frost is about to join them, he freezes.

    ¡°What the¡­¡± he mutters, catching the others¡¯ attention as he sees a small orb of blue and purple mana suddenly appear where the Undying Magician was previously standing. But when they all turn their focus back to the screen, the orb begins to stretch out before forming what looks like a blue and purple skeleton made purely out of mana.

    All of the gathered magicians¡¯ eyes widen in shock and fear as they all then watch the mana slowly turn into an actual skeleton, following which flesh and blood begin to form around it, slowly filling the shape of a human body.

    ¡°No¡­ it can¡¯t be!¡± Frost shouts, but despite his disbelief, the Undying Magician fully reforms without a shred of his previous armor or clothes standing in the middle of the clearing now covered in ice, burn marks, and various cut up trees with a look of pure anger on his face.

 B2 | Chapter 59.3 - The Assault Part III

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 2 | Day 1

    Right when the attack hit

    For the first time in who knows how long that I¡¯ve gotten an injury from something that wasn¡¯t my own messing around with my time and space mana, I feel enough pain that I can¡¯t help but scream. And it only gets worse as everything completely blacks out. All of my senses, everything. Just gone.

    Eventually I can¡¯t even feel anything. Everything just goes dark, with the only thing to accompany me being my thoughts with a strange phantom pain that stretches on for what seems like eternity.

    The only thing I can feel right now is anger. Anger at myself for deciding to use this as an experiment. Anger at them for constantly bothering me with no other reason than their petty thievery and jealousy of power. And anger directed towards magicians in general.

    At this whole fucking world.

    The phantom pain continues on for who knows how long. It just feels like something is both tearing me apart and repairing me at equal speeds. And the longer it lasts, the longer I wonder if it will ever end.

    But it does end. And it does so abruptly, first by letting me feel real pain from all over my body that has me screaming again. Or trying to scream, as I can clearly feel my mouth opening, but no words come out. And I can¡¯t hear anything either, or smell, or anything.

    This only lasts for a couple seconds though as soon enough my senses all return to me and I find myself standing on wobbling legs in the middle of a clearing straight out of some sort of frozen hellish battlefield. Without any clothes on.

    I scowl in the direction where I can detect a faint scent of the magicians. Their little base camp that I knew about a while ago but didn¡¯t attack to save their soldiers from slaughter when I could just kill them now.

    A decision I deeply regret.

    Even if this experience taught me something, assuming that what I¡¯m guessing happened really happened.

    It truly is impossible to kill me.

    I¡¯m pretty sure I was completely erased by that attack, and that was where that endless void of darkness was. But despite that, I¡¯m still standing here who knows how long later without a scratch. Or clothes.

    On that note, I look around for anything that may have survived the spell before finding my magical storage device along with my sword still safe.

    Good.

    I grab the storage device before pulling out some regular clothes that I had purchased from one of the nearby cities and putting them on. Then I look through to make sure everything else is safe. And fortunately it all is, including my rifle.

    Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Now then.

    I stand up straight while drawing my sword and turning a glare in the direction of the magicians again.

    Time to see how they like being erased.

    <hr>

    The Magicians Base Camp

    Year 2850 | Month 2 | Day 1

    The moment the magicians see the Undying Magician ¨C who has truly earned his title by now ¨C turn his hate-filled gaze towards them, they all immediately break up and begin stumbling away. But Frost just stands in place, not moving an inch as he stares at the screen showing the boy sprint through the forest straight towards him.

    No point in running. None of us even have the strength left after our mana expenditure to do that anyways.

    Out of the corner of his eye, Frost notices a purple spell circle activating, following which the teleportation magician ¨C a man known as Felix Strider ¨C vanishes without a word despite the pleading a couple of the other magicians were doing in order to have him bring them with him.

    Lucky bastard¡­

    Frost ignores the magicians as he stares straight ahead, the Undying Magician eventually arriving at their base camp before the others can even get a hundred meters away. But he just ignores them and heads straight for Frost, stopping right in front of him.

    Guess he¡¯s gonna take the others out after me.

    The young man glares at Frost with a look of pure hatred. But right as he raises his hand and makes a spell circle of fire mana, Frost can¡¯t help but ask, ¡°How?¡±

    The Undying Magician pauses for a second before answering, ¡°You don¡¯t deserve an answer,¡± and sending a burst of fire out to envelop Frost, setting him ablaze.

    Frost then proceeds to silently burn, not making a sound despite the pain until he is nothing but ash, not having a single ounce of mana left after the spell to defend himself despite being a higher Class.

    <hr>

    Nathan

    After dealing with the first of the nine magicians ¨C their little ringleader ¨C I quickly move around to deal with the others, each of the magicians who so recently were acting high and mighty and probably celebrating having ¡®killed¡¯ me, just like all their subordinates did whenever they thought the rogue magicians had done me in, are now acting rather pitifully. One of them even groveled at my feet.

    I didn¡¯t give him the time of day though. Just cut his head off and moved on to the eighth magician, who is the man known as Archon. And this guy I find simply sitting at the edge of a cliff, not even bothering to run anymore.

    Interesting.

    ¡°You understand that your actions here today will attract the attention of the Class B magicians,¡± Archon plain states, not even making it sound like a question. Just a statement. ¡°They will come for you. Especially since Strider escaped.¡±

    Strider. Right. That must¡¯ve been the teleportation affinity magician.

    Makes sense he would get away. But I can deal with him another time.

    Not like he had any effect on their spell anyways, since he was just their getaway after using it.

    I walk up to Archon before putting my sword to his neck and asking, ¡°Tell me everything you know about the Class B magicians,¡± not really expecting him to bother answering. But to my surprise, he does. And he does so rather thoroughly, giving me every last tiny detail I might ever need.

    When I ask why though, all he says is that it¡¯s for his own vengeance against the Class B magicians for ¡®locking us all up for so long,¡¯ whatever that means.

    Before I can ask about that, Archon actually flings himself onto my blade, making it go straight through his throat before he falls face forwards off of both the blade and the cliff.

    Damnit.

    I sigh before turning around and beginning to make my way back to their base camp.

    Maybe I can find some clues about where that teleportation magician is going. Or at least what city they lead, since I¡¯ve never met him before.

 B2 | Chapter 60 - A Clear Head

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 2 | Day 1

    I sigh as I reach my cave again to find the entire entrance collapsed, and the caved in portion covered in frozen rocks.

    This is annoying. First I don¡¯t find much on the teleportation magician outside of his affiliation, which is some sort of small city that can literally move around thanks to his teleportation magic. Meaning that I have no idea where he went or how to find him. And now I have to deal with this.

    Sometimes I wish I could just go find a nice and quiet place to train my mana arcs and create new spells in peace where others won¡¯t bother me.

    Oh wait, I already did that once.

    I shake my head at the thought before raising my hands and using several fireball spells on the rocks to both blast them open and melt the ice. And after spending quite a bit of mana just firing the balls of fire back to back, I finally melt them all enough that I can begin moving the remaining rocks out of the way myself.

    Before I even finish clearing out the rocks though, I hear whispers from the other side, likely being from nosy children who made it past Carol or something. So I hasten my rock moving effort, only to be tackled almost the moment I move a rock out of the way, clearing the path into the cave.

    ¡°Mister Nathan!!!!¡± a few kids shout after having run into my legs, none of them managing to knock me over. And I find myself struggling to figure out what to do with the large rock in my hands that I¡¯m holding over their heads.

    ¡°Now, now,¡± I hear Carol¡¯s voice, bringing my attention to the tunnel to find her shaking her head with a smile, ¡°you shouldn¡¯t bother him while he¡¯s busy.¡±

    ¡°But Carooool!!!¡± the triplets whine in sync, making me raise a brow at the girls, only for my mouth to part open at the sight of the rest of the kids who were all the original refugees on the other side of the cave-in practically bawling their eyes out.

    I carefully put the boulder on the ground, maneuvering it around the kids in the process before I pat two of them on the head and say, ¡°It¡¯s fine. No one will be coming here for the foreseeable future.¡±

    Out of the corner of my eye, I find Carol nodding with a smile on her face at that. Meanwhile more of the kids rush over to join the mass hug, making me feel incredibly awkward. Since I¡¯m not exactly used to physical contact anymore. Especially considering my blood lust that isn¡¯t exactly making this a pleasant experience.

    Despite that though, I can¡¯t help but feel a faint warmth in my chest at the affection that I¡¯ve been missing for so long now.

    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.

    Eventually Carol manages to wrangle all the kids back up and have another adult bring them back inside before she goes back to talk to me. But I don¡¯t pay much attention to that, simply staring out at the wasteland that is now the immediate surroundings of the cave.

    Most of the damage of the spell was contained after the initial blast, but it still turned the forest several dozen meters around the cliff the cave entrance is in into a bit of a frozen wasteland with sliced up and frozen trees lying everywhere. Something that might make this place rather annoying to go through for the refugees.

    So how am I going to deal with it¡­

    I blink at that thought.

    Since when did I begin treating those refugees like I¡¯m their leader or something?

    ¡°Nathan, are you¡­¡± Carol suddenly asks, bringing my attention back to her. ¡°¡­okay?¡±

    ¡°Yeah,¡± I answer with a brief nod before focusing on the frozen land again. ¡°Just wondering how to deal with this mess.¡±

    I could always just set a horizontal barrier of fire mana to cover the whole area to melt the ice. But that would be a hazard for any animals or refugees who try to go out, so I should clear the area first. It would also require me to make some hardcoded changes to the spell to make the barrier vertical and to not have it anchored on the ground anywhere.

    Then there¡¯s the barrier to the cave that I have to reinstate as well.

    Overall, a massive headache.

    I sigh at that thought before turning around and beginning to head into the cave with Carol hurrying behind me.

    For now though, I should rest. Even if I¡¯m technically at perfect health right now, or as perfect as a vampire can be, I¡­ I¡¯m still tired.

    That experience isn¡¯t something I ever want to relive.

    I¡¯ll also have to deal with anyone who saw that whole event go down, not to mention that teleportation special affinity magician who is most likely spreading the news himself. Someone I will have to deal with as soon as I can.

    Teleportation affinity is rather annoying after all.

    Actually, on the subject of special magicians, this situation with the cave could be a nice time where Xavier could come in handy. And I¡¯ll bet he¡¯s perfectly happy to help me after seeing that whole battle go down. Because I¡¯m sure he was watching it somewhere.

    Would be stupid not to keep an eye on it.

    I continue walking for a little bit before pausing mid-step and looking down at my hand and then at my sheath.

    It¡¯s¡­ I don¡¯t know. Why am I suddenly feeling a little lost?

    ¡°Nathan? Are you sure you¡¯re okay?¡± Carol asks, bringing my attention to her, only to find the elderly woman with a worried look on her face.

    ¡°Huh¡­¡± I mutter before chuckling.

    Guess it is nice to have people care about me. I was kind of looking past that for so long, simply digging my head under the stone while working on spell after spell, training my mana arcs day in and day out, and experimenting on my own body.

    And she and the kids aren¡¯t the only ones either. The other refugees, my team back in the Republic, my family. They all care. Although I have to wonder what the people back in the Republic would say about my vampiric nature. That¡¯s a problem for future me though.

    I smile at Carol and answer, ¡°I think I¡¯m fine.¡±

    She tilts her head in confusion for a second before smiling back and saying, ¡°If you¡¯re sure.¡±

    I tighten my hand into a fist for a second before moving that hand to rest my palm on my sword¡¯s pommel as I begin walking further into the cave again.

    First I get the situation here settled, then I find the teleportation magician. And after that? I can deal with whoever comes to bother me then.

    For now though, I need a nap.

 B2 | Epilogue - The chapters of book 2 will be going down at night on May 21st!!!

    The Border between the Inner and Outer Rings of the Kingdom of the Fallen

    Year 2850 | Month 2 | Day 2

    Felix can¡¯t help but feel relieved as he kneels down in front of the Baron in front of him. Relieved that he survived the assault against that monster. Relieved that all of his adversaries were wiped out. And relieved that he got an audience with the Baron in the first place.

    That relief immediately drains away though when Baron Henry Cavendish ¨C a Class B Baron from before the kingdom¡¯s fall ¨C says, ¡°You really expect me to believe this? To believe that a child somehow attained immortality and took on nine Class C magicians on their own while at Class D? Are you here to piss me off, or are you just that daft?¡±

    Felix quickly holds out a video card while keeping his head down and answering the man, ¡°My lord, please look at this. It contains evidence of my claims!¡±

    Silence fills the office for several seconds, making Felix begin to wonder if coming was a bad idea or not. But eventually he feels the Baron taking the video card from his hand before he begins walking away towards his desk. And it¡¯s only now that Felix finally gains the courage to raise his head and look at the man.

    The Baron has light gray hair and is widely known to be in his late sixties to early seventies. He is wearing a set of armor similar to the one Felix and the other Class C magicians destroyed that belonged to the Undying Magician, but clearly outdated and old. And he has a simple sword sheathed at his waist. One whose sheath is pitch black with several light streaks of silver running through it.

    ¡°This had better be worth the time you¡¯ve wasted so far,¡± the Baron says in a gruff tone of voice, but right after he pushes a button on his desk to bring down a projector screen and is about to put the video card inside of his computer, he pauses and waves a hand at Felix. Several magic circles then appear around Felix, making him panic for a moment, only for silver chains to wrap all around the man. And even after he tries to use a teleportation spell to get out of it, more chains simply smash into the spell circles he summons before they can do anything, leaving him stuck in the chains. ¡°You will sit quietly while I review this. And if it has been a waste of time, I¡¯ll find a very nice use for you.¡±

    Felix feels shivers run down his spine at those words, but he still manages to calm down as the Baron puts the video card in and begins to bring the video up onto the projector.

    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.

    He¡¯ll let me go after he sees the video. I¡¯m sure he will.

    The video begins to play on the projector, and the Baron simply crosses his arms as he watches it, not showing a single reaction until the video reaches the point where the nine magicians are combining their spells into one. At which point he glances at Felix with a raised brow and asks, ¡°You really went to the trouble of constructing a multi-element spell just for this brat?¡±

    The Baron doesn¡¯t bother listening to his response though, simply returning his attention back to the screen again before watching the spell play through, completely eradicating the seventeen or eighteen year old appearing boy from existence. And after he sees that, he turns to narrow his eyes at Felix, only for Felix to shout, ¡°Keep watching!¡±

    ¡°This better be worth the time,¡± the Baron says with malice clear in his eyes before he focuses on the screen again, soon finding the video to be speeding up over the span of ten minutes. Then, after he sees the orb of blue and purple mana appear, his eyes immediately widen, and he uncrosses his arms while stepping around his desk to get closer to the projector screen. ¡°It can¡¯t be¡­¡±

    Felix relaxes a little when he hears that, and even more when he stretches his neck around to follow the man as he walks up to the screen and becomes totally enthralled by the process of the Undying Magician reforming himself.

    That¡¯s it. Exactly the response I was hoping for.

    A faint smile stretches across Felix¡¯s lips as he sees the look of both awe and obsession forming on the Baron¡¯s face.

    The old man is getting closer and closer each year to passing away from old age, so the possibility of immortality is far too much for him to ever pass up on.

    Just according to Felix¡¯s prediction, the man immediately turns around the moment the video ends and begins walking around his desk while snapping his fingers, making the chains all shatter in an instant, freeing Felix in the process. He then stops in front of his chair behind the desk and slams his hands on the desk itself, asking, ¡°Where is this boy?! I must capture him!¡±

    Felix rubs various places on his body that the chains had hurt in the process of capturing him as he answers, ¡°First I would like a guarantee of protection from him, along with a portion of the research results you get from experimenting on him.¡±

    The Baron narrows his eyes on Felix and doesn¡¯t say anything for a few seconds before eventually saying, ¡°Very well. You will have your protection and results. But first I will need to prepare.¡± He looks down at his desk for a second before grabbing his terminal ¨C one from before the Kingdom fell ¨C and begins messing with it for a bit. ¡°And I will need to gather another two Barons to help us make a Tier VIII spell, no matter how much I despise the idea.¡±

    Felix grins as the man starts a call on his terminal and begins speaking with another Baron through it.

    Now let¡¯s see who gets the last laugh, Undying Magician.

 Book 2 Amazon Announcement and Update

    The Undying Magician book 2 has just released on Amazon Kindle Unlimited!!!

    If you''re interested, click here</a>!

    Any reviews or ratings you can give me there will help a lot!

    Or if you''d just like to reread TUM books 1 and 2 there, because the books there have been proofread and had their typos and grammatical errors corrected since they were on Royal Road. So overall their quality is better.

    That aside, I will also be starting my summer semester of college in a couple weeks. However, I will only have a single class during this semester, and it''s basically a blow-off class. It''s Music Appreciation. And it''s fully online and asynchronous(meaning no live lectures online or otherwise).

    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.

    So the class shouldn''t be much work at all. Just that it''s a five week long class, so less than half the time as compared to my usual classes. And it''s the first time I''m taking a summer class in the first place.

    The reason why I''m taking it is because I dropped a class last semester and would like to make up for that this summer.

    And one more thing!

    I''ll be going on a trip out of state for the first time in several years to visit family with my dad the first week after my summer classes ends! Although I''ll probably still be writing at the time, it might slow down how much I can write depending on how things go.

    Have a great rest of your day!

 B3 | Glossary

    Summary of Book 1:

    The story began with Nathan Fox, an eighteen year old magician with average talent in magic, as he goes to the Arcane Academy, the biggest academy for magicians in the world. Nathan Fox is a true immortal who cannot die no matter how much harm is done to him as his body will always revert back to how it was prior to any damage he takes, whether mental, physical, or magical. Which, if this were to be found out by any magicians other than those already in the know, would get him captured and experimented on immediately.

    Nathan quickly began to navigate his way through his first semester at the Academy, making some new friends along the way along with meeting some instructors who were told by his doctor, a powerful psychopath within the Republic in his own right, to look after him and teach him. A doctor who is experimenting on Nathan in order to find out how he became immortal in the first place so that he can replicate the process.

    During his time in the Academy, Nathan and his instructor Leo make up an excuse for his immortality that will only last for so long, blaming it on an incredibly powerful fire magic spell. But he is slowly beginning to gather more attention from those in higher positions, and the last book left off on his best friend Amelia¡¯s aunt directly telling him to participate in the duels so that he can qualify for a position in the special class and advantages soon to be added to the Academy by the Council.

    <hr>

    Glossary

    Nathan Fox

    Description: 18 years old. Immortal due to a magical accident. Has short brown, wavy hair, blue eyes, and a skinny but muscular build.

    Affinity: Fire.

    Weapons: Arcadian metal sword and a sniper rifle.

    First Semester Classes:

    Magic Circuitry first

    Fundamentals of Fire second

    Mana Manipulation third

    Lunch fourth

    Magical Warfare fifth

    Meditation sixth

    Tactics and Battle Strategy seventh

    Aidan Hawkins

    Description: 18 years old. Energetic and friendly. In a relationship with Sophia. Best friends with Nathan.

    Affinity: Wind with a specialization towards Lightning.

    Weapons: One long dagger and one short sword.

    Cyria Argent

    Description: 18 years old. Daughter of the Healer General. Has long black hair and blue eyes.

    Affinity: Water.

    Weapons: Uses a pistol and a sword.

    Amelia Marshall

    Description: 18 years old. Daughter to the Dark magic councilwoman. Has dark eyes, black hair worn in a single braid, and has sharp features on her face. Best friends with Nathan and like a sister to him.

    Affinity: Dark with a specialization towards Shadow.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Sophia Inverno

    Description: 18 years old. Has brown hair and green eyes, with a bit of an obsession towards anything magical. Is a member of a branch family of the Winters family.

    Affinity: Poison.

    Weapons: Pistol and a long metal staff.

    Rebecca Hunter

    Description: 18 years old. Part of the Hunter family. Has golden eyes and hair.

    Affinity: Gravity special affinity.

    Weapons: Bow and Knife.

    Jason Fox

    Description: Nathan''s father.

    Affinity: Wind magic with a specialization for Lightning.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Julia Fox

    Description: Nathan''s mother.

    Affinity: Not a magician.

    Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Vilgeirr Thorn

    Description: Nathan''s Meditation course instructor. Captain in the military.

    Affinity: Unknown.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Leonidas de Ashford

    Description: Nathan''s Fundamentals of Fire instructor, his Magical Warfare instructor, and his Magic Circuitry instructor. Major in the military and a Class C magician. Member of the Ashford family.

    Affinity: Fire.

    Weapons: Sniper rifle and sword.

    Dawn Suess

    Description: Nathan''s Mana Manipulation instructor. Doesn''t like Nathan due to him defeating her son in a duel. Captain in the military and Class D magician.

    Affinity: Water with a specialization towards Flesh.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Anabel Walker

    Description: The Swordplay class instructor and the one who is teaching Nathan about swordplay. Also the Internship Supervisor. Major in the military and Class C magician who is getting close to Class B.

    Affinity: Enhancement.

    Weapons: Swords.

    Adalwolf Giese

    Description: He is a Class S death magician and the king of the Kingdom of the Fallen, previously known as the Kingdom of Giese. He is also a skeleton.

    Affinity: Death.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Artorius Hunter

    Description: He is the current chairman of the Republic and a newly advanced Class S magician who is obsessed with doing everything he believes he can to benefit his nation.

    Affinity: Anti-magic.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    Leodmir Archeron

    Description: He is Nathan¡¯s doctor and experimented on him for years to find out how his immortality worked. He is also the leader of the Class S¡¯s side of the war against the nations and a Class S magician himself.

    Affinity: Space.

    Weapons: Unknown.

    List of Affinities:

    Fire: Controls heat, flames, lava, etc.

    Water: Controls cold, water, ice, etc.

    Wind: Controls wind, lightning, air/vapors, etc.

    Nature: Controls the ground, nature, trees, healing etc.

    Dark: Controls darkness, curses, undead/unholy magic, etc.

    Light: Controls light, holy magic, healing, etc.

    Poison: Controls poisons and other afflictions.

    Enhancement: Enhances the body of the user in various different ways.

    Special: Unique magics and uncommonly seen magics that are rare and can be very dangerous or can do almost nothing.

    List of Terms:

    Magician: A person with an affinity and the ability to manipulate their own personal mana. They are born with mana arcs in their body which store their mana and act as muscles to use it. Magicians are more often than not incredibly selfish and are willing to do terrible things to get stronger.

    Arcane Academy: The academy that eighteen to nineteen year olds who have an affinity with magic within the Republic of Arcania go to after graduating from high school. This place is meant to teach them how to use magic, however it is not meant to turn them into soldiers. It''s set up this way because of the way most magicians work, and how they will only be serving for a limited number of years before working on their own, outside of the Arcadian government''s direct control.

    List of Ranks in the Republic of Arcania''s military:

    Non-Magician Ranks:

    Private

    Corporal

    Sergeant

    Warrant Officer

    Magician Ranks:

    Second Lieutenant

    First Lieutenant

    Captain

    Major

    Colonel

    General ¨C There are only 4 Generals in the army.

    There are nine Council Members above the military.

    Magician Classes:

    Class E Magician ¨C Apprentice level magicians whose symbol is a circle. To be classified as a Class E Magician, one has to take a single lesson about magic from a sanctioned academy, be able to cast a Tier I spell, and have at least 10 arcs of mana.

    Class D Magician ¨C Most common class of magician whose symbol is a circle with a star in the center, with one of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class D Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier III spell and have at least 30 arcs of mana.

    Class C Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be a major in the military and its symbol is a circle with a star, with two of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class C Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier IV spell, be able to sense the formation of spell circles, and have at least 60 arcs of mana.

    Class B Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be a general in the military and its symbol is a circle with a star, with three of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class B Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VI spell and have at least 300 arcs of mana.

    Class A Magician ¨C This is the minimum class to be on the council and its symbol is a circle with a star, with four of the five points filled in. To be classified as a Class A Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier VIII spell and have at least 900 arcs of mana.

    Class S Magician ¨C Class S magicians are considered national treasures and do not directly serve under any government no matter how much the governments dislike it, and their symbol is a circle with a star, with all of the five points filled in. However, some of them do sometimes assist the government they used to be a part of before becoming a Class S. To be classified as a Class S Magician, one must be able to cast a Tier X spell, be able to free-cast, and have at least 3000 arcs of mana.

    List of Spell Tiers:

    Tier I

    Capacity: Maximum of 2 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create small exterior spells, such as a weak barrier, or a fireball.

    Tier II

    Capacity: Maximum of 5 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger exterior spells, such as a large fireball, or a sound-proof barrier.

    Tier III

    Capacity: Maximum of 10 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create weak interior spells that directly affect someone¡¯s body, such as targeted healing spells, or curses.

    Tier IV

    Capacity: Maximum of 25 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire battlefield.

    Tier V

    Capacity: Maximum of 50 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger interior spells, such as shapeshifting.

    Tier VI

    Capacity: Maximum of 100 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that affect the mind, such as mind crush or telepathy.

    Tier VII

    Capacity: Maximum of 175 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create stronger spells that can warp the mind.

    Tier VIII

    Capacity: Maximum of 300 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells on the scale of an entire city.

    Tier IX

    Capacity: Maximum of 500 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create spells that permanently change someone¡¯s body.

    Tier X

    Capacity: Maximum of 1000 arcs of mana per spell.

    Summary: Can create strategic scale spells that might even damage reality.

 B3 | Chapter 1 - The Undying Caverns

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 3 | Day 1

    A month after the Assault on Nathan

    ¡°Begin,¡± I declare as I sit on the chair at the head of the meeting table with my arms crossed looking directly at my head of logistics.

    The older man immediately answers, straightening a little in his seat as he has a screen showing on the table in front of him, ¡°Over the past month, we have gained a total of three hundred and thirty one new refugees and have branched out into more caverns to house them all. And thanks to the help given to us by Sir Xavier, the Creation magician of New Hope, we¡¯ve successfully managed to keep up with the construction it required to build them all homes. Now we are reaching the point where we¡¯re gonna have to start digging more tunnels to continue accommodating the flood of refugees from the warzone cities.¡±

    I nod my head before looking down at the table for a moment.

    Those eight cities losing their leaders made for a lot of chaos. And amidst that chaos, there have been a vast number of people rushing off to live here in the Undying Caverns ¨C which is what everyone has started calling my cave.

    It reached the point that we¡¯ve basically become a city ourselves, and I needed to get some more skilled people at management to handle the city. Moreso than an elderly orphanage director at least.

    I look up at the people I¡¯ve got mostly running the city under me. The head of logistics ¨C Ryan Haris ¨C was actually a captain under one of the eight magicians, although a nice one. He led the refugees from there to here, protecting them every inch of the way from both the undead and even other soldiers that had gone on a criminal spree after their leader was taken out.

    And after some initial trust issues, I did end up giving him some authority in the Undying Caverns purely due to the logistics management skills he¡¯s shown.

    The man has long gray hair and is wearing a set of kevlar armor as he messes with the screen in front of him.

    I turn my attention to Benjamin Anderson, the leader of the cavern¡¯s enforcers and a refugee soldier from before the assault launched by the other magicians, as I ask, ¡°Have there been any problems?¡±

    ¡°No sir,¡± he says with a light shake of his head, sitting stiff as a rod. ¡°Nothing more than a few rogues who attempted to sneak past the guards at the entrance and were shot in the knees for the effort before being arrested. There haven¡¯t been any issues with those already processed.¡±

    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.

    ¡°Good,¡± I state with a nod before looking away from the young man with blond hair to focus on the woman who¡¯s become my second in command since Carol recommended her. A woman who is just a couple years older than me and a magician as well. One with water magic. ¡°And do you have anything to add to this meeting, Claire?¡±

    Claire Taylor just shakes her head, the woman wearing attire that would be classified as business formal attire, with a white dress shirt, a tie, a black skirt, and heels. Something she insists is proper for someone in her position.

    In some ways she¡¯s become my assistant, but in others? She actually knows more about how to manage a city than I do. So she¡¯s been a lot of help. And the only reason I could trust her as much as I do is because Carol recommended her.

    Well, that and she hated Frost. Absolutely hated him. And she herself apparently wanted to help me after hearing that I killed him.

    ¡°In that case, let¡¯s move onto the next topic,¡± I continue, leaning forward a little in my chair. ¡°Has there been any news on the Barons?¡±

    Benjamin shakes his head at that says, ¡°Negative. They¡¯re still just going about as they always do. No obvious changes to their routine.¡±

    I narrow my eyes at that, unsure of how to take it. The teleportation affinity magician who got away must have informed at least one of the Barons about me, but I¡¯m not sure which of the seven they informed.

    Unfortunately, my original information on the Kingdom of the Fallen was less accurate than I¡¯d have liked. Because the knowledge of most of the people and even a lot of the magicians in what is apparently the inner ring of the continent is lacking.

    They don¡¯t know much about the outer ring, and I only learned recently from the stuff left behind by Frost at the magicians¡¯ base camp about it.

    ¡°If that¡¯s the case, keep an eye on them. No movement is worse than showing movement in some cases,¡± I order him, and he immediately nods. Then I let out a brief sigh before standing up and declaring, ¡°This meeting is adjourned.¡±

    All three of them begin gathering their stuff as I leave the room into a short tunnel leading to a guarded entryway to a large cavern. And both of the guards there glance at me before standing just a little bit straighter.

    Without bothering with them, I make my way towards my house, which is constantly under the guard of several soldiers working for my new city. Mostly to make sure no one goes in. Because I very much like my privacy.

    Guess that¡¯s rather typical for a magician though.

    Although in hindsight, I guess the Undying Caverns isn¡¯t really big enough to consider a city yet. But it¡¯s certainly growing in that direction considering all of the many refugees constantly moving in.

    It was rather surprising how fast everyone tends to forget about my vampire side when they don¡¯t see my eyes flash with crimson light though.

    After making it to my house, I give the guards a brief nod before going inside. The house itself hasn¡¯t changed much, mostly just getting better equipment and appliances in it, along with a better supply of electricity from the generators I¡¯ve gotten moved down here. We¡¯ve also gotten the small underground watermill that was deeper in the caves in a spot I barely went to up and running finally, giving a fresh supply of power to the various homes.

    So overall it¡¯s been nicer since everyone came. And it¡¯s probably better for my sanity anyways, not always living on my own and experimenting on myself.

    I smile a little at that thought before heading to my lab.

    Time to see if I can¡¯t get that spell working finally.

 B3 | Intermission 6, and Chapters 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, and 62

    There will be no advanced chapters on my Patreon for a short period of time for The Undying Magician as I rebuild up advanced chapters. And during that period of time, there will be no new chapters on Royal Road. You have been warned.

    Intermission 6

    <hr>

    All across the Mainland

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 24

    Everyone on the continent, regardless of what nation they are from, stops whatever they were doing when various sirens echo out across the continent. Each belonging to different nations.

    After the sirens, the words of the leaders of each nation, along with the words of the Class S magicians leading the rebellions for the nations, echo out at once.

    All of their words vary, but each one directly declares the rediscovery of the Kingdom of the Fallen, which had stayed hidden for all these years while building itself back up. Proving itself to not be the wasteland everyone believed it to be.

    Then one nation after another declares war on the newly rediscovered nation of the Dead King, whose name was declared along with the nation. The King of the Dead. King of the former Kingdom of Giese, and current King of the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    The only Class S death magician in the world. Possibly the only death magician in the world.

    And the bane of the Republic, who fought to a standstill with several other Class S magicians in the old war many years ago.

    Adalwolf Giese.

    But very few of the citizens or soldiers are happy about the news.

    Because war has been spreading across the continent, causing chaos one turn after another for years. Entire nations have been split into factions, Class S magicians abandoning their own nations for better treatment, and even leaders of nations being assassinated. With the civilians and conscripted soldiers being sacrificed as pawns throughout the process. Drastically decreasing the population of the various nations.

    And now another participant of the war has just arrived, bringing further chaos. Further war. And further death.

    So the people push back against the declaration of war. Even if it is a war against the Dead King.

    And despite the magicians usual treatment of the people, the push back grows so great in force that the leaders of every power gather together within the Council Chambers of the Republic. A place that is still cracked all over from Leodmir¡¯s past visits.

    There the leaders all form an agreement to appease the rebelling citizens. One without the participation of the Kingdom of the Fallen or the Dead King.

    An agreement stating that the war between the nations will take place within the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    One to ban all fighting on the mainland itself, keeping the non-conscripted citizens safe.

    All of the factions will fight on the smaller continent, and each faction will be eliminated either when 75% of their forces are eliminated or their designated Class S leader is killed or captured.

    The leader of the Class S magician faction, Leodmir Archeron.

    The leader of the Republic¡¯s faction, Artorius Hunter.

    The leader of the Kingdom of the Fallen faction, Adalwolf Giese.

    And various smaller leaders of the other nations which had split off from the original alliance with the Republic.

    Edgar Brodnax, leader of the Collective Kingdoms.

    Leopold Houk, leader of the nation of Entaria.

    Juan Sequani, leader of the nation of Natra.

    And Emma Sonnen, leader of the White Kingdom.

    Leaving the other nations to join hands with the Republic or the Class S magician faction, or remaining entirely neutral in the case of the nation of Hardlight. The nation led by the greatest healer on the mainland.

    And when the war comes to an end, according to the agreement, all remaining nations will join together under the command of the winning nation.

    This agreement satisfies the people of the nations enough that the rebellions slow to a crawl, leaving the remaining rebellions squashed ruthlessly by the magicians. And soon enough, the various nations all send their forces out in droves to the Kingdom of the Fallen. Whether through teleportation straight to the shores in the case of the Class S magician faction, or through battleships. Each nation sends out their armies in full force.

    And the moment they arrive, they¡¯re faced with a large cloud of miasma spreading out across the shores, somehow not harming the battleships already located there from the Kingdom of the Fallen. Nor the people on board the battleships.

    Before the mainland nations attempt to fight each other though, they each try to build a solid foundation on the Kingdom of the Fallen. Try to set up a home base for themselves.

    So they all attack from different directions, clashing directly with the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s forces.

    But none of them other than the Republic and the Class S magician faction manage to break through into the small continent itself. Instead being held back by the forces of the Dead King.

    Meanwhile seers from other continents take notice of the battle and watch. None of them acting in any way, but none of them taking their gazes away from the war either.

    Because this war will affect the entire balance of the world, as whoever wins will take over the two continents. But not without growing weak from the aftermath first.

    And if the Kingdom of the Fallen were to win the war, then the other continents may decide to stop ignoring the continents entirely. Since the grudge they have is not against the Kingdom.

    It¡¯s against the Republic.

    In one of the battleships controlled by the Republic, a single team of magicians can be seen. Amongst this team are four women and two men. All, with the exception of the academy instructor leading the team, twenty years of age and wearing uniforms from the Arcadian Republic¡¯s military given out to students of the Arcadian Academy acting fulltime as soldiers.

    Uniforms with powerful protection enchantments on them.

    The magicians consist of a fire affinity magician, a lightning specialization magician, a water affinity magician, a poison affinity magician, a gravity affinity magician, and a shadow specialized magician. And of these six people, none of them are pleased to be there. And all of them are under the command of the Healer General of the Arcadian Republic¡¯s military.

    And they¡¯re currently landing on the continent.

    Landing in the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    Chapter 56

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    The Nobles

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    The next day I find myself alone in a meeting room with just Claire and Benjamin by my side, and a large screen at one end of the room displaying various videos. Each of which show a noble of the Kingdom of the Fallen. And it honestly feels like all of their attention is focused on me rather than each other, despite us being in a group call. Making it impossible to really tell who they¡¯re focused on.

    ¡°As of this morning, we have received word of a unilateral agreement signed by every faction of this war other than our own Kingdom,¡± Duke Elmwood states while staring at the screen with a rather hard to decipher face. He has the same brown hair as his daughter, except with hints of a vivid green spread through it. His eyes are that same color of green instead of her brown eyes, and they glow ever so slightly. Clearly displaying how powerful his understanding of nature magic is.

    Duke Stretarious scoffs at that, the man rolling his eyes in the process as his long black hair falls over his shoulder. But he doesn¡¯t say anything, the Class B earth magician not generally being one to speak. Even if he has no problems scoffing or displaying his irritation.

    ¡°Just like the damned Republic to not even consider us in the negotiations,¡± Marchioness Solar says as the woman leans with her head resting on her elbow, her elbow on a table. Meanwhile she has a lazy yet irritated look on the Class B light magician¡¯s face. ¡°What was in the agreement?¡±

    Duke Elmwood¡¯s eyes narrow ever so slightly. Just barely noticeable. Then he answers, ¡°All combat during this multi-faction war will be fought on the lands of the Kingdom of the Fallen, and the winner at the end of the conflict will take control of all territory belonging to the losers of the conflict.¡±

    Seriously?

    I stare incredulously at the screen as Claire begins writing this down.

    ¡°Additionally, the losers will be determined by two different deciding factors,¡± the duke continues, still without showing any expression on his face. ¡°Either the faction¡¯s leader is killed or captured, or seventy-five percent of their forces are eliminated. With their leaders being the Class S magician leading their faction during the war.¡±

    Chaos immediately breaks out amongst the nobles as they all start talking at once. But I just look down while rubbing my chin.

    Two ways to win. Through war or through single combat between the designated leaders.

    And it¡¯s obvious who ¡®our¡¯ leader is, since there¡¯s only a single Class S magician in the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    The skeleton.

    At the very least we don¡¯t have to worry about the skeleton getting killed. Something many of the nobles are talking about. How their king can¡¯t die. What with him being a death magic magician at Class S.

    It¡¯s just not possible unless he were to completely run out of mana entirely. Which isn¡¯t possible unless he wants it to happen.

    His regeneration as a Class S magician is too great.

    As for seventy-five percent of our forces¡­ our numbers are far fewer than the nations on the mainland. So this condition won¡¯t work out well for us. Not well at all.

    They need to kill far fewer of us than we need of them.

    The only benefit we have is that they¡¯re probably still gonna be focusing on fighting between themselves rather than us. Since we¡¯re the small fry here. The ones with far less unity and power. Far fewer forces. And far less resources and inferior technology.

    Which should make for some great ambush opportunities.

    And there¡¯s no point in hiding my immortality. Not when they can find out from any random Joe in the Kingdom of the Fallen. Considering that I¡¯m considered the prince of this nation by some, including the king of the nation.

    An announcement that wasn¡¯t exactly a private one.

    Especially in the Outer Ring apparently.

    The nobles all continue talking amongst themselves, without much progress being made. But none of them actually leave the call despite some of them looking rather angry.

    I¡¯m honestly a little impressed by that.

    The nobles of the Kingdom of the Fallen have never gotten along with each other for as long as I¡¯ve been here. And that¡¯s without me even knowing every noble by name. Just the more important ones.

    Although now that I¡¯m interacting with them all, I should spend more time gathering intel on all of them.

    On a different note, there are twenty eight total nobles not including myself amongst these nobles. However, of the twenty eight screens, five are currently blacked out with no one shown on them.

    The five barons I¡¯ve killed, including Cedric who I killed with my brute force strength, that poison affinity guy who was killed by the destruction affinity magician, and the other three killed in the war I just finished not long ago.

    None of the other nobles seem to care about their absence though. Which is saying something.

    Actually, speaking of the destruction affinity magician¡­

    I glance at her screen, finding Rachel to be lounging around on a sofa lying on her front with her face in her arms on the armrest of the sofa. And she doesn¡¯t seem to be paying even the slightest bit of attention to what is being said. Other than clearly enjoying the chaos going on, judging by her smile and how she¡¯s just tilting her head back and forth.

    Then there¡¯s Baron Crimson. Val Crimson.

    He¡¯s¡­ just casually sitting there drinking some wine.

    Yeah, he¡¯s probably just waiting for people to actually get serious instead of throwing out random shouts and complaints.

    I glance at Duke Elmwood to find him staring blankly at the screen without saying a word, once again with an unreadable expression on his face. Which I can¡¯t help but compare to his daughter¡¯s usually calm expression.

    She isn¡¯t the same in any way, but she definitely has some traces of that expression in her. Even if she does show happiness unlike this guy from what I¡¯ve seen.

    I glance at Claire to find her writing down everything everyone is saying just for future note. In case they say something important or that they shouldn¡¯t. Meanwhile my general is just frowning at the screen.

    This is going to be a long meeting¡­

    Chapter 57

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    Exemption

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    It takes almost an entire fifteen minutes for the stupid nobles to progress past their petty squabbles and shouting before we all finally begin to decide on our plans going forward. Of which are largely decided by the Class A and more advanced Class B magicians of the bunch. Since I don¡¯t really care much about how the war actually goes so long as I come out on top myself.

    And either way, I¡¯ll be fighting someone after the war. Whether that¡¯s the nobles, returning to our feud, or whoever goes after me from the nations post-war.

    A fact that is pretty much set in stone will happen. Since there¡¯s no way the magicians of the mainland will be able to resist the idea of immortality.

    In all honesty, the war might be helping in that regard. They¡¯ll be too busy focusing on their immediate survival and grudges to deal with me. Delegating me as a later matter to handle after they learn of my existence.

    Quite convenient.

    So by the end of the conversation, it¡¯s decided that all of the nobles on the shores of the continent will be the frontline forces. Each of which also happen to be the stronger forces, both economically and in numbers and magic. Partially due to the lack of miasma on the shores, and partially due to having access to the ocean and the fish in it.

    Fish that aren¡¯t contaminated by any miasma.

    Meanwhile the weaker nobles are all required to send their forces to assist. At least seventy-five percent of their forces.

    And while everyone at first objected to this, since that¡¯s a large portion of their forces, we were all shortly convinced after Duke Elmwood brought up mention of us all signing a magically enforced contract. One that bans any and all attempts to harm, interfere with, or do anything against other signatories of the contract.

    Making it so that our territories are, in fact, safe from the other magicians.

    On paper at least.

    There are still some ways to get around that. But none that we¡¯d need a large number of forces to stop.

    And none that would require a large number of forces either.

    To my surprise though, after we finish with that decision, Duke Elmwood turns his attention to me and says in front of everyone, ¡°Before we agree on the final details of the contract, I would like to add an exception for the Undying Magician.¡±

    Silence fills the room as the other nobles all show various different reactions. Most of which are curiosity and silence, but some seem irritated at the mere mention of me.

    ¡°And what would this exception be, Duke Elmwood?¡± I ask with my arms crossed and one brow raised.

    He doesn¡¯t miss a beat as he answers, ¡°You have the least forces out of all of us, and you have just finished with a major conflict of your own. Therefore I would like to suggest your forces be exempt from joining the battle.¡± And before anyone can object to that, he adds, ¡°Of course, this is with the stipulation that you must be present during the war at all times. You yourself are not allowed to leave the frontlines and must fight a certain amount every single month using your special constitution to the advantage of our fair Kingdom.¡±

    Silence fills the room, and after his added comment after the first part, which left people more than a little angry, everyone calms down in a matter of moments. Clearly deciding that having me fighting on the frontlines personally throughout the war would be a far better benefit than having my meager forces joining in.

    And I have to admit, it does sound nice. Because it means others are even less likely to mess with my people during this.

    ¡°I support this exemption,¡± Duke Stretarious says with a smirk on his face. One I feel is directed at me.

    Then Crimson quickly adds his own word on it, saying, ¡°Supported.¡±

    Followed shortly by the psycho lady, Rachel, ¡°I support this.¡±

    And after that, more and more voices of support echo out until every last noble has given their support for the suggestion.

    ¡°It looks like it¡¯s nearly unanimous,¡± Duke Elmwood states, still not showing a single sign of what he¡¯s thinking on his face. ¡°What say you, Undying Magician?¡±

    ¡°Will you aid the war personally, or have your soldiers die so that you can stay back?¡± Duke Stretarious adds, almost like he¡¯s trying to provoke me.

    But I ignore him as I answer Duke Elmwood, ¡°I will participate personally.¡±

    ¡°Then this exemption will be placed within the contract,¡± Duke Elmwood continues before addressing every noble here. ¡°Every noble of the Kingdom of the Fallen excluding the Undying Magician, Nathan Fox, must support the war effort with seventy-five percent of their forces or more. Furthermore, any attempt to harm one of the signatories of this contract in any way, whether physical, an attack on their forces or territory, or other potential methods are banned during the duration of the war. Meanwhile the Undying Magician, Nathan Fox, will be required to fight on the frontlines himself during the duration of the war and will not be able to leave the frontlines unless it is an emergency, or he returns within a day of leaving and does not leave more than once a month.¡±

    Silence fills the call for a couple seconds. Then Duke Elmwood asks, ¡°Is this agreement acceptable to all those present?¡±

    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    A few more seconds pass as the nobles all mentally go over what he stated before one agreement after another fills the hall. And eventually I add my own to it.

    The duke then states a time and place for all of us to meet tomorrow, following which the call is ended. Leaving me in silence within my main meeting room.

    I purse my lips for a few seconds, lightly tapping on my table for a bit.

    Then I tilt my head slightly, looking down at said table as I briefly wonder something.

    Do these nobles not realize that magically enforced contracts don¡¯t actually do much of anything to me? Other than hurt to break?

    Probably not.

    Chapter 58

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    Last Minute Preparations and a Greeting

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    After the meeting with the nobles, I discuss the logistics and leadership of the Undying Caverns with Claire, Benjamin, and Ryan for when I¡¯m gone. A discussion that lasts for a few more hours.

    Then I proceed to go to my lab. Because there¡¯s still one thing I want to finish before going to the war.

    My latest lesson from the skeleton. An important one at that.

    Necromancy.

    This spell isn¡¯t actually very difficult since it¡¯s a very basic necromancy spell. So basic it didn¡¯t take me long to figure out how to do it from the skeleton¡¯s teachings right before this war broke out.

    But it still needs a few touchups.

    Right now it does raise the dead as undead, but it¡¯s far too mana inefficient, and some of them begin to deteriorate while raised. Which is a major issue.

    Not a hard one to fix though.

    And I¡¯d rather have this spell working properly before I leave this place.

    I end up spending at least five hours in my lab, binging through the rest of the spell until it¡¯s complete. A spell to raise the dead as an unintelligent zombie that follows scripted orders.

    It¡¯s a basic necromancy spell. So basic that you can¡¯t even give orders to the undead after the initial raising of it.

    The only orders you can give it are the orders inputted into the spell when it¡¯s first cast.

    Hence why it¡¯s so basic. Since most necromancy includes scripts to actively give orders to the undead after they¡¯re already raised. Some even let the user give orders in their mind and not out loud, but those are Tier V and Tier VI spells.

    Although¡­

    I glance at the corpses lined up in the lab.

    This place smells.

    Lots of wild animal corpses. A waste of food for the Caverns, if you ask me. But a necessary one.

    Not that I need food.

    I turn around and leave my lab ¨C after burning the undead I made with the finished spell along with all of the failed undead and the remaining corpses ¨C before proceeding out of my home and towards the entrance of the Undying Caverns. Briefly calling Claire on the terminal over my arm in the process.

    ¡°Is there something you need, Your Majesty?¡± Claire asks right away as I hear typing on the other end of the call. Likely her doing the work I set her and the others on.

    ¡°I¡¯m heading out,¡± I tell her, having decided to go ahead and inform them. Since I might not come back tonight.

    Depends on the skeleton.

    ¡°Understood,¡± she says, after which I cut off the call and step outside of the Caverns.

    Now then. To check on the dark treant.

    I quickly break into a sprint straight towards the Dark Forest.

    Unfortunately I can¡¯t take vehicles into the forest since it¡¯s too dense. So is the forest beyond the rather large clearing around the Undying Caverns. A clearing that I swear grows larger by the day due to the battles that¡¯ve taken place outside of it.

    Rest in peace trees.

    Anyways, it doesn¡¯t take me long to reach the Dark Forest when I¡¯m running at full speed, with the help of some blood. And when I do, I immediately enter it and rush towards the Dark Treant.

    But no matter how long I run, I don¡¯t seem to get anywhere. Meaning that I don¡¯t have permission to find it through the illusion.

    Probably because the skeleton is out right now due to the war.

    I¡¯ve learned a trick to get past that though. So I glance at Incendia on my shoulder before nodding, making her jump off before flying high into the air. Then she just goes over the Dark Forest, following her own senses to find the dark treant.

    And I follow her scent in return until I too arrive at the dark treant in the form of a massive, dead tree.

    My eyes narrow ever so slightly at the dark treant whose entrance is sealed.

    I raise my fist, coating it with death flames before slamming it into the treant, setting part of its base ablaze with the black death flames. Then I declare, ¡°Open up or you¡¯re burning.¡±

    And just like the last time I was here, the dark treant opens up. Clearly not wanting to be burnt by my death flames.

    Thankfully treants aren¡¯t exactly the smartest of things. Otherwise it¡¯d know that the skeleton is far more dangerous than me.

    The thing only listens to threats like that when the skeleton is nowhere nearby.

    I proceed inside of the dark treant before climbing up the stairs and moving over towards the place covered by the barrier. Where my parents are being kept.

    Then I pull my fist back and slam it into the barrier while coated in death flames. And just like I expected, it doesn¡¯t so much as budge.

    But I wasn¡¯t expecting to damage it at all. Mostly just wanted to see if I could test how strong it was without the skeleton around here.

    The reason I came here though is entirely different.

    I summon forth several spell circles around me, making death flames only barely leak out from them to burn parts of the dark treant. Then I raise my head and shout at it, ¡°Open the wall behind the barrier now!¡±

    And after some more coaxing, which mostly just involves me turning up the heat a bit more, sending out more death flames to fill the entire hall, the treant opens up the wall behind the barrier. Obviously not opening or affecting the barrier itself.

    But that¡¯s not what¡¯s important right now.

    What¡¯s important is that I hear my parents¡¯ voices coming from through the barrier.

    I smile at the sound of their voices, both of which cut off a few seconds later as they no doubt realize the wall was removed.

    Without hesitation, I walk up to the barrier made by the skeleton before placing my hand on it and leaning my forehead against it. And as I do this, I hear my parents¡¯ footsteps coming closer through what I find to be some sort of nicely designed suite of rooms on the other side.

    Then, when I hear them gasp, I raise my head a little again with my smile growing a bit sadder at the sight of them behind the barrier.

    ¡°Hello, Mom, Dad,¡± I tell them, feeling a few tears leaking out. ¡°It¡¯s nice to see you again.¡±

    Chapter 59

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    A Father¡¯s Thoughts

    <hr>

    Within the Dark Treant

    Jason Fox holds his crying wife in his arms while stroking her long brown hair as they sit on the sofa of one of the various rooms the skeleton placed them in. All while unable to form a coherent word himself.

    Ever since the first moment they learned about Nathan¡¯s condition when he was younger, about his immortality, he knew things were bad. That they¡¯d only get worse.

    He¡¯s been in a constant state of uncertainty. Because he has never liked their family¡¯s doctor. And he trusts him less than he trusts the random neighbor that¡¯d moved in next door not long before the incident. A neighbor whose child kept almost kicking in their window with a soccer ball and didn¡¯t care.

    But the doctor was their only route to go. Because not only did he already know their secret and could do whatever he pleased with it, but Jason knew at the time that he was far more powerful than he was passing himself off to be.

    So he put up with it. He stayed quiet as his son came home almost lifeless every day that he went to visit the doctor.

    Stayed silent as the doctor no doubt did unspeakable things to him.

    In the name of Nathan¡¯s freedom.

    Because there wasn¡¯t anything else they could do.

    His wife, Julia, on the other hand, would often cry herself to sleep.

    And all Jason could do was watch and try to comfort them as best he could. Which didn¡¯t amount to much for Nathan, since the boy never wanted to open up to his parents about magic related subjects.

    Jason regrets it all now. He should¡¯ve tried harder to find a way out instead of just giving up. He should¡¯ve tried harder to help his son.

    And that realization sunk in deeply with its razor sharp fangs the moment Jason saw his son again for the first time in years. With his crimson eyes, nearly lifeless gaze, and the sharp fangs in his mouth where his canines would normally be. All while a strange bird made of black flames perched on his shoulder.

    When he saw the lifeless gaze suddenly fill with life once again. Fill with tears.

    The first thought that ran through his mind wasn¡¯t about what had happened to his son to turn him into what he¡¯s no doubt become. A vampire. Or how he¡¯s aged physically when he couldn¡¯t before.

    No. His first thought was that he was glad to see him again after so long. That he wanted to apologize for what he hadn¡¯t done in the past.

    Then their reunion was cut off just as quickly as it had begun when the skeleton sealed them away again.

    Leaving Jason and Julia in silence with the only sound within the suite being his wife¡¯s crying.

    And ever since then, his mind, and no doubt the mind of his wife as well, have been running wild trying to figure out what happened to their son. What managed to change him.

    Whether it was another magical accident like the cause of his condition, or if his condition was cured and someone then turned him into a vampire. Or if someone managed to figure out how to go around his condition.

    One possibility after another filled their minds, making them more and more anxious with each one.

    Jason looks down as he feels his hand clenching a little into a fist, his wife still held in his arms.

    She¡¯s barely been able to say a thing since seeing Nathan again. Likely due to all of the stress building up over the past few years and releasing all at once.

    I¡¯m not one to talk about that though¡­

    Jason hasn¡¯t said much of anything out loud either.

    But after a while has passed like this, he hears it. And he¡¯s not the only one as his wife suddenly stops crying.

    At the sound of moving vines and roots.

    The same sound they heard the previous times the undead treant opened or closed the exit. Or when their supplies was being restocked by the roots.

    But this time the sound was coming from the main entrance of the suite of rooms. The same place he and his wife saw Nathan.

    He and Julie share a quick glance before hurrying to their feet and rushing off towards the main entrance of the suite. Where they soon find themselves face to face with their son, with that same barrier in between them as before.

    Their boy is leaning partly against the barrier with his forehead resting against it and the slightest hint of a smile on his face. One that is completely different to the lifeless look they saw in his eyes just the day before.

    Both Jason and his wife gasp at their son¡¯s unexpected arrival. A mixture of joy, hesitation, anxiety, and fear on their faces. Fear that he will reject them for their inability to help him all his life. Since the incident.

    But their son just raises his head and looks at them with a genuine smile building from the slightest hint that was there a moment ago. Meanwhile tears build up at the corners of his crimson eyes.

    A few seconds pass before Nathan says, his voice sounding deeper than the last time he heard it, ¡°Hello, Mom, Dad. It¡¯s nice to see you again.¡±

    Tears immediately flood Jason¡¯s eyes as he moves closer to the barrier, placing his hand against it as he drops to his knees. And this time he feels his wife¡¯s hands going around his shoulder in a comforting manner, reversing their earlier position as she no doubt cries again too.

    Jason doesn¡¯t pay any attention to the inhuman aspects of his son¡¯s current appearance. He doesn¡¯t care about the slightly inhuman look that he saw in his eyes before, or the dark instinct prickling at the back of his neck to run away from him as if his son were a predator.

    He doesn¡¯t care about any of it.

    Instead, all he sees is his son. A son he wasn¡¯t able to help for all those years. A son he failed to help.

    And a son he¡¯s wanted to see again for so long now but hasn¡¯t been able to.

    The area of the dark treant around the barrier is then filled with nothing but the sounds of the family¡¯s first reunion, filled with tears, in years.

    Chapter 60

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    Brief Catchup

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    We end up spending nearly half an hour just crying while practically glued to the barrier separating us. Then I slowly begin to tell them both what¡¯s happened over the years.

    About the academy. Then the doctor¡¯s taking me to the Kingdom of the Fallen. The skeleton¡¯s experimenting on me after I accidentally set him free.

    How I became a vampire. Some of the things I¡¯ve done since.

    The wars with the nobles. My eventual plans to rescue them from the doctor just to find them here.

    The current situation with the war.

    And by the end of it, I find myself on my knees as tears flow endlessly from my eyes. Wishing that this damned barrier wasn¡¯t here blocking us.

    ¡°Nathan¡­ I¡¯m so sorry¡­¡± Dad says, making my head jerk up in surprise to find tears flowing from his own eyes as Mom lies down next to him, having fallen asleep while crying herself. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for not trying harder to help you. For standing by and watching all these years. For-¡±

    ¡°No!¡± I exclaim, shaking my head frantically. ¡°There¡¯s nothing you could¡¯ve done!¡±

    He smiles wryly at that and quietly says, ¡°But I should¡¯ve tried something.¡±

    I open my mouth to respond, but nothing comes out. I just can¡¯t find the words.

    Silence fills the area around the barrier as we both stare at each other.

    Eventually I feel the dark treant beginning to shift a little, likely signifying that the skeleton is returning.

    I quickly begin to rush in order to figure out something to say, but Dad beats me to it as he places his hand against the barrier and says with that same wry smile on his face, ¡°If there¡¯s anything you need to say, don¡¯t be afraid to say it.¡±

    My eyes widen in shock at that, then the treant replaces the wall, pushing them out of the way in the process and separating us.

    Leaving me with Dad¡¯s words behind in the silence that follows.

    Don¡¯t be afraid to say it¡­ I have been afraid, haven¡¯t I? Afraid to bring my parents into any of my problems. Afraid to speak up. To get help.

    Or, at least, I was afraid. Before I largely grew numb to that feeling over time.

    At that point I just became used to dealing with everything myself. Never asking for help.

    Even when I had friends, fighting alongside them and getting and giving out orders was nothing but business for me. It wasn¡¯t asking for help or receiving help. It was us fighting together as a team, following and giving out orders.

    Asking for help¡­

    I shake my head at the thought before turning around and glaring at the skeleton I find standing further down the hall. But to my surprise he doesn¡¯t say a word to me. Just walks right past me while muttering to himself about a spell and the doctor and Chairman¡¯s magics.

    He¡¯s too focused on the battle he just came from to even notice that I¡¯m here.

    The dark treant¡¯s closing of the wall must¡¯ve been on its own and without his order. Likely because it didn¡¯t want to be found out that it obeyed me.

    That or it¡¯s no longer afraid of me since he¡¯s here.

    Either way, looks like I won¡¯t be able to talk to Mom and Dad any more today.

    I scowl at the skeleton¡¯s back for a few seconds before turning away and beginning to walk down the hall. Heading towards the entrance of the dark treant.

    But I don¡¯t manage to make it even a dozen steps without pausing and turning back around.

    Because there¡¯s something I want to ask the bag of bones.

    So I follow after the skeleton to his lab, where I find him writing stuff down in a hurry. But I don¡¯t say anything at first.

    Instead, I walk up to him and look over his shoulder at his notes. Reading everything he writes down.

    Something most people would never do to another magician. Because a lot of people tend to get touchy about their own research and would straight up attack anyone who tried peeking.

    But he told me before he didn¡¯t care if it was me looking over his shoulder. Probably something to do with the fact that he¡¯s teaching me magic already and wants me to be his successor.

    And the fact that we¡¯re both immortals.

    Anyways, I can¡¯t understand a lot of what he¡¯s writing down. It¡¯s just too complex for me at my level.

    Actually, is this¡­

    Huh.

    Is this a Tier X spell he¡¯s taking notes for?

    Interesting¡­

    Not why I came here though.

    And I only have a third of the amount of mana a single Tier X spell costs to use. The weakest Tier X spells at that.

    ¡°Adalwolf,¡± I state, finally announcing my presence to the man. But he doesn¡¯t stop working. Just continues writing notes.

    I let out a sigh before looking around to find a chair.

    This might take a while.

    He probably won¡¯t notice me until he finishes writing down what¡¯s on his mind.

    So I sit down and open my terminal while I wait, beginning to type on it for my own spell. The next level of necromancy.

    Starting the script for it though proves to be rather difficult. Since it¡¯s a lot different. In the control area at least.

    The part that sends orders to the undead body.

    The undead body and raising itself isn¡¯t any different.

    But to let an undead receive orders after it¡¯s already raised is a far more complex spell than raising an undead to only follow the order hardcoded into the spell.

    I continue sitting here on the chair brainstorming and working on my new spell in general until I hear the skeleton finally stop writing, and I raise my head to find him staring at me.

    ¡°What do you need?¡± he asks in a much more emotionless tone than normal. Clearly having his mind preoccupied with the war and what he was just doing.

    My eyes narrow slightly as I stand up and, take a deep breath, and ask, ¡°What are your plans for the war?¡±

    Chapter 61

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    Frightening Anticipation

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    The skeleton stares at me for several seconds before turning away and focusing on his notes again as he answers, ¡°Single combat with the other Class S magicians and keeping the nations other than the Class S faction and the Republic off of the continent. It¡¯s my role as King. The rest is up to you and the nobles.¡±

    I stare at his back with my eyes slightly squinted. Then I nod and state, ¡°Alright.¡±

    And without another word, I turn around and begin to walk away.

    Before I leave his lab though, I glance back at the man, finding him just reading through his notes. Not writing anything right now.

    Then I turn around again and continue leaving.

    No matter how much I dislike the man, he¡¯s the only way for the Kingdom of the Fallen to stay alive.

    He¡¯s the strongest singular magician alive from what I can tell. Even if he isn¡¯t the one capable of the most destruction.

    He¡¯s immortal, a death magician, and is the oldest magician alive. Or, dead, I guess. Considering that his body is more undead than human.

    So he really is our only hope. Not only against all of the forces attacking, but against the Class S magicians themselves.

    And with that in mind, it¡¯s best not to bother him now.

    I continue walking through the dark treant before eventually leaving the tree entirely, only briefly glancing back when I think about how he was so focused he didn¡¯t even say anything about me being there. Not a single word.

    Will I ever get that absorbed in my work? So absorbed in my research that I ignore everyone else around me to focus?

    Not sure if I want to end up like that or not, but I do know that it¡¯s the mentality that got him to Class S in the first place. Probably the mentality that got most of the Class S magicians today to that point.

    I frown at that thought as I begin marching through the Dark Forest. No longer being hassled by the illusions of the Dark Forest itself since the skeleton is back in his lair again.

    When I get out of the Dark Forest, I immediately make my way over towards the meeting place the other nobles and I agreed to meeting at. Because I¡¯d rather arrive early to scout the place out.

    The meeting place was set to be in the Outer Ring. In the middle of multiple different noble territories including my own. Strictly to make it neutral.

    And this time I take out a jeep to drive over there instead of just running. Which would take a lot longer.

    But while I run, my mind won¡¯t focus on the meeting I¡¯m heading to. The contract signing.

    Instead, my mind is focusing on two different things.

    My parents and our last words, and the possibility that my friends from the Republic will be coming to the Kingdom of the Fallen soon.

    The words Dad said¡­ makes me think of my friends and the people from the Undying Caverns. How they were determined to help me with my conflicts with the nobles, even if a lot of them have ulterior motives. And how much respect they clearly have for me.

    After thinking for several minutes as I drive, I eventually come to a decision.

    I¡¯ll ask them to defend my territory and people while I¡¯m at war.

    A faint smile stretches across my face at that thought, but it fades away again when I focus on the other issue.

    My friends from the Republic who no doubt believe me to be dead.

    They¡¯ll find out about me sooner or later if they¡¯re coming to the Kingdom of the Fallen. In fact, even if they don¡¯t come here, there¡¯s a decent chance they¡¯ll find out from the news anyways.

    Because there¡¯s no way the news won¡¯t cover an immortal magician amongst the enemies. One who can¡¯t die.

    And while I look different now, I don¡¯t look that different. It¡¯s just my physical age and crimson eyes that have changed.

    Mom and Dad recognized me after all. So I¡¯d be pretty surprised if my friends don¡¯t.

    And our reunion will be awkward as hell.

    Especially since we¡¯re on opposing sides of the war.

    That said, I at least don¡¯t have to fight them. I was never given any requirements for where I have to fight on the frontlines.

    So if I end up spotting them, I¡¯ll just go fight somewhere else. Where they aren¡¯t.

    I glance at Incendia, who has been rather quiet lately. Only to find her eyes shut as she perches on my shoulder.

    From what she¡¯s told me, she isn¡¯t a fan of war. So this is probably tiring her out mentally constantly going around warring against people.

    She¡¯s the type who enjoys relaxing and doing research undisturbed.

    I reach up and stroke the flaming feathers on her head, making her rub her head against my hand as I drive. Then I focus on driving again a second later when I begin to near the valley between the Rings.

    At least I know Incendia will always be by my side.

    A faint smile stretches across my face.

    When I reach the valley, I stop my jeep, get out, and place it back in my storage space. I jump down into the valley and head over towards the Outer Ring without hesitation or paying much attention to Crimson¡¯s cleanup of the place that¡¯s still ongoing.

    Although I do take note that some of the workers run for the hills when I get close. As if they¡¯re terrified of me.

    Guess that¡¯s to be expected after what they saw of me in the last war.

    I continue ignoring them as I reach the Outer Ring and quickly make my way over towards the meeting location after resummoning my jeep.

    Time to sign a contract.

    And to get this war officially under way.

    Chapter 62

    -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-

    Some Things Always Stay the Same

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 25

    ¡°I would like to welcome you all to this pre-war meeting,¡± Duke Elmwood declares while spreading his arms out at the front of the long table. A table covered in twenty-three contracts, each placed in front of a seated noble. With me seated on the opposite end of Duke Elmwood. An arrangement that initially surprised me before I remembered that he was at least partially on my side.

    None of the nobles here have any subordinates in the room with us. A room that makes up the entirety of this rather grand-looking, single room building no doubt made by magic. With all of the nobles¡¯ followers ¨C assuming they have any with them ¨C outside of the room.

    Most of us do actually have subordinates with us outside though. Even I have Incendia waiting outside.

    I think the only person who doesn¡¯t have a single person with her is Rachel, who is lounging around with her feet up on the table. To the great annoyance of those who were left sitting beside her.

    Better them than me.

    The duke continues with a smile on his face as he inclines his head towards the contracts on the table and says, ¡°Please look over the magical contracts placed in front of you. If you have any objections, express them and we will discuss your issues.¡±

    I look down at the contract and begin reading through it. And it¡¯s just as the duke stated over the call.

    In simple terms, every noble signing onto the contract except for me is required to send seventy-five percent or more of their forces to aid in the war. Every noble signing onto the contract is banned from interfering with the other nobles in any way during the war including myself. And I am required to participate in the war personally, with me being allowed to leave the frontlines once a month so long as I return within a day of leaving.

    Overall, a pretty good contract.

    No loopholes I can see, and even if there were, the magic in the contract would enforce the spirit of the contract. Not the exact words.

    It¡¯d enforce what all of the signers believe to be the truth in the contract and wouldn¡¯t let you sign if your believed truth is different from the believed truth of everyone else signing it.

    ¡°Does anyone have any complaints about the contents of the contract?¡± the duke asks, following which silence reigns for several seconds. Then he nods his head and says, ¡°Very well then. Everyone, please sign the contract where your name is listed.¡±

    I look down at it again to find a list of names along with lines next to them. Implying places to sign.

    Then signatures from the others begin appearing on my paper as the others no doubt sign it, proving just how high quality this magic contract is.

    I sign my own name as well, and the moment every last signature has finished signing, the contracts turn into a white and blue light before fading away.

    The magical contracts sealed, binding each signature to it lest they lose their lives.

    Or, lest the others lose their lives.

    The doctor already tested contracts as a way to kill me before.

    Didn¡¯t work.

    Hurt though.

    I raise my head to find a number of the other nobles getting up and preparing to leave. But some appear to be interested in talking with me.

    My attention focuses on Duke Elmwood though, briefly ignoring the psychopath and Crimson. And the other nobles who clearly just want to get an idea of what I¡¯m like. Or a couple who are openly eyeing my body trying to figure out what¡¯s different about me from others. Treating me like some lab rat with their eyes.

    The duke nods his head silently, following which a green spell circle appears and roots shoot out of the building¡¯s floor and begin carrying both of our seats up into the air far away from the others, breaking through the ceiling in the process. Then vines form a sphere around us to block them from overhearing.

    ¡°You¡¯ve earned my respect, Undying Magician,¡± he says, still with that undecipherable face of his. ¡°Don¡¯t lose it.¡±

    I narrow my eyes at his clearly arrogant attitude, but I don¡¯t say anything.

    So he lowers us back down to the ground again while undoing the sphere.

    Then he walks away. And I do the same, but in the opposite direction.

    This war is going to be big. Possibly the biggest conflict I¡¯ve ever been in.

    Actually, without a doubt the biggest conflict.

    But I won¡¯t be the center of it. Not at my Class.

    I need to reach Class B as a magician. And I need to reach it soon.

    Out of the corner of my eye as I¡¯m leaving the building, I spot the destruction magician waving at me with a smile on her face. While she breaks through the wall, using her destruction magic to disintegrate it in the process.

    Guess it¡¯s not just at my place that she doesn¡¯t know how to use doors.

    I continue walking for a bit away from the building before summoning my jeep and beginning to head back to the Undying Caverns so that I can plan where to head for the war. And it wouldn¡¯t hurt to ask for some help from Benjamin for that task.

    A faint smile stretches across my face at the idea of actually asking someone for help.

    But the smile fades again as my thoughts return to the war. To the bloodshed I¡¯ll be causing throughout it.

    And black veins begin to emerge across my face as I see my glowing crimson eyes in my reflection on the water from some puddles I pass by. Puddles left by the rain earlier this night.

    I raise my head as I walk to look at the full moon high in the sky.

    Everything¡¯s changing.

    I lower my gaze again to look at my hands before clenching them and making my claws dig into my palms, only for the wounds to revert right away.

    Yet some things always stay the same.

 Book 3 is now on Amazon Kindle Unlimited!

    And just like the title of this post says, The Undying Magician book 3 is now on Amazon Kindle Unlimited!

    If you''re interested in checking out the proofread and edited version that is there, click here</a>!

    As stated in the previous author''s note, there won''t be any chapters for The Undying Magician on Royal Road for a while. Since I need to build up my advanced chapters again. What with having dumped them all on Royal Road so that you''d be able to finish reading book 3 before the chapters were taken down from Royal Road and Patreon for the Amazon release.

    Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.

    I also need to catch up with a couple of my other secondary stories so that they''re ready to be released on Amazon.

    That aside, I do feel I''m getting my stride and motivation back for writing this story. The Undying Magician is probably one of if not my most popular story on Amazon even if it is one of my least popular on Royal Road. Even if the average rating isn''t the greatest on either site for this story compared to my others by a longshot.

    Thank you for reading my story/stories :)

 Hiatus Near End Update and New Story Release

    First up, the hiatus for The Undying Magician will likely be coming to an end in a couple of weeks! This is because Eternal Winter''s Reign book 2 will be finishing sometime this week, with me needing to spend next week catching up some stories with patron advanced chapters that I''d dumped on Royal Road.

    Then The Undying Magician will be back!

    I also decided to write a bit more for The Undying Magician next year, mostly because despite it not being very popular on Royal Road, it is one of my most successful stories on Amazon with nearly 4k total ratings on book one.

    <hr>

    Now for the next order of business!

    Assimilator of Chaos, my new story, has finally reached Royal Road now that Wolf of the Blood Moon is complete(completed on Patreon)! The link is at the bottom beneath the cover and synopsis!

    Here is the cover if you''re interested:

    The cover was commissioned from Kart Studio and germancreative.

    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.

    Next up is the synopsis:

    <hr>

    What would you do if your entire world were turned on its head?

    A Primordial System buzzing in everyone¡¯s heads, displaying strange screens and other displays in their visions.

    Being thrown into a tutorial before entering your first System Event broadcast across the universe.

    Returning back to your home after the System Event to realize that it¡¯s been filled with Gates leading to monster-filled domains, a good number of which have already broken and released their monsters into the world.

    And learning that the abilities every human being has ¨C abilities that have led to the current structure of society ¨C are nothing but the root of their Skill Trees. The very first skill in their Skill Tree out of many.

    Well, Ashley doesn¡¯t know. She doesn¡¯t remember anything other than some basic common knowledge from before waking up at the start of the tutorial with amnesia.

    So why should this change anything for her?

    Other than her finding out about the blood bestowed upon her by a certain primordial and her own Skill Tree.

    One with just a single skill.

    A skill to unlock the skill trees of those she kills.

    To assimilate.

    What to expect: Skill Trees, LitRPG Apocalypse, Skill Tree Assimilator(the ability to take the skill trees of those the MC kills), Livestreamed Dungeons, Livestreamed Public Battles and Events, Chaos Magic, Varied Magic due to Skill Tree Assimilator

    What not to expect: I do not write romance(for the main protagonist), there will be no harem, there will be no reverse harem

    <hr>

    If you''re interested, click here</a>!!!

 B4 | Glossary and Book Summaries

    And the hiatus is over as I have finally caught up my Patreon with advanced chapters once more! But for Royal Road, we are starting with a glossary and some summaries for books 1 through 3 of The Undying Magician for those of you who need a quick refresher. There will be a story art post next, and book 4 chapter 1 will be after that. Although when those release will be based on my mood. Sometime in the next two weeks though.

    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.

    Click here</a> for the glossary for book 4 of The Undying Magician! There is also a summary of books 1, 2, and 3 in the glossary!

 B4 | Chapter 1

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    So this is the coast of the Kingdom.

    I frown as I stare out from the top of a high cliff at the coast several kilometers away. At the soldiers from the Kingdom charging straight at the soldiers surfacing on the sands after swimming from the various ships.

    It¡¯s a rather dark sight, but one I¡¯m used to by now. Just from the number of wars and battles I¡¯ve been in.

    The sight I¡¯m not used to seeing, however, is the large fog of miasma layered in a massive dome around the continent, gradually fading the higher up I look. With various tentacles of miasma swatting at the soldiers trying to cross the dome before entering the coast itself.

    I heard about it from the nobles, but it really is something else to see it in person.

    The skeleton¡¯s protection spell placed over the entire continent.

    Not many people would be able to cast a spell of that size. So it goes to show how powerful the skeleton really is.

    ¡°Your Highness, please follow me,¡± the soldier who came to escort me here ¨C a man serving Duke Elmwood ¨C says while bowing towards me.

    I nod my head absentmindedly while still staring in awe at the massive barrier. A defensive barrier that also attacks those who get near it.

    After several seconds of trying to pick the spell apart and failing miserably, I finally turn to walk towards the soldier. Making said soldier immediately turn around and begin walking towards a nearby fortress on the cliff, just barely outside of the forest next to us.

    It¡¯s only been two days since the grand meeting of the nobles, and all of the nobles collectively started referring to me as ¡®Your Highness¡¯ and ¡®Prince Nathan¡¯ ever since. Without anything really building up to it.

    They just randomly started referring to me as it after the meeting.

    Maybe it¡¯s because I¡¯ve proved myself after killing those barons? Or maybe the skeleton said something about it.

    Could even just be that they can¡¯t ignore the king¡¯s wishes about my ¡®adoption¡¯ into the royal family now that said king is the main defense of the entire Kingdom of the Fallen.

    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.

    Either way, it¡¯s weird.

    But whatever. Doesn¡¯t really matter at the end of the day.

    I continue following after the soldier while looking out over the cliff at the war. Most of the enemy soldiers aren¡¯t crossing past the barrier, because it takes a powerful magician to create an opening in the barrier for them to pass through. Leaving all the other soldiers to be wiped out by either the barrier or the soldiers shooting at them from the shores.

    All while the ships themselves fire powerful artillery at the barrier.

    Well that won¡¯t do much. Not without the help of powerful magicians.

    As if waiting for that very thought, I see a barrage of spells suddenly fly towards the barrier. Spells of all sorts, whether poisons, explosions, flames, water, any type of affinity. And when the spells all hit the barrier, it flickers for only a second. And even that seems to only be because the artillery hits it at the same time.

    Really is a powerful barrier.

    We keep moving along the cliffside until we reach a point at about a hundred or so meters away from the fortress, where I turn my attention fully away from the battlefield to focus on the fortress. And at the same time, I find several officers leaving the front gate of the fortress and heading towards us.

    But I don¡¯t pay much attention to the officers. The one that catches my eye is the noble that I recognize in the center of the lot.

    Count Fels. The ruling lord over this territory, and if I remember correctly, a rather prudent man. He showed no distaste for me and actually seemed to treat me in a positive light.

    Which was the entire reason I decided to head here instead of any other border territory.

    Once we get within speaking distance, we both stop walking and he calls out, ¡°Your Highness, please act as you please. You have freedom over the entire battlefield, and you may give orders to some of my soldiers as well. But any order that requires more than one hundred soldiers at once must be run through one of my officers.¡±

    The corner of my lips quirk upwards at that.

    Good. That was what I was waiting for.

    ¡°Appreciated, Count Fels,¡± I tell him with a nod. Then I turn to look out over the cliff again as I add, ¡°I¡¯ll be joining the battle now. Good luck on your side.¡±

    ¡°I wish you luck as well, Your Highness,¡± the count says.

    And without any hesitation, I jump off of the cliff, making a loud creaking sound come from my legs when I land as they no doubt almost break. Only for them to return to normal by the time I stand up straight again.

    Then I proceed to run straight across the coast towards the battlefield.

    The usual black veins from my bloodlust begin spreading across my face as I run. Meanwhile I see the crimson light reflecting off of my eyes onto the sands below me in the dark of night mixed with the miasma high above blocking out the stars.

    But even as I allow my bloodlust reign, I keep in mind the fact that my friends could be amongst the enemies. Even if none of these particular enemies are from the Republic.

    I¡¯ve had trouble not thinking about them in the past couple days. Because they all still think I¡¯m dead. And the thought of running into them now¡­ while I look like this¡­

    It¡¯s not a pleasant thought.

    Well, it¡¯s best to just put them to the back of my mind. Only focusing on them if I see them.

    I run straight up to the battlefield while drawing both of my swords and jumping straight towards one of the closest enemies, soaring through the air in the process until I slash straight through a magician who was preparing a spell to attack one of the count¡¯s men.

    For now, it¡¯s time to hunt.

 B4 | Chapter 2

    The Battlefield

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    General Herald of the Collective Kingdom¡¯s Eighth Legion shouts with more than a little irritation in his voice, ¡°Get every magician you can to break past that barrier! We need to capture this fortress as soon as we possibly can to gain a foothold!¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir!¡± One soldier after another declares while running around like rabbits to follow his orders.

    The general has been in a detestable mood ever since he was assigned to attack this territory. Particularly because this was the territory that none of the others wanted. A territory led by one of the nobles of the Kingdom of the Fallen that actually had nothing against asking for assistance from the other nobles.

    He almost scoffs at the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s idiocy. Fighting even at a time like this.

    Despite word of their truce getting to the various attacking nations, every one of the nations has seen at least some conflict amongst the nobles even after the treaty. Leaving the territories with the most internal strife the most popular territories for the generals to target.

    And yet, General Herald was assigned this territory due to the other generals having seniority over him. That in addition to the general¡¯s status as the only Class B magician amongst the otherwise Class A magician generals.

    So what can he do but take it out on his men?

    There¡¯s no one better for him to take his anger out on after all.

    Other than the lightning spells he¡¯s lobbing over at the barrier, occasionally managing to sneak one in to strike at the enemy soldiers within, that is.

    But after several hours into the assault, something strange comes up.

    At first he blows it off, executing the soldier who reported it to him under the accusation of him becoming mentally compromised. Since there was no way the report held any sort of truth to it.

    There was no way it could.

    After all, even if there was a vampire running through the forces with swords while casting spells, there is no way it would be able to regrow its head.

    Then he started getting more and more similar reports about the same sort of thing.

    A vampire wielding two swords throwing around fire spells while regrowing his arms.

    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.

    A vampire wielding two swords throwing around death spells while recovering completely in seconds from being burnt to ashes.

    A vampire wielding two swords throwing around black flames reappearing after being completely annihilated from a Tier 4 spell.

    And after executing three dozen soldiers and imprisoning another half a dozen, he finally begins to believe that either the enemy is purposefully altering the memories of his forces, or there truly is a vampire running through the battlefield.

    So the general jumps out of the ship and heads personally towards the battlefield to check it out.

    And when he arrives, the first thing he sees is exactly what his soldiers reported.

    The general¡¯s mouth parts open in silence as he watches a man with short and wavy brown hair, glowing crimson eyes, and black veins running across his face charging around with two swords in hand slicing apart the general¡¯s men. And if that weren¡¯t enough, the man is also occasionally casting spells, both of fire and death magic, at his forces. Occasionally using some sort of strange black flames.

    But the strangest thing of everything he¡¯s seen so far is that no matter how many times the man is injured, he just shrugs it off as the injury reverts. Almost as if time was being rewound on his body and the injured parts.

    While most people would feel fear at this sight, the general feels something entirely different.

    He feels greed.

    The mere sight of this man and his immense regenerative prowess, and if his soldiers¡¯ reports are correct, potential immortality drives the general¡¯s mind towards the possible experiments he can conduct on the man to give himself those powers.

    So the general does the first thing he can think of in a situation like this, his responsibility as a general losing out to his greed as a magician.

    He shouts at his soldiers, ¡°Capture the vampire!!!¡±

    And immediately after hearing his order, all of the soldiers change their targets to the vampire, overwhelming him within moments.

    But no matter what they do to him, he simply shrugs their attacks off. Even when he is completely captured, he simply self-destructs, taking a number of the general¡¯s soldiers with him before he reemerges without a scratch on him. And naked, until he puts on clothes from a storage device he has on him, using the other soldiers¡¯ shock and the smoke as a cover to do so.

    After watching this pitiful display repeat itself several times, the general loses his patience and begins to march straight up towards the vampire while casting several spells at once. One of which creates a powerful barrier of lightning around him that blocks all of the bullets and spells being sent his way, and another that tosses a large web of lightning around the vampire. Followed by several bolts of lightning and an entire storm that quickly begins to strike anything near the vampire.

    No matter what he does, though, he doesn¡¯t stop marching towards his prize.

    Because that¡¯s all he cares about now. Not the war, not his soldiers, and not any benefits he can be given by the Collective Kingdoms.

    He wants his path to immortality.

    The same thing all magicians want.

    And once he finally reaches his lightning web covering the vampire, he simply grins and turns towards his soldiers after seeing the man¡¯s cold and emotionless eyes gazing up at him. No doubt unable to break out of a constriction spell as powerful as his.

    But mere seconds after he turns around, the general feels pain blossoming from his chest along with a sense of warmth. So he looks down, just to see a sword sticking out of his armor.

    An Arcadian Metal sword.

    The general tries to turn his head, only to feel his strength leave him as his legs give way and he falls head-first into the sand.

    Dead.

 B4 | Story Art Part 1

    If the art breaks then click here</a> to find the post on my Patreon with the art there! If someone comments about the art being broken I will lock the comments on the chapter.

    As stated in the title, here is part one of a round of story art for a bunch of the Class S magicians introduced so far:

    Archibald Winters(water affinity magician with a specialization for ice):

    Dorothy Umbra(poison affinity magician):

    Edgar Bronax(enhancement affinity magician):

    A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    Leith Allen(nature affinity magician):

    And of course some you''ve already seen before:

    Adalwolf Giese(death affinity magician):

    Artorius Hunter(anti-magic affinity magician):

    Leodmir Archeron(space affinity magician and Doctor):

 B4 | Chapter 3

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    It¡¯s honestly a little sad how arrogant and self-centered most magicians are. Especially the stronger they get.

    They¡¯re all greedy, think only of themselves, and simply want to grow stronger.

    Or at least, most of them. The ones in power.

    The ones that actually make it to Class B for example, and were generally born into good families.

    And the ones that stand out.

    Not to mention how much they rely on magic.

    Case in point right now as I watch the anger and disbelief flash through the enemy Class B magician¡¯s eyes while my blade is impaling his heart.

    Although I can cut him a little slack in the fact that he probably didn¡¯t expect someone from the Kingdom of the Fallen to have an Arcadian Metal sword. What with how hard those are to get even in the Republic, much less the ¡®backwater kingdom¡¯, as many of these enemy soldiers seem to like calling the kingdom.

    Not that they¡¯re entirely wrong.

    Anyways, I rip my blade out of the Class B lightning variant magician¡¯s chest before he falls to the ground, dead. Then I casually wipe the blade on his armor and turn my attention to the stunned soldiers all around me who were helping the guy capture me.

    Actually, now that I think about it, who was this guy?

    A high ranking officer?

    Regardless, it doesn¡¯t really-

    A horn blows from some of the ships, drawing my gaze as multiple guns begin firing at me. But they stop not long after the horn starts. And almost at the same time, I hear radios across the battlefield going off with orders for the soldiers to retreat. Without giving any sort of reason why.

    I close my eyes and focus my senses on the ships, trying to discern a reason for this action from some of the officers there.

    Only to open my eyes wide in shock and turn my gaze towards the dead guy at my feet.

    Who apparently turns out to be a general.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    Huh.

    That was unexpected, but helpful.

    It¡¯s always nice to make a crucial contribution to a battle in a war. Because it means people owe me.

    Anyways, I decide to ignore the fleeing soldiers and turn back to walk across the barrier again. Also ignoring the guns firing at me amidst their retreat as I look down at my clothes with a frown. Clothes that are already in tatters despite me just replacing them less than a minute ago.

    Damn.

    One of these days I swear I¡¯m going to figure out how to make clothes that I won¡¯t have to go through like my second in command, Claire, goes through printer paper at the Undying Caverns. Or at least some form of automatically-replacing clothes or armor. Maybe an auto-repair set.

    Something that won¡¯t leave me naked in the middle of a battlefield.

    I don¡¯t really care what.

    With my thoughts solely on my clothes issue, I ignore any spells or bullets sent my way and pass straight through the barrier. Then I continue walking across the beach towards the cliff while ignoring the looks sent my way by the soldiers on said cliffs.

    Although some of the looks do make me realize that I¡¯m covered in blood and probably look like some sort of demon.

    But I don¡¯t care anymore.

    I just jump halfway up the cliff before grabbing onto it and then flinging myself up again to the top. Finding even more soldiers startled at my presence.

    No one shoots me though, which is a plus.

    I walk past them towards the fortress until I meet Count Fels near the gates clearly waiting for me. And the man immediately states, ¡°I hear you killed their general?¡±

    Hmm. He gets news fast.

    I nod my head, seemingly not surprising him in the least.

    That said, he does look very impressed. And maybe a little afraid as well. Intimidated.

    Then again, I did just kill a Class B magician. So that makes sense.

    Even if it was largely just because he didn¡¯t know a thing about me. Not my weapons, my immortality, my magic, or anything.

    The next battle will be different after they spread word about me to the other forces attacking the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    ¡°Good job,¡± Count Fels states with a stern look on his face. ¡°I knew it was a good idea to support you.¡± I blink in surprise before he reaches his hand out as the corner of his lips quirk upwards ever so slightly. ¡°For ending the assault within a single battle and slaying their general, you have my thanks, and my assistance should you and the Undying Caverns need it.¡±

    I accept his hand and shake it, replying, ¡°Understood.¡± Then I glance back at the soldiers who are still on their ships. ¡°Do you think they¡¯ll return for another round?¡±

    The count and I unclasp hands, and he turns to look at the ships as well as he answers, ¡°It¡¯s unlikely to happen soon, but they¡¯ll likely return within the next month. After another general has arrived to take the place of the one you killed.¡±

    That¡¯s brutal.

    ¡°It¡¯s simply how the Collective Kingdoms work,¡± the count continues as if reading my thoughts. ¡°They¡¯re a pragmatic lot.¡±

    I raise a brow at that while glancing at him and asking, ¡°Like you?¡±

    He turns to look at me and pauses for a second, only for his lips to quirk upwards a bit and a chuckle to leave him as he says, ¡°Yeah, like me.¡±

    This guy is actually interesting to talk to.

    Guess there are magicians who aren¡¯t just out to experiment on me after all.

    We both focus on the ships and the barrier for several seconds before he turns around and walks away without a word to me, instead focusing on giving orders to his forces. So I cross my arms and continue looking out at the ships some more.

    Maybe I should check the ships out.

    Discretely.

    I doubt my friends are there, but it wouldn¡¯t hurt to check.

 B4 | Chapter 4

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    When I reach the ships by walking on the floor of the sea, I come to a rather late realization.

    I have no idea how to recognize them without climbing aboard the ships. Since I have no way to recognize their scents or presences.

    After all, I wasn¡¯t a vampire the last time I saw them.

    I cross my arms at the sea floor, ignoring my constant drowning as I stare upwards. Only to eventually just begin swimming up towards the ship below before placing my hand on the hull and activating multiple fire spells directly between my hand and the hull. One after another.

    All spells to spew fire forth from my hand directly on the hull, slowly melting the hull itself until I make a hole in it.

    Then I just casually float through the hole in the hull, finding soldiers inside rushing away from the running water while magicians move closer. Seemingly attempting to figure out how to patch it before they pause at the sight of me.

    I ignore them as I begin moving far faster than a human through the ship, quickly passing the flow of water while beginning my search.

    Unfortunately for me, I don¡¯t find anyone I recognize on the ship. So I just go to the deck and jump off, leaving the crew rushing around in a panic both due to my impromptu intrusion and the not-so-little hole in their hull.

    And without pause, I move on to the next ship, doing the exact same thing.

    Then the next.

    And the next.

    And the next.

    One ship after another, just burning a hole through their hull since they don¡¯t have an easier way inside. Then going through the ship and searching for my friends.

    Eventually I get to the larger ships of their fleet and have to ignore bullets and spells flying at me as I float up to their ships. The crew clearly having been warned about my actions by the other ships by now.

    And when I enter their ships, I find myself faced with Class C magicians from time to time. But I just kill them without too much difficulty thanks to the cramped space of the ship corridors.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    By the time I finish searching all of the ships and make it back to the beach, preparing to pass through the barrier again, I glance back to find half of the enemy fleet sinking into the water. The crews on the ships clearly not having been able to patch the hole I made in their ships.

    There¡¯s probably also quite a bit fewer powerful magicians remaining.

    Hmm. Well, that wasn¡¯t particularly discrete, but it worked. And it¡¯ll probably get me more benefits as well.

    Anyways, I didn¡¯t find any of my friends on board. But I did overhear some things and even found a map. One with the exact details on which nations are attacking where.

    So after bringing those details back to the count, getting more than a little appreciation from him in return, I go ahead and head out towards my next destination.

    According to the map and other details I¡¯ve acquired, the Republic is attacking three different locations. Three different noble territories.

    And of those three, two are territories belonging to nobles who are antagonistic towards me.

    Duke Stretarious and Countess Kolar. Neither of whom like me.

    The duke seems to want me in pain and to be unhappy, with a strange happiness at seeing it clear in his gaze. Meanwhile the countess just doesn¡¯t like the threat I pose.

    The countess won¡¯t likely do anything to interfere with my actions even if she sees me as a threat, but the duke will likely try to get in my way just to annoy me. Even if he won¡¯t attack me. Just try to make things a little more difficult for me to annoy me.

    As for the third territory? The territory of Count Draxis?

    That¡¯s probably the easiest one to visit. Since the count seemed completely apathetic towards me.

    Which was rather surprising. What with how all of the other nobles were either antagonistic towards me, neutral towards me and focusing on the war, or supportive of my strength for the war.

    None of them other than this count were straight up apathetic.

    So from what I¡¯ve seen of him, he¡¯ll just ignore my presence.

    Then there¡¯s the number of armies attacking them. Since the republic has multiple attacking forces. At least four per territory. With more in the duke and countess¡¯s territories, strictly due to the friction these two nobles have with the others.

    And most importantly, there¡¯s the magicians leading each of the forces.

    This is the main reason why I start heading over towards the count¡¯s territory.

    Because the general leading one of the forces there is the Healer General, Jacob Argent.

    Also known as Cyria¡¯s father.

    And if there¡¯s any army she¡¯ll be in, there¡¯s a good chance it¡¯ll be his.

    I¡¯ll also be able to make contact with him when I¡¯m there. Since I did meet the man once back when I was at the academy. And he seemed to take a liking to me for some reason.

    He also seemed to pity me. Almost like he knew what I was going through.

    The man never said a word though, so I have no idea if he actually knows anything or not.

    I quickly run across the beach, occasionally passing by another battlefield and ignoring them when they attack me. Only occasionally attacking back at the ones who are too stubborn to let me pass unbothered. And after running at superhuman speeds for over two days, I make it to the count¡¯s territory.

    It doesn¡¯t take me long to find the first battlefield either, and to my complete lack of surprise, the enemy has actually already breached the barrier and are fighting on the beach shores itself.

    With a certain general fighting right at the front of the battle, healing their soldiers as he goes.

    The corners of my lips quirk upwards.

    Time for a reunion.

 B4 | Chapter 5

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    I pause a couple hundred meters away from the battle as I realize something.

    If I go in slaughtering the enemy, then not only would that anger the general and likely make him an enemy, but I could accidentally hurt one of my friends.

    And that¡¯s not the only thing I realize, because I also remember my difference in appearance. Even if it¡¯s not that large of a difference.

    Not to mention the whole fact that I was declared dead if I had to guess. So none of my friends believe I¡¯m even alive.

    Which is a problem in and of itself.

    Shit.

    I grit my teeth as I stare at the army, unsure of what to do. Only for the general to turn his head and look at me directly. At which point his eyes widen in shock and surprise.

    And, most importantly, recognition.

    My mouth parts open a bit before closing again.

    He recognizes me.

    After a brief pause, the man only starts moving again when a bullet slams into his barrier of water mana. With the bullet not piercing through.

    Then the man suddenly vanishes and is replaced by a clone made of water. Meanwhile dozens of other clones made of water appear around the battlefield.

    I look around, feeling more than a little surprised. But then I remember that he¡¯s a Class A magician. So this isn¡¯t too surprising.

    What is a little surprising, though, is when he appears right in front of me with the air around us beginning to shimmer a little bit. And he grabs me by my bicep before shooting a spout of water out from beneath him and bringing me through the air towards his ship.

    At this point I¡¯m too surprised to do anything to stop him and just let him take me.

    He brings me all the way to the deck of the biggest ship before letting go of my arm, startling me again, and motioning for me to follow him.

    So I do.Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    I follow him into the ship until we arrive at a fancy cabin and enter it. A cabin I can only assume is most likely his.

    Then he finally turns around and looks at me with that same pitying look he had the last time I saw him.

    ¡°I see you¡¯ve had a tough time here, Nathan,¡± he eventually says, making it clear he knows more about me than he probably should. ¡°I know Leonidas said you ended up here, but I wasn¡¯t expecting this change.¡±

    My mouth opens for a second to say something, only to close as I find myself unable to figure out what the hell I should even say in this situation.

    ¡°If you¡¯re worried about your friends, don¡¯t be,¡± the general states, surprising me again. ¡°None of them are participating in the war. I managed to place them in the Republic¡¯s defenses instead using the excuse of them being top students at the top academy of the Republic.¡±

    Now that makes me smile in relief.

    The general narrows his eyes a little at me and crosses his arms as he continues, ¡°Telling them of your survival will be your responsibility when you make contact with them again. But until then, we are still on the opposite side of a war.¡±

    After that, the air begins to shimmer around us again before he opens the door to his cabin.

    ¡°Now that I¡¯ve said what I needed to say, please escort yourself out,¡± the general declares, growing a lot more serious. ¡°I may disapprove of the Chairman¡¯s actions, but I will not betray my own forces to aid you.¡±

    I nod my head at that and go ahead and begin walking out of his cabin, finding the shimmering air around me still there no matter how far I go. And even when I pass by other soldiers, none of them so much as look at me.

    Almost like they can¡¯t see me.

    Guess he¡¯s using some sort of illusion magic spell with his water magic.

    Nice.

    Also explains why no one looked our way when he brought me to this ship in the first place.

    Once I make it to the deck, I look around one last time before jumping off of the ship and into the water below. Then I proceed to walk across the ocean floor in the direction of the edge of this noble¡¯s territory. Beginning my search for the next battlefield to fight in.

    Because I¡¯d rather not cause that general any problems by attacking him. Not when he just did me a favor.

    And I know he didn¡¯t lie because I could hear it.

    Although, just in case, I go ahead and burn myself alive from the inside out with death flames. Just to remove any possible trackers he may¡¯ve put on me.

    Fortunately, I don¡¯t find any while doing that.

    Which kind of means I burnt myself alive for no reason. But whatever.

    Better to be safe than sorry.

    I do wish I could¡¯ve asked a couple questions though. Like how Leonidas is doing.

    Ignoring my other sadistic teacher who I mostly remember for chopping off my arms.

    Then again, that sort of punishment and training wouldn¡¯t even phase me anymore. No matter how sad that may be.

    Anyways, from what I read on the other army¡¯s map, the next assaulting force in the direction I¡¯m walking should belong to the nation known as Natra. A desert nation with a bit of a supremist attitude. Believing their own people to be superior to everyone else.

    A sentiment their Class S fire magician agrees with wholeheartedly.

    Which is honestly another reason I¡¯m going to their force. Even if I don¡¯t think the Class S magician will be there on the battlefield.

    Because they may have more information on fire magic that I could use.

    I smile at that thought before glancing back at the ship that¡¯s far enough now that I can only barely see it through the waters. Then I turn around again and focus on making my way towards the territory of Baron Drawl.

    Time to improve my fire magic.

 B4 | Class S Magician Story Art Part 2

    If the art breaks then click here</a> to find the post on my Patreon with the art there! If someone comments about the art being broken I will lock the comments on the chapter.

    As stated in the title, here is part two of a round of story art for a bunch of the Class S magicians introduced so far:

    Afvalder von Schr?der(Radiation specialized light magic affinity class S magician):

    Violet Fox(Poison affinity class S magician):

    Stolen novel; please report.

    Leopold Houk(Darkness affinity Class S magician):

    Juan Sequani(Fire affinity Class S magician):

    Katherine Nash(Ice specialized water affinity Class S magician):

    Emma Sonnen(Wind affinity Class S magician):

 B4 | Chapter 6

    <b>Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27</b><b></b>

    After making my way to Baron Drawl¡¯s territory, I go ahead and snoop it out in secret. Hiding myself so that I am not discovered. Mostly by traveling through the ocean and just sensing for an incredibly powerful source of mana.

    But I don¡¯t sense anything on par with the Class S magicians I¡¯ve seen.

    So I go ahead and surface before focusing on the battlefield. Where I see quite the number of fire magicians fighting against the baron¡¯s forces.

    And to be perfectly honest, I couldn¡¯t care less about the baron¡¯s forces. Because I know this baron in particular was one of the ones who instigated the barons who attacked me from behind the scenes. Not wanting to risk himself in the crossfire by attacking me himself while also not wanting to let the chance at immortality slide himself.

    This particular baron is different from the others in that he only recruits powerful magicians and those with talent. Meanwhile he doesn¡¯t bother with any regular people. Doesn¡¯t even have non-magicians in his territory and straight up bans their entry.

    Yet he expands his own territory by attacking other territories and slaughtering the non-magicians within them just to keep them out of his territory. Not even letting them leave the territory. Just killing them outright.

    So I don¡¯t care about either side of this battle. Other than watching the fire magic.

    Since there¡¯s a lot of fire magic.

    I continue watching for a bit before reaching for my terminal and beginning to type down notes over what I see on it. Feeling rather happy about how waterproof terminals are in the process.

    One of the spells I see is a massive explosion of flames without any smoke. Another is a compressed wave of flames that are almost like a laser instead of flames, albeit still not lasers. Then there¡¯s a large firestorm kind of like a blizzard, but with flames instead.

    Each and every fire spell that I see I take notes on. Both ones I¡¯ve never seen anything like before, and spells that are similar to ones I have. Not to mention support spells, since I don¡¯t have many of those.

    I can¡¯t help but smile as I write it all down. Taking full advantage of this chance.If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    After all, it¡¯s not often that I get to see the nation with the most advanced fire magic in the entire continent in action. Even if I can¡¯t see the Class S magician.

    Although I get the feeling the Class S magician isn¡¯t all that dangerous to me in particular. Or not as dangerous. What with fire magic not being the greatest at restraining someone.

    I continue writing notes for a couple hours as the forces of Natra fight rather evenly against the baron¡¯s forces. All the way till I get a call from the baron himself on my terminal that I answer, placing headphones on my head to keep it quiet.

    ¡°Undying Magician, where are you? I was told you would be heading for my territory,¡± the man asks right away as I don¡¯t bother to stop writing notes.

    ¡°Writing notes under a ship on your shores,¡± I answer rather bluntly and without a single care about him knowing.

    Because why should I care?

    ¡°Then stop it and assist,¡± the baron shouts into the call. ¡°Now.¡±

    I glance at the terminal with a genuinely confused frown on my face before asking, ¡°Why?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s written in the contract, you filthy-¡± he begins to shout, but I interrupt him.

    ¡°I¡¯ve already fulfilled my part of the contract for the day,¡± I state while going back to writing down my notes. ¡°There¡¯s no reason for me to assist you.¡±

    He starts to shout back at me again, but I just hang up the call and continue writing.

    How annoying.

    I may be fighting for the Kingdom of the Fallen, but there¡¯s no reason for me to assist every one of the nobles. No reason at all.

    After all, all I agreed to do was fight for the Kingdom. Not for any particular territory in it.

    So I just keep writing down my notes. Meanwhile I get one call after another from the baron. Each that I completely ignore.

    These nobles sure are a pain¡­

    After the tenth call, I put my terminal on Do Not Disturb to make it stop giving me any notifications about them.

    Then I continue taking notes until I can no longer find any new spells to watch.

    I look through the dozens of pages of notes I wrote for a few minutes before nodding once and putting my terminal on sleep mode. And without hesitation, I duck back down underwater and begin leaving the area. Heading towards the next closest territory.

    A territory belonging to a different noble who is a decent enough person. Just like Count Draxis.

    Of course, that¡¯s not until after I go ahead and board a couple of Natra¡¯s warships and walk all the way over to their data storage areas. Where I find some of their basic combat spells recorded.

    Because why just study their spells in action and not take a few myself?

    I smile as I look over the notes and the spells I stole while heading over to the next territory. Already beginning to hypothesize over new possible spells of my own, along with spells altering the ones I got and saw.

    The spells actually are so interesting that I lose myself completely in them, and by the time I look up from the notes and my new spells, I find myself already encroaching onto their territory. Encroaching onto the battle within the territory.

    So close that I¡¯m actually attacked by some of the enemy soldiers, which is why I looked up in the first place.

    I frown at the enemy soldiers, only briefly glancing at the nobles with them. Then I look down at myself to find half of my torso having lost its clothing. Even if my body has already restored itself.

    Right. I¡¯m in a war.

    Guess I¡¯ll leave spell-crafting until later.

 B4 | Chapter 7

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    It only takes me one day of battling to realize something rather important.

    Why should I bother with putting my spell-crafting off until later? After all, it¡¯s a lot more important than this fighting. And so long as I am fighting, I fulfil my requirement.

    No one ever said I had to fight with all I had.

    So at some point I start to waltz around some battlefields here and there while muttering to myself and typing away at my terminal, programming new spells and altering old ones. Only occasionally pulling out my gun and shooting someone in the face or cutting someone¡¯s head off.

    Or just going the simple route of ripping someone¡¯s throat out with my claws. Since it takes the least amount of time to do.

    Of course, I pay enough attention when I attack so that I don¡¯t attack an ally. Because that would be annoying.

    I don¡¯t want the nobles to fuss at me after all.

    As for the soldiers themselves? It depends on the battlefield.

    I do care about the soldiers in some of the battlefields, but I¡¯m just wandering around without paying much attention until I arrive at new battlefields and territories. At which point I quickly check to see whose territory it is.

    Although I make sure to steer clear from a couple territories in particular.

    And just like this, a couple weeks pass rather peacefully. Or, as peacefully as a war can get. Which probably isn¡¯t very peaceful.

    During this time, word about an immortal vampire seems to be making the rounds, and I eventually have to start being more careful about paying attention on battlefields. Because some higher Class magicians are starting to show up just to catch me.

    Not that it does them much good in the end as I always either escape or kill them.

    Eventually though, as I¡¯m passing through the gap between two battlefields in different territories, I find myself receiving a call on my terminal. One from Claire.

    ¡°Your Majesty, I have a report,¡± Claire states immediately upon my accepting the call.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    I continue jogging across the forest I¡¯m passing through as I state, ¡°Continue.¡±

    ¡°As you may have heard, one of our neighboring territories was overrun and the baron reigning over the territory slain by the Arcadian Society,¡± Claire states, surprising me with information I had not actually heard about. But she doesn¡¯t need to know that. ¡°Thanks to that, we have an influx of refugees rushing to gain entry into your territory. Therefore your presence is requested three days from now at a gathering of the newly hired officers and soldiers.¡±

    ¡°Very well,¡± I tell her without pausing in my jog.

    I haven¡¯t left the battlefield at all this month, so I can leave once a month without breaking the contract. And I can¡¯t break the contract this early on otherwise the others will be aware that they don¡¯t have anything tying me to this war. To them.

    That should wait until I¡¯m at least a Class B magician.

    After that, Claire goes on to mention several other topics. But none of them are important enough for me to see to them personally. Just some things I should probably know. So I write them down in my terminal and end the call once she¡¯s finished.

    Then I pick up the pace while heading towards the next location. A territory owned by some viscount who isn¡¯t really important amongst the nobles. Someone who kind of just blends into the background.

    What is important is the fact that this viscount is willing to work with others. He¡¯s also the target of one of the Arcadian Society¡¯s armies.

    Once I get out of the forest though, I find myself faced with a rather large surprise. One that I wasn¡¯t expecting.

    Incendia flies down and lands on my shoulder as we both stare up in awe at the skies above the battlefield. Where four Class S magicians are currently battling it out.

    All on different sides.

    The Chairman of the Republic of Arcania, Artorius Hunter. User of anti-magic and the instigator of this war.

    The newly advanced general of the Entarian military, Leopold Houk. A dark magic magician and, from what I¡¯ve heard, a rather arrogant man in general.

    The queen of the White Kingdom, Emma Sonnen. A wind affinity magician and very intense military fanatic.

    And, of course, the skeleton. Adalwolf Giese.

    The Class S death magician who forcefully adopted me as his son and made me a prince.

    All four of them are fighting high above the battlefield, but while there technically is a war going on beneath them as well, most of it seems to just be the soldiers fleeing from the Class S magicians stray attacks. Which are all leaving rather large scars on the land.

    Can¡¯t help but wonder how pissed off the viscount must be at this, since they weren¡¯t here according to the last update I got. Meaning they must have gotten here within the last few hours or so.

    I watch the Class S magicians fight both with awe and some minor hints of fear. Although not much. Simply because my sense of fear has kind of faded over the years.

    Plus the scariest one amongst them is the skeleton, and he won¡¯t hurt me.

    If he was planning on experimenting on me he would¡¯ve done so already instead of teaching me magic.

    It¡¯s a shame that there aren¡¯t any fire magicians amongst them, but I should at least be able to learn quite a bit about death magic from watching this. So I go to a nearby tree before cutting it down with my blade and sitting on the stump it leaves behind.

    Then I turn my terminal off of sleep mode again and get to work taking notes.

    Because it¡¯s not every day that I get to watch Class S magicians fight. Especially when one of them uses one of my affinities.

 B4 | Chapter 8

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 27

    The battle between the Class S magicians continues going on for at least a few hours before they change locations. Destroying quite a lot of the surroundings in the process of their battle. Including but not limited to a good chunk of both the armies below them along with a few of the Republic of Arcania ships and some bits of the viscount¡¯s fortresses.

    As for the rest of the armies? They retreated at least an hour ago.

    They were actually in the process of retreating long before that, but they had to dodge the Class S magicians¡¯ attacks as if they were artillery raining down from above. Which they pretty much were.

    It certainly doesn¡¯t help though that the skeleton kept firing off attacks aimed in the direction of the ships while attacking the other Class S magicians. Specifically to make it so that his attacks would hit the Republic of Arcania¡¯s army.

    An act that was very much pissing off the Chairman of said Republic until he finally managed to bring their battle away from this battlefield.

    I don¡¯t care one way or another though. Because I got quite the number of notes written down about the battle.

    So I¡¯m happy.

    It would¡¯ve been nice if one of the Class S magicians was a fire affinity magician, but I at least got a lot of notes about the skeleton¡¯s spells. Since he doesn¡¯t normally show me those. Saying something about not wanting to waste mana.

    Other than that I also got plenty of notes on the fire spells used by one of the other armies. So I have plenty to work with.

    I¡¯ve already got a Tier V spell ready and complete at this point through necromancy, so I just have to finish up at least one Tier VI spell to be considered a Class B magician at last. And my route to doing that lies in the notes I took about those fire magicians.

    After all, there were at least a couple fire magicians there who were using Tier VI fire spells. Even if most didn¡¯t have the mana to be considered a Class B magician.

    The complete opposite of me who has more than enough mana but not the spells necessary.

    A Tier VI spell focuses on affecting the mind. Something like mind crush, which can directly attack the mind of an enemy, or telepathy, which can build up a mental link between them.Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.

    As for the fire Tier VI spells I saw on that battlefield, there weren¡¯t any telepathy type spells. But that¡¯s obvious when it comes to fire magic.

    I¡¯m not sure if a fire affinity telepathy skill exists to be honest.

    Well, other than one possible idea I can think of. But that wouldn¡¯t be considered a Tier VI spell.

    It would be a spell that would send pain to the nerves or brain of someone else in morse code without any actual words. But that wouldn¡¯t be a mental spell. It would just be physical.

    It would also have a good chance of either burning them alive, leaving their brain or nerves damaged, or making them sick with a fever.

    So not exactly a priority to learn right now.

    Mind crush, on the other hand, is a type of spell I did see them using through fire affinity. And I took plenty of notes over it.

    Most of the fire magicians seemed to be completely changing the frequency of the flames they¡¯re using so that they would target the mind rather than the body. But I couldn¡¯t figure out what the frequency they changed it to was. Nor could I figure out how they changed the frequency in the first place.

    That¡¯s what experimenting is for though, so for now I can only experiment.

    And who better to experiment on than these soldiers?

    It¡¯s too bad the spells that were stored on their ships only go up to Tier III. With a couple Tier V spells as well.

    Tier IV spells are more classified since they¡¯re battlefield-scale attack spells and are therefore dangerous. Meanwhile Tier VI spells and higher are all classified just because of the difficulty and use of the spells.

    Tier VI spells targeting the mind are rather annoying to deal with after all, from what I¡¯ve heard.

    Anyways, I begin working on crafting a Tier VI spell of my own. Testing various different things to make a change to the fire¡¯s frequency. Which often ends up with me being burnt alive. But that doesn¡¯t really matter.

    Of course, I wait until I am sitting on a cliff to do this. Looking out over the ruined battlefield.

    Meanwhile the enemy and ally soldiers all march back onto the battlefield to continue their little war. But I¡¯ve already dealt with my quota of help today, so I just focus on my spellcrafting. Only occasionally dealing with a pest that bothers me in the form of one of the enemy soldiers sending an attack spell at me after no doubt noticing my presence.

    On top of that though, I also once in a while just send out my spell to test it out on an enemy soldier. Since they¡¯re there and I don¡¯t have to bother with finding test subject wild animals.

    Might as well use them if they¡¯re gonna be here anyways, fighting away.

    Time passes while I sit here testing out my spells, but I don¡¯t really make much progress during this time. All the way until the sun goes down and the soldiers begin to retreat for the night. Albeit with some spells still being launched at each other even after they¡¯ve left the battlefield.

    In the end I¡¯m left sitting here on the cliff without any test subjects- err, enemy soldiers left to test my unfinished spell on. So I eventually climb to my feet and begin heading in the direction of a more comfortable location to continue testing my spell. But after a few seconds I pause before shrugging to myself and heading towards the ships.

    Just because they retreated doesn¡¯t mean I can¡¯t continue testing my spell on them in their own ships.

 B4 | Chapter 9

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 30

    After spending the past few days experimenting with my new spell ¨C and not getting as much progress as I¡¯d prefer ¨C I head straight back to the Undying Caverns. After, of course, notifying the nobles about my taking my one break from the frontlines. But the first thing I find when I get there is not what I was expecting.

    What I find is a massive crowd lined up in front of the entrance to the Undying Caverns. There¡¯s got to be several dozen thousand people, with tents and camps built up for as far as the eye can see.

    And my eyes can see quite far, considering what I am, not to mention the lack of trees directly around the building serving as the entrance to the Caverns. What with the trees having previously been scorched in a battle.

    What¡¯s even worse about this though is that I can smell wounds and injuries covering everyone here. And if it weren¡¯t for the fact that I just came from a battlefield that had even more injuries than this, it would¡¯ve been annoying to hold back my bloodlust.

    But fortunately for me I don¡¯t really have much trouble with bloodlust anymore. Especially after fighting in the war for days on end.

    While experimenting, but I think I can consider that fighting in the war.

    Not sure if the nobles even realized I was experimenting with my new spell when ¡®fighting¡¯, so it¡¯s fine.

    I begin to walk through the people towards the entrance of the Caverns, only for some of them to attempt to shove me out of the way as they try getting over to the really long line that¡¯s formed. Which ends up with them falling on their rears instead of me since I¡¯m a vampire.

    Without paying them any mind, I continue walking towards the front of the line. Gathering the attention of quite a few of the people in the line.

    And while some of them begin to shout at me about skipping the line, others quickly realize who I am.

    After all, there aren¡¯t exactly many people with glowing red eyes in the world, much less the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    At least, when not using magic, that is.

    Once they realize it¡¯s me, and word spreads to the others who were previously barraging me with complaints, everyone begins ditching the line to follow me. But I ignore them all to eventually step inside the building as the guards stationed there block the refugees from entering.The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    Such a pain.

    The soldiers all say a very respectful, ¡°Welcome back, Your Majesty,¡± copying what Claire calls me now along with some of the other leaders. And I give them a brief nod as I walk by. Meanwhile the civilians living in the Undying Caverns all kneel or bow in front of me as I pass without saying a word.

    Which is rather awkward for me, but I don¡¯t pay them any attention.

    Eventually I make it to the meeting room where I can smell Claire currently being located. Making the other officers in the room all stand up and give me a salute.

    Of the people in the room that I recognize at a glance, there¡¯s Ryan Haris ¨C my head of logistics ¨C and Benjamin Anderson ¨C the leader of my enforcers. And of course Claire, my second in command. But the others are all just faces I may have seen once or twice but don¡¯t really know other than that. All people Claire and the others hired.

    I glance at Incendia, who is currently perched on my shoulder with her eyes closed. As if she doesn¡¯t care about any of this.

    Then I look back at Claire and ask, ¡°Alright, I¡¯m here. What do you need?¡±

    Claire doesn¡¯t waste any time as she answers, ¡°We need your power to intimidate the new refugees, since they¡¯re growing more and more uncontrollable by the day. And the magicians amongst them don¡¯t seem to be afraid of our own or our weapons.¡±

    ¡°Do you have a plan for this already set?¡± I ask while crossing my arms, making Incendia slowly open her eyes before looking directly at Claire. Which in turn seems to make Claire shiver slightly.

    She nods her head, answering, ¡°Yes, I have a plan set to begin the moment you agree to it.¡±

    ¡°Good,¡± I state before glancing at the other officers in the room when I notice the smell of perspiration. Meaning they¡¯re all sweating. And after looking them all over for a moment, I realize they¡¯re all nervous as hell.

    But that¡¯s not all. While they have some fear in them, most of them just seem excited.

    Interesting.

    I look back at Claire again as she says, ¡°The plan is currently revolving around a single group of talented mages from the fallen noble¡¯s military forces that are armed and include a single Class B magician in their ranks. One that was being fostered by the noble in question and is even the noble¡¯s son, thereby inheriting his title upon the noble¡¯s death. Which is intimidating the others into listening to him.¡±

    Right, so it¡¯s a matter of taking down the most powerful and influential group amongst them with ease to intimidate the rest into following my orders. While also shutting that noble brat up in the process.

    ¡°If that doesn¡¯t work?¡± I ask with a single brow raised.

    She just stares back at me and answers rather bluntly, ¡°Then feast.¡±

    My other brow rises at that answer.

    Did she really just tell me to drink their blood in front of everyone to terrify them? I mean, that would work, but still¡­

    She can be more ruthless than I¡¯d thought.

    Although I get the feeling it won¡¯t come to that. Not so long as I make it look easy enough to take down the noble brat.

    Which shouldn¡¯t be a problem.

    The corner of my lips quirk ever so slightly upwards as I state, ¡°Alright, let¡¯s put this plan into action.¡±

    ¡°These nobles¡­¡± Incendia mutters through our bond, making me nod my head in agreement.

    These nobles indeed.

 B4 | Chapter 10

    Outside of the Undying Caverns

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 30

    Valent Ararius feels sullied just from standing here in front of the Undying Caverns¡¯ entrance. Because he¡¯s stuck out here unless he wants to get in the line behind the commoners. And there¡¯s no way he would ever do that.

    He¡¯s a Class B magician and a noble.

    The very thought of standing in line with a bunch of non-magician commoners is a slap in the face to the word ¡®noble¡¯ and makes him incredibly disappointed with the ¡®prince¡¯ already.

    But what was even worse was when the prince in question completely ignored his people who he had try to summon him over to speak before walking straight inside of the caverns.

    So he does what feels right to do.

    He walks up to a small raised platform that his subordinates created from nearby wood and spreads his arms out to both sides before using a wind spell to amplify his voice as he speaks, ¡°People of my beloved territory! We have all seen just how little the Undying Magician thinks of human lives! Are we going to just stand for this?! Even if he is the prince, he can¡¯t just stomp on us humans like we¡¯re ants! He can¡¯t-¡± Valent continues speaking for an entire five minutes, trying to rile up the commoners.

    To his surprise though, most of them completely ignore his words. He even sees some hints of disgust sent towards him.

    Disgust that sends his rage even further down the hole of no return as he decides to change tactics and nods at his direct subordinates. All of whom are Class C magicians.

    And without hesitation, the Class C magicians in question raise their hands, making one spell circle appear after another. Then numerous arrows of magic emerge above said spell circles. Ranging all the way from arrows of light and lightning to arrows of darkness and flames.

    Nearly a dozen different affinities overall.

    ¡°Abandoning the Ararius territory to the enemy and running away like a coward to a neighboring territory is treason, and you will be punished for it,¡± Valent finally loses his patience. ¡°But don¡¯t worry, for only a few of you will make for good examples.¡±

    Then he gives the signal, making his magicians all send out the arrows flying at the closest civilians. Terrifying all of the non-magicians and angering the magicians.Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.

    But the arrows aren¡¯t given a chance to hit them as they slam into a barrier of black flames instead, leaving every single arrow dissipating in the process.

    Valent¡¯s mind blanks for a moment before he, his men, and all of the civilians turn to look at the entrance to the Undying Caverns to find an entire force of soldiers leaving it. Four dozen in all, with a single man leading them.

    A man Valent recognizes from the picture he¡¯s seen of the Undying Magician.

    The adopted son of the King of the Fallen.

    What surprises Valent though is that the vampire doesn¡¯t look angry. He just looks a little bored and irritated.

    Almost like what he¡¯s doing right now is just dealing with a pest biting at his ankles and not an actual problem.

    He¡¯s even got that strange bird of his on his shoulder.

    A bird that is staring at him just as coldly as its master.

    And this combination of events pisses Valent off more than anything that¡¯s happened thus far.

    ¡°Your Highness,¡± Valent says in a mocking tone while crossing his arms and looking down at the approaching vampire from his pedestal. ¡°It would appear as if your new refugees are discontent. How are you going to deal with this?¡±

    To his surprise, the Undying Magician doesn¡¯t stop walking. He doesn¡¯t even say a single word.

    Not until he makes it right beneath his barrier of flames, dispelling the flames and standing between Valent and the line of people. People who all seem happy about his intervention, clearly gaining him popularity through his saving them.

    Valent¡¯s eyebrow twitches and his jaw clenches before he opens his mouth.

    But before he can say a word, the Undying Magician speaks.

    ¡°I will give you three simple options,¡± he declares, his voice as cold as ice as it sends a chill down Valent¡¯s spine. ¡°Put down your arms and surrender, allowing us to cuff you with anti-magic cuffs. Leave now and never return to my territory. Or die where you stand.¡±

    The rage in Valent¡¯s heart grows with every word the Undying Magician speaks. And after a few seconds, he raises his hand, making his soldiers all raise their guns to aim at the Undying Magician while more spell circles appear in the air.

    All I have to do is kill off the civilians and soldiers behind him before restraining the Undying Magician himself. Then he should back down and let us in.

    Valent genuinely can¡¯t believe the lies the man is spewing, because there is no way anyone would kill him. The absolute youngest Class B magician in the kingdom and a newly risen noble after his father¡¯s death.

    Not only would it simply antagonize the other nobles right after their treaty, but it would paint a cruel picture to the people he has been rescuing.

    And someone who is going out of his way to rescue refugees like this and help them is a bleeding heart who would never damage his public image.

    Meaning none of the Undying Magicians words must be true.

    ¡°Option three it is,¡± the Undying Magician declares before he vanishes in a blur, following which Valent feels a powerful pressure on his neck as the man appears again in front of him. With his hand holding Valent¡¯s throat as he lifts the young noble into the air with just a single hand and no magical aid.

    Valent¡¯s mind blanks out again from pure shock. Then the shock turns to a brief inability to understand what¡¯s happening, followed by an even briefer period of terror.

    All before he hears a loud cracking sound, and everything goes dark.

    With the cold and apathetic gaze within the Undying Magician¡¯s eyes never once fluctuating the entire time.

 B4 | Chapter 11

    Nathan

    Year 2850 | Month 12 | Day 30

    I feel absolutely nothing as I snap the neck of that annoying noble in front of his entire entourage of people. In front of the entire group of refugees lined up in front of my base¡¯s entrance. Shocking them all in the process.

    Now, whether they¡¯re shocked that I killed someone so easily, and with my bare hands no less, or whether they¡¯re shocked at the fact that I killed a noble, I¡¯m not sure. Either way, I¡¯ve got their attention now.

    So I casually toss the noble¡¯s corpse aside before stepping up onto the guy¡¯s podium and turning to face the other refugees without caring about the subordinates of the noble who are all staring at me and their late leader with more than a little shock on their faces. Not to mention their guns and swords raised.

    They¡¯re too shocked to attack me though, and even if they did attack me, all it would mean is that I¡¯d need to get another set of armor. Which isn¡¯t anything new.

    ¡°I¡¯ll keep this short and simple,¡± I state as Incendia just stares at everyone from her place on my shoulder. ¡°If you follow my rules and live peacefully in my Caverns, I won¡¯t bother you and we¡¯ll be fine. You simply need to live your lives without crossing me and mine.¡± My glowing red eyes narrow as they light up the dark of the night. ¡°But if you cross me, I don¡¯t care if you¡¯re a noble or some random farmer. I¡¯ll take care of the problem in the shortest way possible.¡±

    Everyone looks at the dead noble at that before looking back to me and nodding.

    Meanwhile the noble¡¯s little entourage finally mentally recover from what happened, following which I feel a sword stabbing me through my back and heart before going out my chest.

    I just sigh as I move faster than they can react to, snapping the sword while it¡¯s still in me to grab the man by his jaw and lift him into the air. Then I incinerate the sword while it¡¯s still being pushed out by my body¡¯s reversion before moving him around in front of me and frowning at him.

    ¡°What part of what I just said didn¡¯t register in your head?¡± I ask, my frown growing a bit deeper at the shock and fear written all over his face. But that shock and fear turns to anger as the man makes numerous spell circles appear around us before golden spears form and pierce into me from all over.The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    Not that they do anything as they all fade after piercing me, and any damage done to my body is restored as always.

    I let out another sigh before snapping his neck as well and tossing his body on top of the nobles. Then I focus on the refugees in general and ask, ¡°Any questions?¡±

    Silence fills the space in front of the Undying Cavern¡¯s entrance.

    ¡°Good,¡± I state with a nod of my head. ¡°So long as you don¡¯t make trouble, you can live peacefully here. But if you cause me problems, then I¡¯ll cause you problems in return. A fair trade, I¡¯d say.¡±

    And without even waiting for a response, I begin to head back into the Undying Caverns. With my ¡®bodyguards¡¯ following closely behind me. Even though they are kind of useless other than looking important.

    But Claire insisted on having people with me to make me look more intimidating.

    Not that I really need much help in that department. What with me having glowing red eyes, black veins running through my face, and superhuman strength. All while it¡¯s dark out.

    Anyways, when I get back into the Undying Caverns, I find Claire smiling and nodding at me from a little bit further into the entrance. So I nod back and ask, ¡°Anything else that needs addressing?¡±

    She shakes her head and answers, ¡°No, that¡¯s it. Thank you for dealing with that for me.¡±

    I just give her a nod before heading over towards my lab. Because I want to experiment with my spell using some of the tools I have here. And I can¡¯t exactly do that when I¡¯m on a battlefield.

    At least, not all of the tools.

    Some of them I can actually take with me. But not the most important ones. Seeing as those are way too large, and many of them are practically tied down to my lab.

    As for test subjects¡­ I don¡¯t actually need any for the experiments I¡¯m planning while here. So that won¡¯t be an issue.

    Although I do want to see what will happen if I try using a mental offensive spell against an undead.

    So without any hesitation, I go ahead and spend the rest of my day off experimenting. And in the process getting a good amount of work done on the spell.

    Eventually though I have to leave, at which point I make my way back to the battlefield.

    And immediately resume experiments there instead. Because that¡¯s what this war is about at this point.

    I honestly couldn¡¯t care less about how many of these nobles are defeated after all. And the main point of the war isn¡¯t even the battle between us minions.

    It¡¯s the battle between the Class S magicians.

    A battle that is still raging on rather strongly from what I¡¯ve heard in our monthly meeting between nobles.

    Which kind of makes me wonder just how long they can spend fighting without a break. But Class S magicians are all special, seeing as they don¡¯t need magic circles to fight.

    The skeleton makes perfect sense though. Seeing as he¡¯s undead.

    And undead like us don¡¯t really have stamina issues.

    Not that I¡¯d have those issues even if I wasn¡¯t an undead, considering my immortality.

    Putting that aside, I spend days upon days experimenting with my new spell.

    All the way until I finally complete the thing, officially raising my Class into Class B.

 B4 | Chapter 12

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 9

    Interesting¡­

    I sit here at the edge of the cliff overlooking a rather large battlefield as I occasionally toss out my new spell on some enemies who get close. Trying to see if there¡¯s any way to improve it while I¡¯m still out here. And each time I use it, the enemy in question that I¡¯m using it on just kinda collapses without showing any signs of pain or injury.

    Probably because I¡¯m literally burning their mind to cinders, but still.

    It¡¯s rather interesting to see how instant it is.

    Unfortunately it takes a decent chunk of mana to use the spell. Which makes sense seeing as it¡¯s a Tier VI spell. One that is supposed to only be castable by Class B magicians.

    Although¡­

    ¡®You need to return to your mana arc training in full,¡¯ Incendia states exactly what¡¯s on my mind in my mind.

    ¡®Yeah, I really do,¡¯ I mutter through our bond.

    Because of this spell, I¡¯ve been focusing a lot more on spell crafting than I have training my mana arcs. And it¡¯s shown in the drastic slowing down of their growth.

    Part of that is also because of this war though, and not just because of my new spell. Seeing as I don¡¯t exactly have much time to sit around and pull out the device for training my mana arcs here. Not without worrying about some random magician swooping in and stealing it from me.

    Or just plain damaging it.

    I¡¯d be pissed if someone did that.

    On another note, I get the feeling my Tier VI spell is only as deadly as it is because I¡¯m not just using fire magic in it.

    ¡®Death flames are far more powerful at eating the mind than regular flames,¡¯ Incendia states, confirming my suspicion.

    I decided to make it death flames on a whim, but who knew it would work out?

    Either way, a Tier VI spell is a Tier VI spell. Regardless of what affinities it uses.

    Unfortunately I need to just about double the amount of mana arcs I have right now to have enough for half of the Class A magician qualifications. As for the other half, I need to be able to cast a Tier VIII spell. Which is¡­ going to be difficult.Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Actually, scratch that. It won¡¯t be too difficult. Tier VIII is just a spell strong enough to affect an entire city. And my affinities focus on outright dealing damage and destruction, so it¡¯s not a problem.

    What is a problem are Tier VII spells. Spells that warp the mind instead of damaging it.

    I don¡¯t think it¡¯s possible for fire magic to do that.

    Death magic, on the other hand, is perfectly possible.

    I¡¯m an example of that actually. Seeing as the mutagen stuff that turned me into a vampire in the first place had to have included some Tier VII spells mixed into it. Otherwise I wouldn¡¯t have gotten these new mental instincts.

    An enemy magician starts sending ice spears my way, but Incendia just casually erupts a wall of flames that melt the spears before they can even get to me. Meanwhile I continue considering what it¡¯ll take to reach Class A.

    By the end of my musings though, I realize that I probably won¡¯t be reaching Class A for at least a year. Maybe longer.

    Which is a pity, but it¡¯s not like it matters how long it takes me. I don¡¯t exactly have a time limit after all.

    I just would prefer to do it sooner rather than later so I can participate in this war more and get it done and over with.

    Plus having city-wide destruction spells is rather beneficial for conflict in general.

    My thoughts are interrupted with several Class B magicians from the enemy forces begin to approach me. At which point Incendia hops onto my head and stares at them, with me not even bothering getting up from where I¡¯m standing as I watch them as well.

    It takes a moment, but they eventually stop several meters in front of the cliff I¡¯m sitting on. All just staring up at me with frowns on their faces.

    ¡°There something you want?¡± I ask with a frown of my own.

    My question seems to piss them off.

    ¡°Immortal, you are to come with us to be taken back to the mainland for the benefit of humankind,¡± the Class B magician at the front of the group says, surprising me enough that I just blankly stare at them. ¡°Once there you will follow all orders you receive and answer any questions asked.¡±

    I just continue staring at him, briefly wondering if this guy was dropped on his head as a child or something.

    I glance up at Incendia as I ask through our bond, ¡®Do you think he really believes I¡¯ll just follow him like a good puppy?¡¯

    She shakes her head and answers, ¡®He can¡¯t be that stupid. The man¡¯s little friends seem to be ready for combat as well, so they¡¯re probably expecting a fight.¡¯

    Good. I was really hoping the enemy didn¡¯t have officers that stupid.

    It would just be plain sad if they did.

    Well, anyways, I go ahead and hop down from the cliff before landing on the ground below. Making all of the Class B magicians here tense up as I do so.

    I give them as wide a smile as I can ¨C which, to be honest, isn¡¯t that wide ¨C before moving faster than their eyes can see and cutting off the head of the Class B magician who tried to give me an order. Shocking the others as they all rush backwards while preparing numerous barriers and other spells.

    ¡®Putting aside the stupidity of that comment, it does at least look like I¡¯m starting to get more attention from the enemies,¡¯ I comment with some amusement to Incendia.

    ¡®Indeed,¡¯ she says in return with a nod. ¡®As you should.¡¯

    ¡®Now I just need to deal with these people and maybe those nobles will stop eyeing my territory like a piece of candy,¡¯ I add with a wry smile on my face.

    ¡®Unlikely,¡¯ Incendia says, not even considering that a possibility.

    ¡®Probably not, but one can dream¡­¡¯ I mutter in return before activating a spell and making black flames begin coating my sword. Meanwhile Incendia activates her own spell that makes a large dome of black flames appear all around us.

    Time to see how strong these guys really are.

 B4 | Chapter 13

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 9

    After killing that first one before, there are a total of six Class B magicians left in front of me. And all six of them quickly begin to show signs of oxygen deprivation as Incendia¡¯s spell deprives the dome of any and all oxygen. Which, coincidentally enough, begins to kill off the other soldiers in the area as well. Enemies who just happen to have been caught up in the dome.

    I don¡¯t pay them any mind though as I move faster than any regular human could possibly move straight up to the closest Class B magician before slashing out with my death flame coated blade. At which point my blade strikes the wind barrier of one of the magicians, only to shatter the barrier and send the magician flying as a gust of wind pushes him back. Most likely a backup spell in their barrier to knock them out of the way of an attack.

    Which is a pretty interesting and good idea, if I¡¯m being honest. Making it so they¡¯re sent flying backwards if their barrier is shattered. Pushing them out of the way of the attack in the process.

    With their ally out of the way, all of the other magicians begin blasting spells at me in a rapid-fire manner. Literally dozens of spells a second. Completely blotting out my vision in the process.

    Also destroying my armor again, but at this point I¡¯m used to it.

    The barrage lasts for quite some time as I feel my consciousness beginning to slip as my entire body is erased. And just like normal, my body quickly begins to reform once their barrage ends. Leaving me standing naked in front of them with nothing more than a ring, my terminal, my sword, and my storage device on me. Until a second later after I summon clothes from said storage device and put them on.

    Meanwhile the magicians in front of me look shocked as hell as they all show worsening and worsening signs of oxygen deprivation. With some of them falling to their knees while gasping in an attempt to get more air.

    But Incendia doesn¡¯t stop her spell even after she too was blasted to smithereens.

    I glance at her with more than a little interest on my face.

    ¡®How do you keep your spell running even after losing consciousness?¡¯ I ask out of curiosity.

    She looks back at me and answers, ¡®Leave an if-else loop in the script that will decrease the amount of mana required to run the spell while it still goes on without you. But only if you aren¡¯t actively providing mana to it. This won¡¯t let you run it forever, and it¡¯ll decrease the efficiency of the spell while you aren¡¯t there providing mana, but it¡¯ll keep the spell going even after you¡¯ve lost consciousness.¡±This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

    Interesting¡­ I should look into editing my spells to add that.

    Anyways, now that they¡¯re all struggling to even stand much less fight, I coat my blade in death flames again and rush forwards. Quickly cutting the head off of one of the Class B magicians before moving on and stabbing another straight through the heart.

    Unfortunately for me, my free reign over them is shattered when cracks begin forming on the dome around us. Following which the dome completely falls apart to reveal another magician floating outside of it.

    A woman I vaguely recognize from intel I remember reading back in the academy.

    She¡¯s a Class A general from the nation of Natra. And, more importantly to me, she¡¯s a fire affinity magician.

    A faint smile stretches across my face as I see her. Meanwhile the Class B magicians all quickly begin gasping for air far harder than before now that air is rushing back into the area after the dome was destroyed.

    Although now there are only four Class B magicians left, and they¡¯ve drained at least half of their mana with their barrage of attacks on me.

    Not to mention their bodies aren¡¯t in the greatest of shapes thanks to the oxygen deprivation earlier.

    So the Class A magician waves her hand, ordering them to retreat before she focuses on me with her eyes narrowed.

    I glance at Incendia and comment, ¡®I get the feeling she doesn¡¯t like me.¡¯

    ¡®Probably not,¡¯ Incendia says in return as I turn to look at the woman who is currently flying through some sort of spell that seems to be heating the air around her to expand it. ¡®Doesn¡¯t mean you can¡¯t learn some of her spells.¡¯

    My smile turns into a grin.

    True.

    So without hesitation I turn my terminal off sleep mode and begin taking notes about the spell she¡¯s using. An act in and of itself that seems to piss her the hell off, considering the dozens upon dozens of spears made out of fire that appear in the air before flying at me.

    I ignore them to continue typing on my terminal. Because taking notes on this flight spell of hers is far more important than my clothes being scorched to ashes again.

    Those can and are easily replaced as I nonchalantly pull more out from my storage after her spells finish. Then I return to writing my notes.

    Her eyes twitch in irritation.

    At this point she seems to realize that it¡¯s impossible to deal with me through attacks, so she slowly flies down before the spell she¡¯s using to fly changes a little. Making it so that the air is less and less heated the lower she goes.

    I, of course, make sure to take notes on it all as I watch.

    ¡°Why are you attacking our forces, Undead Magician? You¡¯re clearly wearing gear made in Arcadia, and you don¡¯t seem to care about the nobles in the areas you fight in. Are you even a part of the Kingdom of the Fallen?¡± The woman asks, surprising me more than a little at the fact that the enemies paid that much attention to me and my actions.

    But I answer rather simply while not stopping in my note-taking, ¡°Because the nobles are a bunch of wimps who decided to push me to fight their enemies instead of fighting them.¡±

    She stares at me.

    I continue taking notes until I feel satisfied and finally focus solely one her. Albeit more for the purpose of seeing any more spells she¡¯ll start using than paying attention to her words.

    Why isn¡¯t she attacking me anymore? I want to see more high tier fire spells¡­

    ¡°In that case, Undead Magician, let¡¯s talk,¡± the Class A magician declares, shocking the hell out of me.

    Wait, since when could magicians talk instead of attacking without provocation?!

    And more importantly¡­ what about seeing new fire spells?

 B4 | Chapter 14

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 9

    ¡°Answer me this, and answer me truthfully Undead Magician, why are you aiding the Kingdom?¡± the Class A fire magician asks once more with a frown on her face as the fighting all across the battlefield slows to a crawl. ¡°And would you be willing to switch to our side?¡±

    I frown at that. At both questions to be honest.

    This is honestly rather annoying.

    The one time an enemy actually wants to talk instead of going straight to attacking me ¨C ignoring the fact that she technically did attack me before trying to talk ¨C they¡¯re asking for the impossible. Because there is no way I¡¯m just going to abandon everything I¡¯ve worked for here to become some sort of slave to their nation.

    Because that¡¯s what would happen if I went to Natra.

    Natra is a nation that is extremely nationalistic. Even if they somehow gave me a high position there, which I doubt as their leadership would more likely try to turn me into an experiment than give me authority, I would be treated like a second class citizen at best.

    Some sort of slave at worst.

    Even if this woman doesn¡¯t seem to have any plans for that sort of treatment, her leaders would. Especially the Class S magician of Natra. Since I¡¯ve heard he is pretty much a slave driver when it comes to the refugees and foreigners in his nation.

    And even for the non-nationalistic nations, every nation will have at the very minimum several high ranking magicians who do want to experiment on me for every one that doesn¡¯t.

    So the only way for me to truly be free is to lead a nation of my own.

    With that in mind, I make eye contact with the Class A magician before answering, ¡°For the sake of my own freedom, I have to lead my own force.¡±

    She stares at me for several seconds and I stare back.

    During our little staring contest I finally begin to take note of her appearance.

    The woman seems to be just a little bit older than I am, so probably her mid-twenties. Seeing as I¡¯m twenty-one years old now. She has long black hair and surprisingly reddish-pink eyes. Almost like an albino if it weren¡¯t for her dark colored hair and slightly tanned skin. Which is normal for Natra from what I understand.Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Natra is a desert nation after all. And it¡¯s right across the dead pass waters between the mainland and the Kingdom of the Fallen at that.

    Eventually she just sighs as she waves her hand and says, ¡°Understandable.¡± Then she looks directly into my eyes and asks, ¡°Can I at least have your name?¡±

    I blink at that before shrugging and answering, ¡°Nathan. And most of the people in the kingdom seem to have taken to calling me the Undying Magician. Not the Undead Magician.¡±

    Not too fond of the name ¡®Undead Magician¡¯ even if it¡¯s not entirely false. It¡¯s not true either after all.

    The faintest hint of a smile appears on her face before I ask out of curiosity, ¡°And you are?¡±

    I remember her face but not her name from the intel. Mostly because I never expected to run into any Class A magicians from Natra back then.

    After all, I had my own problems to deal with. And foreign Class A magicians weren¡¯t the priority at the time.

    She looks surprised even as she answers, ¡°Cassandra Belle. Class A magician and special operatives officer of the Natran Military.¡±

    My eyes widen a little as I realize her name isn¡¯t Natran.

    Meaning there¡¯s a good chance she only has half Natran blood. Which would make receiving a position as highly as hers really difficult in their military. What with their obsession with Natran blood.

    Impressive.

    I kind of don¡¯t want to fight anymore. At least not this army.

    There are plenty of other armies to fight.

    Well, except for the fact that I still want to see her fire magic.

    I purse my lips at the thought before shrugging to myself and bluntly asking, ¡°Would you mind showing me some fire spells?¡±

    That question alone seems to flabbergast her. And it doesn¡¯t take the woman long to answer, ¡°No. And if you aren¡¯t planning on working with us, then please leave to another battlefield or I will be forced to capture you.¡± A slightly conflicted look appears on her face. ¡°And I don¡¯t really want to do that.¡±

    Huh.

    This woman really is full of surprises.

    For some reason she reminds me a little bit of Amelia.

    After thinking for a few seconds, an idea comes to mind, and I answer, ¡°Alright. I¡¯m done with my quota for the day anyways.¡±

    My response seems to surprise her just as much as her response surprised me. And after a brief pause to see if I¡¯m serious, she lowers her guard a bit and says, ¡°Okay.¡±

    I give her a single nod before going ahead and leaving the battlefield. Going rather far away before finally stopping and turning around. Then I pull out my sniper rifle and aim to look at the battlefield.

    Time to see her spells from back here.

    No point in sniping her though. Not only because I don¡¯t really want to kill her seeing as she¡¯s the only humane Class A magician I¡¯ve ever really met, but also because there¡¯s no reason to.

    Well, that and I doubt I¡¯d be able to kill her even with a surprise snipe.

    Class A magicians don¡¯t reach Class A by being careless around potential snipers after all.

    And just like what I was hoping, Cassandra soon turns her attention to the noble from the Kingdom of the Fallen who had come out to see what was going on. At which point she begins to fight him while showing off quite a few lovely fire spells that I am absolutely not planning on stealing.

    Definitely not.

    I make sure to write notes about them though.

    Also, I kind of hope she kills that noble. Mostly because he no doubt saw me going away after chatting with the Class A and will probably cause me trouble with the other nobles.

    Either way, it¡¯s time to learn more about fire spells.

 B4 | Chapter 15

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 9

    The first spell I make sure to take notes on is her flying one, since she quickly begins using that again against the noble. A noble who happens to be using lightning magic, just like my old friend Aidan who is probably sitting back in the academy lazing around or something.

    Albeit with this noble being Class A and Aidan being¡­ whatever Class he is right now.

    Actually, I can¡¯t help but wonder how my friends are all doing in their magic practice now that I think about it¡­

    They¡¯re probably somewhere around Class C or Class D still, considering that they don¡¯t have the device I have that helps me train my mana arcs. But I know some of them have a much higher talent than me, so at least one of them could be in the later stages of Class C.

    Maybe.

    Anyways, other than her flight spell, I also take notes on a spell of hers that seems to condense heat down to a single tiny inch-wide sphere that seems to suck in the surroundings kind of like a black hole. Except that anything that gets sucked into it is burnt instead of whatever happens to things that are sucked into a black hole.

    She sends several of those tiny orbs around which repeatedly cancel out the noble¡¯s lightning, although they also cancel each other out. To the point that when his lightning strikes towards her, it is redirected into the tiny sphere before the sphere and the lightning vanish together.

    Honestly, I have no idea how she¡¯s doing this but I¡¯m taking notes anyways. Because I may be able to figure it out eventually.

    Other than that, she also uses a spell similar to the one Incendia uses that places a space around her opponent that deprives them of oxygen. Except that hers is a small sphere unlike Incendia¡¯s massive dome. And hers obviously doesn¡¯t put her into it as well, seeing as she needs to breathe unlike me and Incendia.

    I¡¯m already working on perfecting Incendia¡¯s spell for my own usage, so Cassandra¡¯s version isn¡¯t particularly useful for me. Especially since her version is fire magic only.

    After the oxygen spell, Cassandra goes on to use numerous other spells that I write notes on. These include but aren¡¯t limited to spells that compress her flames down into bolts or bullets that she sends at the enemy and explode the moment they make contact, spells that seem to have some sort of hungry flame that wants to burn forever until it runs out of things to burn, and some spells that even somehow heal an arm back onto her body when the noble manages to cut it off with a sword.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    Now that one I want to learn.

    It¡¯s too bad I only caught some of it when I saw her using it. And I doubt she¡¯ll be using it a lot seeing as she probably doesn¡¯t want to keep losing her limbs in this fight.

    Maybe I should stick around this battlefield after today just to watch her spells¡­ or I guess I could try to trade spells with her at some point, seeing as she¡¯s actually rather humane. But I¡¯m not sure if she would go for that.

    I¡¯m a Class B magician while she¡¯s Class A after all. And I¡¯m a newly advanced Class B magician at that.

    Putting it simply, she has a lot more spells than I do.

    I continue watching their battle all the way until the noble gets arrogant and rather upset at the same time. Mostly because he¡¯s noticed that he is starting to lose the fight.

    Then he goes and starts blaming it on me for some reason.

    I frown at him.

    How rude. I¡¯m not even over there.

    To my surprise, I actually hear Cassandra defending me through my vampiric hearing, and it makes me feel rather happy. Which isn¡¯t something I¡¯m really used to feeling anymore. Being defended by someone else.

    So that¡¯s nice.

    The noble just starts going on about how he¡¯ll come back and kill her after ratting me out for ¡®betraying the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯ and some bullshit like that. And as he¡¯s saying this he seems to be trying to make an escape from Cassandra, who is using some sort of fire storm to try keeping him in place.

    But I can tell from here that he¡¯ll most likely get away.

    I frown for a moment as I consider everything that¡¯s happened here.

    The man is an asshole, she has been defending me and showing me quite a few new fire spells that I¡¯m already looking forward to figuring out, and he¡¯s going to cause me some rather annoying trouble with the other nobles if he gets out. Even if it won¡¯t actually come to anything. Nothing more than a bunch of complaints and maybe a few more enemies for after the war.

    So eventually I just shrug to myself and aim directly at the noble¡¯s head. And right when he ¨C from the looks of it ¨C pulls in all of his remaining mana for a single attack at her and her firestorm in order to clear an escape for himself, I snipe him in the head.

    Killing him in an instant before his body falls straight down to face plant in the ground below where he was flying.

    Then I quickly get the hell out of here faster than anyone else can move thanks to my vampiric speed.

    But not before noticing the Class A fire magician glancing my way with a faint smile on her face, proving that she knew I was here the whole time.

    Because of course she did. She¡¯s not an idiot like the noble.

    Anyways, I head on to the next battlefield while looking through the notes.

    Even if someone may suspect that I killed the noble, they can¡¯t prove anything. Even if Cassandra says something herself. Because I signed a contract with them that is currently trying to devour me alive and failing miserably. Making it so that, in their eyes, I shouldn¡¯t be able to kill any of their own during this war. Not without having my soul itself erased.

    Several seconds pass as I ignore the burning pain of my soul being erased and reverted over and over again until it finally fades when I reach the halfway point between this battlefield and the next.

    Good thing the others have no way of knowing if I¡¯ve broken the contract or not¡­ seeing as I¡¯m still alive and my soul didn¡¯t get its last ashes sent to the other signers of the contract like how it was supposed to happen.

    Now then.

    On to experimenting with and creating new spells on the next battlefield.

 B4 | Intermission 1

    The Joint Military Headquarters of the Semi-Allied Nations

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 13

    Cassandra Belle stands stiffly in front of a table full of over a dozen Class A magicians. With each of the Class A magicians representing the different nation amongst the semi-alliance. One built more on the promise of not interfering with each other rather than genuinely aiding each other.

    ¡°If even you say the immortal magician is real then it must be true¡­¡± the Warrior General in charge of the Republic of Arcania¡¯s military while their Chairman is fighting the other Class S magicians for supremacy mutters while rubbing his thick beard. Meanwhile the other Class A magicians of the war council all look down at the table in thought.

    But something tells Cassandra that they¡¯re all just plotting about how they can personally kidnap and experiment on the man she met on the battlefield. The immortal, Undying Magician, Nathan.

    If she¡¯s being honest with herself, if her battle with Nathan hadn¡¯t been seen by thousands of people serving Natra, she would¡¯ve just kept his existence secret from the higher ups.

    That wasn¡¯t possible though. Not with the fanatics of Natra seeing the battle, and not with the Undying Magician¡¯s own lack of interest in stopping the fight.

    All keeping it from them would¡¯ve done was lower her own trust in their eyes after they figured out the truth themselves. Which would¡¯ve caused her problems in the end.

    The Warrior General raises his head and declares, ¡°I believe we should mark this ¡®Undying Magician¡¯ off as a Class A level threat, even if he is only a Class B magician.¡±

    ¡°Agreed,¡± the current Class A king serving as the figurehead for the Collective Kingdoms says while nodding his head. ¡°A Class B magician with enhanced strength and speed and the inability to die is worth at least that much.¡±

    ¡°But is he really immortal?¡± one of the council representatives from Entaria asks with a frown on her face. ¡°For all we know he could simply have an incredible regeneration spell activated.¡±

    The intelligence officer of the White Kingdom shakes her head at the council representative as she answers, ¡°Unlikely. I¡¯ve gotten reports of a vampire traveling from one battlefield to another that seems completely unkillable. Even when you erase them from existence entirely, they simply reappear before putting on more clothes and armor.¡±

    A very light blush spreads across Cassandra¡¯s face as she remembers seeing Nathan naked after that very thing happened to him during his fight with the Class B magicians. But she quickly shakes that thought out of her head since he¡¯s the enemy. No matter how curious and nice she may find him.The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.

    ¡°What I find more questionable is why the vampire has equipment from the Republic,¡± the intelligence officer states while staring straight at the Warrior General. ¡°Care to explain that Warrior General Haax?¡±

    ¡°What?¡± ¡°From the Republic?¡± ¡°Why haven¡¯t I heard about this before?¡±

    Everyone in the room turns to stare at the Warrior General, making the man in question frown at them.

    Even Cassandra finds herself looking at him out of curiosity. Because she knows the equipment Nathan was using was from the Republic. Specifically the Arcadian Metal swords.

    And she¡¯s sure he had two of them, despite his only using one of them during the battle.

    One doesn¡¯t simply obtain two Arcadian Metal swords. Especially not in the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    The Warrior General just shrugs and says, ¡°I don¡¯t know where he obtained them either. Very few people in the Republic even have the ability to purchase them, so if you want to ask someone, go ask the forgers of the Arcadian Metal.¡±

    That answer just pisses the other Class A magicians off, seeing as they all know they¡¯ll never be given a chance to ask. Which also leads several of them to ¨C based on the looks they¡¯re sending the Warrior General that Cassandra can see ¨C begin suspecting the Republic of working with the kingdoms to stall for their leader in hopes of the Chairman¡¯s victory over the other Class S magicians.

    ¡°Enough about the vampire,¡± the Soul General of the Republic of Arcania declares, bringing everyone¡¯s attention to him. ¡°Send two Class A magicians to capture him and bring him back here. We can then decide on who can take him from there.¡±

    ¡°Impossible.¡± ¡°Not happening.¡± ¡°Do you think we¡¯re stupid?¡±

    ¡°If only two Class A magicians hunt him down, do you really think we¡¯ll just trust that they¡¯ll bring him back here instead of taking the spoils for themselves?¡± the intelligence officer of the White Kingdom asks while looking at the Soul General with disdain on her face. ¡°I propose we all send one Class A magician to act as a force against this ¡®Undying Magician¡¯ and take him back here to let every nation experiment on him together. They will also be able to prove whether he is truly immortal or not during their overwhelming attempt to capture him.¡±

    Cassandra holds herself back from grimacing as the other Class A magicians all vote to accept the proposal. Because it means Nathan won¡¯t be in a very promising position soon.

    And while a part of her wonders why she¡¯s so worried about him, another part knows she doesn¡¯t want him to just end up captured and turned into a labrat for these people.

    She lightly grits her teeth even as the Class A magicians of the council ¨C a council she isn¡¯t a part of despite being a Class A magician herself ¨C all move on to the next topic. Which is to discuss who will take over the territory whose nobles managed to defeat the attacking forces. Deciding who will attack in their stead and claim the territory afterwards.

    Eventually the council is dismissed, leaving her standing in the chamber alone with her fist clenched at her side.

    Fuuuck¡­ this isn¡¯t going to turn out well.

    After several seconds she unclenches her fist before finally leaving the chamber herself while deciding to ask for some time off from Juan. The Class S magician of Natra.

    Which won¡¯t be a pleasant conversation.

 B4 | Chapter 16

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 15

    Okay, almost there¡­ or not.

    I frown as the flight spell ends up exploding again as I try to fly amidst a bunch of enemy soldiers. Accidentally blowing them up in the process of my seven hundred and fifteenth test¡¯s failure.

    Well, damn. This isn¡¯t working out as I had hoped.

    What am I missing? Every time I tweak the code it lengthens how long I can last before the air around me explodes instead of just plain expanding, but it always ends up exploding anyways. Within a minute at that.

    I frown as I land face first on the ground, only to climb to my feet and wipe off the dust while casually pulling on my next outfit from the storage device.

    It¡¯s a good thing I had Claire pack me a couple thousand changes of clothes. Although if anyone were to see what I have in my storage device they may end up wondering if I have some sort of clothes obsession.

    Not my fault that they barely ever last an hour at the most each. And even less than that when experimenting.

    Because there¡¯s no way I¡¯m going to go streaking around a battlefield.

    I may have gotten numbed to the whole ¡®ending up naked in a battle¡¯ thing since I don¡¯t have much of a choice with the enemies destroying my clothes while also destroying me, but I still have modesty.

    I have enough of it that I made a spell to cover my waist with miasma when naked so that no one can see anything important.

    That¡¯s beyond the point though.

    Just what¡¯s wrong with this-

    My mind blanks out right after hearing an explosion. Then I find myself reforming again from nothing before I grumble about having just put on my next outfit.

    I put on another one before glancing over at the damned Class A magician who blasted both me and the hundred or so soldiers around me ¨C their own included ¨C to nothing. Leaving a rather large and barren chunk of land behind.

    It only takes a moment for my frown to turn into irritation though at the sight of several other Class A magicians appearing around the first.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.

    Okay then¡­ there are seven Class A magicians here.

    Why are there seven Class A magicians here?

    Probably to capture me.

    But since when did these guys work together? I can see their shoulder insignias and tell they¡¯re all higher ups from every nation facing us.

    So why are they working together?

    I glance between them before eventually turning to look at the fire magician from Natra that blasted me in the first place. Albeit a different magician than Cassandra.

    Which makes sense considering Natra¡¯s Class S magician is a fire affinity magician. So they specialize in fire magic knowledge.

    On that note, I think I just found my next target for study. Assuming I can get out of this without them capturing me.

    Also, should I even be surprised that this guy blasted their own soldiers and doesn¡¯t even seem to care? All he seems to be is excited that I¡¯m still alive. Which is creepy in and of itself.

    ¡°Undying Magician, please lay down your arms and surrender,¡± one of the Class A magicians shouts, clearly using magic to enhance his voice¡¯s volume. Meanwhile all of the soldiers near us run the hell away.

    I frown at him, only for a thought to come to mind. A possible plan that I can do with all of these people gathered here.

    Then I try hard to keep a smile from stretching across my face as I create a small dome of miasma around me to cut off the sight and sound from the outside. Following which I open up my terminal and send a mass message out to the neighboring nobles. Informing them about the seven Class A magicians trying to capture me.

    And just as I expected, I get an almost instant reply telling me that reinforcements are on the way.

    Fortunately for us, those reinforcements seem to include the three Class As of the Kingdom of the Fallen ¨C two of the Class Bs close to Class A advanced to Class A during this war.

    It only takes seconds for the small dome around me to shatter before I hear the Class A magician over there repeating himself once more while saying something about it being my last warning.

    But I don¡¯t really care so long as it stalls.

    For the first time since meeting these annoying nobles, I¡¯m happy to have them here. Because there is one thing I am absolutely certain about with them.

    Well, two things.

    One, they want an opportunity to ambush the Class A magicians of the opposing nations rather badly to weaken their greatest advantage over us. And attacking them while they¡¯re exhausted using their magic in an attempt to capture me is a good idea.

    But more importantly, those damned nobles would never be satisfied letting someone else capture me other than themselves. It¡¯s like it¡¯s built into their fucking DNA.

    And while there are a couple good nobles amongst them that just plain want to help me, I¡¯m pretty sure that¡¯s what¡¯s motivating the rest of them.

    I¡¯m sure a lot of these nobles are still confident they¡¯ll somehow be able to capture me after this war is over.

    But if they believe I¡¯m captured by the enemies, they may lose that confidence.

    Overall, it¡¯s a rather convenient shield.

    The corner of my lips quirk upwards as the Class A magicians all ready themselves to attack. With some of them raising guns and the others their own Arcadian Swords.

    I glance at the terminal to see the time they determined for the ambush based on how long it¡¯ll take for them all to get here. Which is in about an hour. Then I turn to focus on the Class A magicians again.

    Right.

    I just have to stall these magicians for an hour.

    That shouldn¡¯t be too difficult.

    Hopefully.

 B4 | Chapter 17

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 15

    I take the last seconds of their little warning to observe the enemy magicians. To look at their mana, their emblems, and their weapons. And it doesn¡¯t take me long to peg which one is from what nation and what affinities they have.

    Amongst the Class A magicians, there are two of them from the Republic of Arcania, and one of them from each of the other nations. Meanwhile the ones from the Republic are a nature affinity magician and a poison affinity magician.

    Then there¡¯s the Class A magician from the Kingdom of Hardlight, who is an enhancement affinity magician. Who could be a problem for me since it counters my naturally higher physical capabilities as a vampire at least a little bit.

    The Class A magician from the White Kingdom is a wind affinity magician just like their Class S magician leader.

    Following the White Kingdom, the Class A magicians from both the Collective Kingdoms and Entaria are dark affinity magicians. Which makes sense for Entaria, seeing as Entaria¡¯s Class S magician is a dark affinity magician, but not really for the Collective Kingdoms, whose Class S magicians are a poison affinity magician and an enhancement affinity one.

    Then again, there¡¯s no hard rule saying that the Class A magicians of a nation have to follow their Class S magicians.

    Other than their affinities, all of the magicians have two weapons on them. One being a blade of some kind and the other a ranged weapon. The usual setup back in the Republic from what I learned.

    The Republic magicians have rifles, but neither of them are using them since they¡¯re so close up right now. The Hardlight magician has a bow and arrow, which is probably one of the few ranged weapons an enhancement magician can use. And the White Kingdom magician has a simple assault rifle on him.

    Meanwhile the last three, the Collective Kingdoms, Entaria, and Natra, all have the same type of weapon. With their weapons being regular pistols.

    Two of them actually.

    ¡°You¡¯ve already had your last warning, now we will be bringing you in by force,¡± the Natran Class A magician declares before raising his hand and making dozens of spell circles appear around himself. All of which immediately summon forth large meteors that fly straight at me.If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.

    And the soldiers outside of the crater they made before that haven¡¯t managed to flee just yet.

    Rest in peace to those soldiers.

    My mind blanks when the meteors all strike, slamming into the ground all around me and incinerating me in an instant. With me not even bothering to make any sort of barrier to defend against it.

    Once I reform again, I don¡¯t even get the chance to put on any clothes before the next Class A magician bombards me with their own attack. This one being the poison affinity magician who sends a massive wave of poisonous gas. And while I at first wonder what their plan is, I quickly come to understand it when the poison reaches me.

    And melts me alive, proving to be acidic in nature.

    After that, the Class A magicians all take turns blasting me into oblivion or just plain trying to kill me the moment I reform again afterwards. With the dark affinity magicians creating undead that eat me alive, the enhancement affinity magician ripping my head off with his bare hands, and so on.

    But after they ¡®kill¡¯ me over three dozen times, they begin to do it back to back without even giving me the chance to look at them. And I keep letting them.

    Because this is probably the best way to waste their mana and stall them.

    At least, I let them until I hear a quick message from Incendia telling me that two of them are preparing some sort of large-scale spell to capture me while the others keep me from returning alive. Then I finally send out a wave of miasma the next time my body and mind are restored. And Incendia does the same while attacking the Class A magicians from behind, surprising them since I had her fly away when they started bombarding me.

    Thanks to these little surprises, I manage to make it out of under the two massive spell circles I can finally see appearing high in the sky.

    I narrow my eyes at the Class A magicians, only to find them all stopping their attacks all at once. No doubt deciding to change tactics.

    Now that they¡¯re no longer bombarding me, I finally take the time to look at our surroundings.

    And more specifically, at the completely destroyed shores around us that don¡¯t have a single living soul on them. Including their own soldiers.

    Everyone and everything has been blasted to oblivion.

    I turn a frown towards the Class A magicians.

    It¡¯s really disgusting how easily they slaughter their own forces. Although I get the feeling only a few of them are responsible for that particular part.

    Specifically the fire magician from Natra.

    I glance at my terminal to see how long it¡¯s been since this battle started. And what I find leaves me feeling¡­ a little surprised.

    Because it¡¯s been over forty minutes since the start of the battle.

    Just¡­ how long did they spend beating me up like a punching bag? Did they just expect me to become unable to recover or something after enough hits?

    My eyes widen as I look at the expressions on their faces. Expressions that look impressed and excited. Almost like they just proved a theory or something.

    They were testing me after all. Trying to see if my immortality has a limit or something.

    And now they know that they can¡¯t kill me no matter what.

    Actually, they probably realized it when they started that other big spell. Whatever it was supposed to do.

    As for why they stopped attacking¡­ was it because they realized they¡¯re just wasting mana?

    In that case, it¡¯s time to see what they try next.

    Just eighteen more minutes left.

 B4 | Chapter 18

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 15

    I warily watch the Class A magicians as they all begin to fan out around me, slowly forming a large circle with me at the center. But I make especially sure to always keep the enhancement magician in my sights, along with the wind magician. Because those two are the ones who can move by far the fastest out of all the others.

    In doing that though I find myself surprised by the fact that the enhancement magician actually doesn¡¯t join the others in the encirclement. Instead he steps behind them all, making me narrow my eyes as I begin to suspect that he¡¯s just going to enhance whatever spell they¡¯re planning on casting together.

    ¡®I feel it¡¯s a bad idea to let them cast whatever they¡¯re about to cast,¡¯ Incendia¡¯s voice echoes in my head, making me nod in agreement.

    Then I use one of my first spells of this entire battle to send a pyre of flames bursting out from beneath me as I jump dozens of meters into the air. Startling all of the Class A magicians with my sudden movement.

    Which was one of the reasons I haven¡¯t been fighting back or trying to move far away, other than breaking out of their previous attacks and spells.

    To get them used to my limited movements, and to save up on mana for the battle while they¡¯re all wasting their significantly larger mana pools.

    Of course, they don¡¯t just sit there and let me pass them. All of the magicians begin sending attacks my way while setting up a massive wall all around us that I just barely don¡¯t make it over. And they do still begin working on a massive spell that appears in the form of an enormous spell circle covering the entire expanse of the area within the walls they made.

    But the spell¡¯s formation feels slower than it should normally be, so my distraction is working. Even if it¡¯s only the nature affinity magician that I¡¯m distracting, seeing as they¡¯re the one building the wall.

    I narrow my eyes at the spell circle beneath me as I land back on the ground. And I can sense all of their mana within the circle.

    When the spell actually begins though, I feel a chill run down my spine for the first time in my life.This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.

    It doesn¡¯t feel like the spell is dangerous, but it does feel like it¡¯ll be a major problem for me.

    I raise my hand towards the closest of the Class A magicians ¨C the wind affinity magician ¨C but when I try to activate a fire spell, the fire is instead absorbed by the spell circle below me. Making my eyes widen in shock.

    Shit.

    Meanwhile a large barrier made out of wind appears above the walls blocking anyone from escaping through the top. Over the walls made out of trees and roots enhanced by the nature magician.

    After finding my fire magic countered, I move on to using my death magic. But when I try that, nature mana comes from the spell circle below and tries to interfere with my death mana spell circles. Making it incredibly difficult to actually form a death magic spell through them.

    I grit my teeth and push through anyways. Because unlike the fire affinity magician who can counter my fire mana with his own, nature mana isn¡¯t even the opposite of death mana.

    That would be life mana.

    And there isn¡¯t a single living mage with life mana right now.

    On top of that, they aren¡¯t countering me with the same element either. So they can¡¯t completely counter me.

    So I enhance my body with as much death mana as possible, which serves to drastically increase the hunger in my body even if that increase repeatedly gets reset back to the default by my body. Then I turn into a blur and appear right in front of the nature affinity magician as the spell circle beneath us begins to spin and grow larger. No doubt nearing completion.

    And before the nature affinity magician can even respond, I grab their neck, raise them into the air, and tear out their throat. Shocking the other Class A magicians before the wall around us begins to crumble. Letting me out of the encirclement right on time.

    Because just seconds later, a dark fog completely covers the area above the circle. One filled with dark mana that for some reason makes me feel like it could affect the death mana coursing through my body.

    That it could suppress my body¡¯s vampiric side somehow in conjunction with the poison mana in it.

    On top of that, there is also fire mana in it that seems to be drawing in any fire mana around it, and I¡¯m sure there would be nature mana too trying to counter death mana.

    I narrow my eyes as I watch it run its course from outside of the encirclement, ignoring the glares of the six remaining Class A magicians as I do so.

    This spell was set up to suppress my vampiric strength, remove my use of fire magic within it, suppress my death magic, and bind me in place. All so that I wouldn¡¯t be able to move a muscle and wouldn¡¯t be able to ¡®kill¡¯ myself or break out of it using my magic.

    And I get the feeling it would¡¯ve worked.

    Which in and of itself is terrifying.

    I glance up at the sky to find Incendia having already left the spell¡¯s range as well. So I look back at the Class A magicians who are all moving around the spell to face me again.

    Well, whatever.

    Their spell failed in the end because I killed the magician handling the wall. The one forcing me to stay in the range of the spell.

    And now it¡¯s just six Class A magicians.

    With a total of twelve minutes remaining on the clock.

    Let¡¯s see if I can¡¯t kill off another of these Class A magicians before my backup arrives.

 B4 | Chapter 19

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 15

    None of the Class A magicians look too pleased with my actions. Especially the poison affinity magician from the Republic, seeing as the Class A magician I killed was also from the Republic.

    Which is all to be expected. Seeing as I did just kill a one in a million magician.

    Only a couple magicians ever reach Class A every year within the entire continent at most. So losing even a single one is a rather brutal blow to any nation.

    The fire magician shouts something that the enhancement magician responds to by enhancing his body and speeding forwards straight at me. Following which I counter his sword with my own blades that I draw in an instant. Then we repeatedly clash over and over again as the other magicians begin casting another big spell.

    Except that this time around I don¡¯t feel anything from it.

    No sense of danger like I got from the last one.

    They¡¯re also not ignoring Incendia either as the fire magician is making sure to send his own attacks at her. And while she is blocking them, she doesn¡¯t really have to.

    She¡¯s a bird practically made out of death flames after all. So fire magic won¡¯t really do much for her.

    I get the feeling she¡¯s just pretending like they do so as to get him to focus on her and not me. What with how he was draining my fire mana before.

    And that works quite well for me as I toss both of my swords up into the air before jumping up with my hands pointed downwards and activating a quick Tier IV spell to blast away everything beneath me. Then I grab both of my blades the instant before the blast hits me and sends me flying into the air.

    Far away from the spell they were forming.

    The enhancement magician quickly enhances his body and jumps straight through the air after me, landing right as his blades clash against my own. All while glaring at me rather hatefully, yet with a sharp grin on his face at the same time.

    Which is odd to see, if I¡¯m being honest. Almost like he¡¯s both hateful of me and excited about what capturing me can mean.

    He should probably make up his mind.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    I frown a little when he cuts me in half, clearly showing off better skills with the sword than me. But I just continue parrying his attacks as my lower body and upper body reconnect to each other.

    Of course, he does it numerous times, cutting my body apart over and over again. And only one thought comes to mind as I repeatedly parry or take his blows while avoiding the others who keep trying to prepare large-scale spells to capture me and keep failing.

    The thought that I¡¯m glad I don¡¯t have to change clothes just from his slicing and dicing me up.

    Or at least not as often.

    Also the thought that this guy must get off on cutting people open, considering the fact that he¡¯s not really doing anything besides making it hard to focus on my own spells.

    It isn¡¯t until a few seconds later that I realize he¡¯s been herding me. Pushing me off towards a single cape that is currently surrounded by a bunch of ships.

    Ships filled with thousands of magician soldiers.

    All of whom have spell circles around them and activating.

    Oh. So they¡¯re playing a numbers game now?

    Maybe I really did scare them by killing one of them¡­

    A second later I find the place growing very bright as numerous large spell circles appear. Both from the Class A magicians and the other magicians on the ships.

    But amidst all of that, I find myself glancing once at my terminal to check the time. At which point a faint smile spreads across my face.

    Both because of what I see left of the countdown, and the fact that I can smell the nobles getting close.

    They wasted too much of their precious time slicing me and dicing me just to herd me here.

    I focus on the six Class A magicians as their spell circles begin to glow. Clearly activating. Then darkness immediately sweeps over the cove, followed by a wave of flames, poison, and wind. Only for a rush of thousands upon thousands of other spells to all crash into the darkness along with it all.

    But I quickly find everything fading from my mind before even a tiny number of the attacks hit me. Because my body is completely erased almost instantaneously.

    And when I come to?

    I find myself sitting on the cove once again without any clothes as I blink at the sight of four of the six Class A magicians majorly wounded and fighting with the Class A magicians of the Kingdom of the Fallen. Meanwhile only two of them continue to focus on me.

    Oh, and the ships behind me are destroyed.

    I purse my lips for a second and tilt my head.

    Okay, I¡¯m a little disappointed.

    Just what the heck happened? I wanted to see their ambush myself, but instead I¡¯m delegated to punching bag and only return to consciousness after the ambush already happened?

    Also, they were supposed to be killed.

    Why aren¡¯t they killed?

    Amongst the magicians, the enhancement affinity magician is missing both of his arms and is running around like crazy dodging attacks from Class B magician nobles. Meanwhile the dark affinity magicians are both missing an arm and a leg and are hobbling around everywhere while still throwing spells to fight against two of the Class A magicians.

    Lastly the wind affinity Class A magician is literally flying around without any legs while fighting the third of the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s Class A magicians.

    Leaving the fire Class A magician and the poison Class A magician to continue facing me while Class B magician¡¯s spells bombard them from the other nobles.

    Seriously.

    What happened while I was unconscious?

 B4 | Chapter 20

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 15

    Regardless of what happened, I go ahead and quickly don some clothes before grabbing both of my swords and clenching my fists a little around the grips. Because the battle is now going in the opposite direction of where it was going up until now.

    There are only two Class A magicians left amongst the enemies that aren¡¯t heavily injured.

    And two Class A magicians who are both low on mana shouldn¡¯t be a problem.

    Especially not when they¡¯re being bombarded by spells from other Class B magicians on top of it all.

    A faint grin stretches across my face, and I fold both of my arms across my chest with my blades still in my hands before swiping them both in the direction of the two Class A magicians. All while various spell circles appear around the blades, making arcs of black flames leap straight at the two magicians.

    The two magicians put up more barriers to block my strike, but their barriers are a lot weaker now than they were at the start of our little battle. So while I don¡¯t shatter them with my arcs of death flames, I do crack them. And thanks to that, I shatter them with the next arcs of death flames I send at them.

    Both of them appear to be in shock considering their wide-eyed stare before they jump back and send a massive wave of their individual powers at the Class B magicians attacking them. Startling the Class B magicians with their sudden assault and even killing a couple of the nobles who weren¡¯t prepared. With one of them having half of their body burnt to cinders and the other visibly shriveling up from poison.

    Yet despite the sight of two of my ¡®allies¡¯ dying, I can¡¯t help but smile.

    Because those are some of the nobles who were always talking shit about me.

    Good riddance.

    The other Class B magicians look between the Class A magicians and me before setting up numerous barriers around themselves and continuing their assault on the Class A magicians. And I immediately take advantage of the Class A magicians¡¯ distraction to rush straight at them with superhuman speed before swinging both of my blades ¨C each of which are coated in death flames ¨C right at the main barrier surrounding the poison affinity magician¡¯s body.

    Just as I expected, the poison affinity magician¡¯s eyes widen in shock when my blades pierce straight through his barrier and then into his body. Cutting him in half from the waist down as my blades pass through his entire body.If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.

    Then ¨C because I need the boost in strength ¨C I reach for his top half and drag it towards me as I sink my fangs into his neck and begin drinking his blood. Making the black veins on my face spread more while the crimson glow of my eyes brightens even more amidst the morning light.

    I turn to face the Class A fire affinity magician with a grin on my face and blood covering my mouth. And I¡¯m sure I make quite a sight. Especially considering that the sun seems to be rising behind me.

    The Class A fire magician grits his teeth and looks around him, only to find the other Class A magicians all finally falling. With a couple of them even attempting to flee ¨C the wind magician included ¨C only for them to be slaughtered by the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s Class A magicians in their attempt.

    And by the end of it, only one of the other Class A magicians besides the fire magician survives, and even that¡¯s only because he surrendered.

    The Class A fire magician finally turns to look at me again with his hand quivering a little bit around his blade¡¯s handle.

    But after a few seconds he finally lets out a sigh and drops his blade, shouting out, ¡°I surrender to the Undying Magician!¡±

    My grin grows far wider than it¡¯s been in ages. Then I raise one of my blades into the air in a victory pose.

    At this point, I am drenched in blood all over, and am even standing in a large puddle of blood that¡¯s formed from the lower half of the poison affinity magician that I killed before it fell to the ground at my feet. Meanwhile the ships remain smoking and destroyed all around the cove as the sun rises behind me.

    But despite this all, I can¡¯t help but feel thrilled at the idea of having a Class A fire magician as a prisoner.

    The number of spells I¡¯m going to be able to squeeze out of this asshole makes me excited for the next days to come.

    I glance at the other magicians of the Kingdom of the Fallen, only to find them all keeping a wary eye on me. Probably because I fought off seven Class A magicians and am still victorious in the end. Even if it¡¯s only because of their help.

    Meanwhile the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s nobles only have three Class A magicians, two of whom are newly advanced.

    Which leaves it rather obvious to even the densest of arrogant magicians that the nobles can¡¯t fucking touch me.

    Yes.

    This is the best outcome.

    And to top it all off, the figure I¡¯m sure I¡¯m imposing on them with my appearance is most likely frightening them off of trying anything else against me. Especially now that I see the exact casualties they took during this ambush operations.

    Which amount to several Class B magician nobles. Many of whom are the more arrogant ones based off of my memories of them.

    I lower my blades before stabbing both of them into the ground right in front of me and declaring, ¡°As Crown Prince of the Kingdom of the Fallen, I declare this battle a victory for the Kingdom!¡±

    It takes a second, but the other nobles all raise a fist and roar their acceptance of that decree.

    All while the eyes of the Class A fire magician go wide at my declaration of being the prince.

    I turn around to look at the sunset as the bright sun fully reveals the devastation caused by this whole affair.

    But by the end of it, I¡¯d say I came out on top.

    And the other nations have lost seven Class A magicians.

    I raise a brow in amusement as I wonder just how those generals of theirs will respond to this.

 B4 | Chapter 21

    The Joint Military Headquarters of the Semi-Allied Nations

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 16

    ¡°As Crown Prince of the Kingdom of the Fallen, I declare this battle a victory for the Kingdom!¡± a deep and sinister voice echoes throughout the headquarters¡¯ main war council chamber from the holographic recording playing about the massive table at the center of the chamber. Meanwhile a man with glowing crimson eyes and pitch black veins stretching from said eyes stands with the rising sun behind his back.

    But the Class A magicians in the chamber focus more on the arcadian metal swords pierced into the ground in front of him, along with the corpses of the Class A magicians they sent to capture him. Completely ignoring the fleet of destroyed ships behind him.

    Several seconds pass in silence before shouts begin to fill the chamber from numerous angry magicians.

    ¡°Those bastards were defeated by a single fucking vampire?! Preposterous!!!¡± ¡°They¡¯re all dead?! They lost!?¡± ¡°How?! How did this happen?!¡± ¡°How the fucking hell could seven Class A magicians fail to capture a single Class B vampire magician!? And they all died on top of it!¡±

    All of the generals and other war council leaders within the chamber continues to shout abuse at the others with very few exceptions. And before long, one of the council leaders even leaves the council after getting permission from their Class S magician.

    From the Chairman.

    Officially making the Republic of Arcania leave the alliance due to the loss of two of their Class A magicians.

    But not before the three Class A magicians from the republic send a brief coordinated attack against the other Class A magicians, wounding several of them in the process. Even if the three of them leave without killing anyone.

    Meanwhile the remaining members of the council all turn their collective anger towards the nation of Natra.

    The one nation amongst the alliance that had their Class A magician survive the battle and surrender.

    ¡°Explain yourself, Fire Lord,¡± the intelligence officer of the White Kingdom declares with a scowl on his face. One that¡¯s reflected in the gazes of the other Class A magician leaders.

    The Fire Lord ¨C the acting ruler over all of Natra in Juan¡¯s stead ¨C glares back at him with a look of superiority on his face as he answers, ¡°What needs explaining? We were defeated, once again proving the superiority of fire magic over the other affinities. We underestimated the vampire and his fire magic and have faced a setback for it.¡±The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.

    His words instantly antagonize all of the other magicians within the room, even though there isn¡¯t a single magician amongst them who didn¡¯t expect his response.

    Because everyone knows of Natra¡¯s fire superiority complex. All because of their Class S magician, Juan Sequani. The known most dangerous strategic class magician in the entire continent.

    In a one on one battle, he would lose to the most powerful magicians of a couple of the other nations. Such as Adalwolf Giese and the Chairman of the Republic. But everyone knows that he is the most dangerous magician in the entire continent when it comes to one thing.

    Nation-scale destruction.

    ¡°You weren¡¯t holding back to help the vampire in any way, were you?¡± the intelligence officer asks with his eyes narrowed, only for the Natran Fire Lord to send a wave of flames outwards from himself in response. ¡°It was your subordinate who first clashed with this vampiric magician, was it not?¡±

    The Fire Lord stares at the intelligence officer for a few seconds, then turns his gaze to look at the other country leaders in the chamber.

    Then he realizes that whether he¡¯s to blame or not, they all plan on turning it on him. Simply out of spite for him not having any permanent losses so long as he can retrieve his general from the vampire.

    The Fire Lord sends a message about the situation to Juan before getting a response that doesn¡¯t surprise him in the least.

    So he follows his orders and stands up from his throne before raising a single hand.

    All of the other Class A magicians immediately put up barriers to protect themselves as a massive explosion rings out from the center of the chamber. Destroying absolutely everything inside of it and blowing up a third of the military headquarters.

    ¡°If you would like a scapegoat, we will give you one,¡± the Fire Lord declares without even trying to hide the disgust in his voice as he looks at the other magicians. Even though he knows he would do the same in their situation. ¡°Natra will officially be seceding from this alliance.¡±

    Then the Fire Lord vanishes in a plume of flames, leaving the other Class A magician leaders to face each other. With the number of nations within their alliance having quickly changed from six to four with a single battle.

    Silence fills the chamber for several seconds before the Class A figurehead king of the Collective Kingdoms asks within the destroyed chamber, ¡°How will we deal with the vampire from here on out?¡±

    No one answers for a little while as the Class A magicians look at each other. Meanwhile the soldiers of the headquarters all rush around trying to figure out why a third of their headquarters was blown up, only to find the Natran and Republic¡¯s forces having already left the facility.

    ¡°We consult with the Class S magicians,¡± one of the attending Entarian council representatives eventually answers, making the other war council participants nod their heads in agreement.

    Because none of them want responsibility for their nations losing any more Class A magicians.

    They will all already be in enough trouble as it is with their nations over this after all.

    ¡°Then it¡¯s agreed,¡± the intelligence officer of the White Kingdom declares. ¡°We will leave the matter of the Undying Magician, Crown Prince of the Kingdom of the Fallen, to the Class S magicians and focus on the matter of the Republic and Natra¡¯s betrayal.¡±

    All Class A magicians present give a response in the positive to his words, marking the end of the subject within the war council.

 B4 | Chapter 22

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 20

    Aaaand that about does it.

    A smile stretches across my face as I look over the spell script one last time for my flight spell. Then I glance at the Class A fire magician who is bound with his hands behind his back and a mana restraining collar around his neck, at which point I find him nodding his head.

    And without any hesitation, I go ahead and activate the spell, making the air all around me condense at a rapid pace while heating up. All before I begin to float up into the air.

    I hold back my excitement as I begin to fly around the little lab I¡¯ve been using for the past few days in the skeleton¡¯s undead treant. The place all of the nobles decided to keep the Class A fire magician for our own purposes.

    A shared place that all of us are allowed to visit. Or at least, are allowed to visit now that the skeleton gave the other nobles his permission.

    They weren¡¯t allowed to before.

    The nobles even ¡®graciously¡¯ decided to give me time off as a way to show goodwill to me after I netted them seven Class A magicians. Six of which were killed and one captured.

    And on top of that, because of it all, the alliance made by the enemies has fractured. With Natra and the Republic both breaking away.

    Apparently the Natran magician I¡¯ve been using as a knowledge bank has been rather talkative to the others as well. Mostly because the alliance betrayed Natra, so he wants to hurt the alliance just as much as we do now. Even if we¡¯re still enemies ourselves.

    Not that I¡¯ve paid all that much attention to it all. I¡¯ve just been buried in my research since the battle, practically draining the fire magician dry of his non-specialty spells.

    I would¡¯ve drained him of more spells, but he begins to clam up when it comes to his personally created spells. The ones he spent years working on.

    Which is a pity.

    I have hundreds of other non-specialty spells to keep my mind occupied right now though, so I¡¯ll leave him be on those specialty ones for now.

    While I¡¯ve been doing this, the other nobles have also been doing their own thing with the captured Class A magician. Most of which is intel gathering from him, whether on the main continent itself or on the nations¡¯ attack plans on us.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.

    Some of them have just been exchanging magical pointers with him. And by exchanging, I mostly mean one way, with the Class A magician from Natra teaching them bits and pieces here and there.

    Not many bits and pieces though.

    Nowhere near as much as he¡¯s helping me.

    Probably because of Natra¡¯s feeling of superiority towards the fire affinity. Which benefits me seeing as I have the fire affinity.

    I glance back at the Class A magician again with a faint smile on my face as I float back down to land on the ground again while canceling the spell. Then I nod my head at him and begin leaving my lab for the first time in a little while.

    Without hesitation, I make my way over towards the place where my parents are sealed away. Because the skeleton started letting me see them, even if he won¡¯t free them still.

    Simply because he is happy with how much I¡¯ve done to prove my position as his successor. That and probably because there¡¯s no reason not to let me see them.

    All in all, I feel incredibly annoyed by the skeleton. Regardless of the good things he¡¯s done for me. Like freeing my parents from the doctor, and teaching me about death magic.

    Either way though, being able to talk to Mom and Dad from time to time has been very nice. It¡¯s also let me relax a little bit for the first time in ages.

    Unfortunately for me, I find myself interrupted when I reach the floor my parents are on by Duke Elmwood.

    ¡°Your Highness, a matter has come up that has called for a council meeting,¡± he says as he walks down the stairs to the same floor I just walked up the stairs to.

    I frown at him, but before I can say anything, he continues speaking and says something rather shocking, ¡°The Class S magician from Natra has requested an alliance with the Kingdom of the Fallen until we handle the nations of the alliance.¡±

    That leaves me rather stumped. Because it¡¯s absolutely nothing like what I¡¯d ever expect of that old man. At least, not from what I¡¯ve heard on the news back when I was in the Republic.

    ¡°His only condition for the talks is that you and His Majesty be present for them,¡± the duke continues, making my eyes narrow a little.

    ¡°Do you know why?¡± I ask while crossing my arms, all thoughts of going to visit my parents right now fading away due to the importance of this matter.

    The duke meets my gaze for a few seconds before answering, ¡°He said that he wishes to see the ¡®Immortal Fire Magician who managed to best his Class A magicians¡¯. But if I had to guess, he is most likely trying to recruit you.¡±

    I blink at that.

    ¡°Recruit me?¡± I ask while tilting my head. ¡°That doesn¡¯t sound like the Juan Sequani that I¡¯ve heard about.¡±

    A frown crests the duke¡¯s face as he looks down a little and says, ¡°The supreme ruler of the nation of Natra looks down on all who are not fire magicians or Natrans. But if you are one of those two, then he will view you as a human being.¡±

    Huh. I knew he was supremist in regards to fire magicians being the best in his eyes, but I didn¡¯t know it went that far¡­

    Well, whatever.

    The skeleton will be there too, so I shouldn¡¯t have to worry much. Especially since Juan is a fire magician.

    And there aren¡¯t any fire teleportation spells in existence. So I won¡¯t have to worry about him trying to capture me or something.

    Not to mention that the Kingdom of the Fallen really does need an ally in this war.

    Even if the alliance is bound to break by the end of the war.

    ¡°I¡¯ll go,¡± I tell him with a nod of my head.

    ¡°Good,¡± the duke says with a nod of his own. ¡°The meeting will be held three days from now at noon, and it will be located at the warfront with the Natran military.¡±

    Good.

    Now I can test out some of my new spells.

 B4 | Chapter 23

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 23

    ¡°You¡¯ve done well, young successor,¡± the skeleton says as he stares at me the moment I enter the meeting pavilion set up at the center of what was no doubt just recently a battlefield. And the moment he speaks, all of the gathered nobles of the Kingdom of the Fallen stiffen up and go silent. ¡°You have earned your position in the eyes of all now. You are truly the Crown Prince of the kingdom.¡±

    His words seem to grate on the nerves of all the gathered nobles, but not a single one of them dares to say a word in defiance of that. Whether it¡¯s because they actually agree or because they¡¯re too afraid of the king to say anything.

    Either way, despite my personal grudges with the skeleton, his words are a benefit to me right now. Because it means the nobles should stop going after me.

    At least for now.

    Who knows if they¡¯ll be stupid enough to try something later on.

    I don¡¯t bother giving the skeleton a real answer to his words though, instead just nodding my head at him in response.

    After all, I¡¯m still pissed as hell at him.

    He doesn¡¯t seem to take any offense to it. In fact, the way he nods back makes me feel like he expected my response.

    I ignore that to focus on a sudden blaze of flames that appears out of nowhere in the middle of the pavilion. Following which the blaze turns into a person. An elderly one at that.

    The man the flames turn into is the very one I¡¯ve seen on the news many times back when I was in the Republic.

    He is wearing a fiery red tuxedo jacket over a black dress shirt with a red tie that matches the jacket in color, along with red pants as well. And he has short completely gray hair neatly combed back on his head as he looks around the pavilion with bright fiery red eyes that look like they may burst into flames at any moment. Albeit with the red of his eyes being a very different shade from the crimson in my own eyes.

    I narrow my eyes ever so slightly at the man. Juan Sequani. The supreme ruler of the nation of Natra and only Class S fire magician on the continent.

    And when his own eyes meet mine, they narrow as well. Only for the slightest hint of a smile to stretch across his lips.You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.

    An oddly warm one for some reason.

    I frown in confusion.

    The nation of Natra has always been a very bizarre nation amongst the many nations of the continent. Both because of the superiority complex that the nation¡¯s ruler and only Class S magician has, but also with the nation¡¯s origins.

    Considering how Natra¡¯s leader practically appeared overnight.

    No one knows of his real origins, and the nation itself was made by Juan Sequani himself.

    A lot of people actually believe he¡¯s from a different continent. Which I wouldn¡¯t be all that surprised about.

    And the man in front of me is extremely supremist of his own nation and fire magicians to his very core.

    So why would he smile and look at me with familiarity? Just because I¡¯m a fire magician?

    Doubtful.

    When his gaze turns to the other nobles here, however, it turns into a blazing inferno.

    Literally. His eyes begin shooting out flames as he glares at them.

    ¡°Why are these insects here?¡± he asks while turning his gaze towards the skeleton. ¡°I believe I only asked for your presence and the respectful Undying Magician¡¯s presence, did I not?¡±

    Respectful¡­ Undying Magician?

    Now I¡¯m even more confused.

    The skeleton doesn¡¯t bat an eye ¨C not that he could seeing as he has no eyes ¨C at the man¡¯s rather aggressive words as he says, ¡°They will stay silent and out of the way. Their only reason for being here is to observe my son¡¯s first negotiation as crown prince.¡±

    And if the Natran leader¡¯s words didn¡¯t piss off the nobles enough, the king¡¯s words make them far livider than anything I¡¯ve ever done to them.

    A sight that I absolutely love to see.

    To my surprise, Juan actually calms down at the skeleton¡¯s words. Then he begins completely ignoring the nobles as he states, ¡°Very well. If it will help the respectful Undying Magician, I will allow it.¡±

    I once again feel my surprise growing at his words.

    Just what is with this guy, and why isn¡¯t he making any sense to me?

    He¡¯s breaking everything I knew about him in my head with each of his words.

    Or almost everything, considering how he¡¯s treating the other nobles. Which is matching what I was expecting.

    Except for the fire magicians amongst the nobles, who he is treating just as coldly as the others.

    I frown a little at him and the skeleton. A skeleton that doesn¡¯t appear surprised at all about his treatment of me.

    ¡°Let¡¯s keep this short and simple, sparkler brat,¡± the skeleton says, immediately setting off Juan¡¯s fury once more with his words. ¡°I don¡¯t think you want to waste time here when we both know how this discussion will end.¡±

    Juan glares at him with those literally flaming eyes again before the flames die down and he turns to look at me as he says, ¡°Very well, walking corpse. I will get straight to the point.¡± A smile stretches across his face while he begins walking over towards me, only stopping when he makes it one meter in front of me. Then he asks with the warmth of a grandfather, ¡°Respectful Undying Magician, as the foremost fire affinity magician within the entire continent of Arion and the continent of the fallen, I hereby request that you may allow me to take you on as my student in the art of fire magic.¡±

    My immediately jaw drops open in shock.

    His what?!

 B4 | Chapter 24

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 23

    I open my mouth to respond, almost instinctively rejecting his offer. But then a thought comes to mind.

    The guy is a complete supremist asshole, sure. And he has done some rather atrocious things in his life as well.

    None of that means that I can¡¯t accept his offer though. Then turn around and betray him afterwards if need be.

    First thing¡¯s first though.

    ¡°Would you tell me why you request this?¡± I ask with a slight frown as the nobles all around us look between me and the two Class S magicians with pure shock and some terror on their faces. Probably because if I accept then I¡¯ll have a second Class S backer. And this backer won¡¯t give a shit about interfering with their politics like the skeleton does.

    Meaning Juan could easily incinerate them without a care if he wanted to.

    Actually, he could probably nuke half of the continent the Kingdom of the Fallen is on if he wanted to.

    As for why the leader of Natra wants to take me on as a student, a few possibilities come to mind¡­

    ¡°Fire magic is supreme, and my people and I wish to take it as far as possible,¡± Juan says without breaking eye contact with me. Then he simply asks, ¡°What better way to advance fire magic than to teach an immortal everything I know about it?¡±

    ¡­and that is not one of the possibilities I had thought of.

    Huh.

    Well then.

    I glance at the skeleton, only for the skeleton to begin speaking to me through telepathy, saying, ¡°Accept his offer if you wish to advance your fire magic. He truly has no ill intentions for you, because his greatest desire is to see fire magic advanced beyond any other magic in existence. And training an immortal fire magician will reach that goal for him.¡±

    My eyes narrow ever so slightly.

    ¡°And what are your conditions?¡± I ask while holding myself back from frowning.

    Juan doesn¡¯t break eye contact as he answers, ¡°I am the one requesting you to become my student. There are no conditions.¡± He pauses for a second before adding, ¡°I will assist you when you need my protection and free you should you ever get captured by other magicians for your undying body. All I wish is to pass on my knowledge to an immortal so that you may one day advance fire magic as a whole.¡±If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.

    I stare at him for several seconds before eventually letting out a sigh.

    This guy really isn¡¯t anything like what I was expecting. Or at least, not towards me.

    He¡¯s almost exactly what I was expecting when it comes to those nobles around us and the skeleton.

    ¡°Very well, I accept,¡± I tell the man with a nod of my head.

    And his reaction is absolutely not what I was expecting.

    Juan Sequani breaks out into a wide smile and places his hand on my head and the other on my shoulder as he practically barks out, ¡°Thank you, child! You will not regret this decision as I¡¯m sure you will be able to advance fire magic far beyond any other magic in existence!¡±

    I feel myself blanking out at the physical contact, not to mention his patting my head like some grandkid.

    But to be honest, that really does look like how he seems to view me now. As if I were his grandson or something.

    The man is the oldest living ¨C emphasis on living, seeing as the skeleton is dead ¨C Class S magician in the two continents. What with him being 72 years old, if I remember correctly from the news. So I¡¯m absolutely sure his help would be extremely beneficial. Especially considering my lack of any sort of fire magic teacher.

    Other than the fire magicians on the battlefield that I¡¯m stealing knowledge from.

    Actually, he may be older than 72 years old now. Considering how long I¡¯ve been in the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    It¡¯s possible he could be 73 now.

    Either way, he¡¯s old for a magician.

    And since the magicians of the various nations have managed to extend the human lifespan a little bit for magicians, he could theoretically live for another twenty-something years. Maybe thirty-something. And I¡¯m sure he¡¯s had the treatment to extend his life. Even if he doesn¡¯t look it outwardly.

    It¡¯s mostly just that magicians almost never die of old age.

    Then again, from what I¡¯ve heard, the treatment isn¡¯t exactly a pleasant one.

    It¡¯ll pretty much kill off any bad cells in their body through poison magic, enhance the good cells, and do everything it can to perfect the human body. But this is only able to extend their life a little bit, and only once.

    After that they¡¯re stuck dying when they die. And they don¡¯t visibly revert in age or anything.

    They even end up even more shriveled and in pain and discomfort than before as they continue aging past their previous limit.

    To my surprise, when I look up at Juan¡¯s eyes again, I find him looking at the nobles with a fiery glare on his face. A glare that fades when he sees me looking at him, following which he warmly smiles at me.

    Wow. This guy really does see me as some sort of golden goose to improve fire magic, doesn¡¯t he?

    That¡¯s¡­ not what I¡¯m used to.

    ¡°Please don¡¯t kill the other nobles,¡± I ask Juan, feeling a bit more confident about the fact that I probably won¡¯t piss him off with my words. ¡°They¡¯re needed for the war.¡±

    He meets my eyes, then glances at the nobles, then nods his head. And without letting either me or Juan say anything else, the skeleton asks, ¡°The agreement?¡±

    Juan glances at him while finally taking his hand off my head before answering, ¡°I will aid you in the fight against the other Class S magicians. I will also send Natran forces to assist the Kingdom of the Fallen. You have my word.¡±

    Officially marking the birth of our own alliance.

 B4 | Q&A

    As stated in last chapter''s author note, this post is a Q&A post. Which is something I started doing for a lot of my other stories but never got around to for Undying Magician or Winter Wolf.

    So here it is.The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.

    Go ahead and ask me anything about The Undying Magician and I will most likely answer it, with a few exceptions. With one of the biggest exceptions being that I will not answer questions that are already answered somewhere in the story.

    Whether I answer it today or in the next few days though will depend on when I see it. So keep that in mind.

 B4 | Chapter 25

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 25

    Two days later

    ¡°That¡¯s better,¡± Juan says as he watches my firestorm spell wash over the army of Collective Kingdom knights. ¡°The efficiency has significantly improved. And while it could still be better, it is no longer a waste of a spell anymore.¡±

    I feel a faint hint of pride fill me at his words as I watch the large storm made up of flames tear its way through the knights and other soldiers coming this way from the ships. All of whom are readying to clash with the soldiers from the noble forces on the plains next to the beach.

    Ever since Juan took over my training in fire magic, the nobles have shut the hell up and avoided me entirely. And if they can¡¯t avoid me, they listen to every word I say like it¡¯s law. Which I find to be a very pleasant change from before.

    As for the enemies? I¡¯m only seeing their response now, since I¡¯ve been going through fire magic lessons with Juan ever since meeting with him. So I haven¡¯t been in any combat, and news is only making it to the other nations now about it.

    After all, Juan has been locked in training me and hasn¡¯t bothered with fighting the other Class S magicians anymore. Almost like it¡¯s his one priority from now on. Training the ultimate fire magician.

    But he isn¡¯t too strict with his training either. He is strict with his bottom lines on things, sure, but he patiently waits for me to reach those bottom lines and doesn¡¯t get upset.

    So overall he has actually been a rather good teacher.

    Even if he¡¯s burned a few nobles to a crisp when he saw them glancing at me the wrong way. Specifically with some malicious intent in their eyes that they probably never would have acted on.

    I pretended I didn¡¯t see that when it happened.

    Anyways, in the time he¡¯s been training me, I¡¯ve improved a lot of my current fire spells and created numerous other fire spells including a few he passed on to me personally. And on top of that, I also increased my understanding of fire mana itself. Which makes my body more resistant to heat in general, but that doesn¡¯t really matter considering my immortality.

    What does matter is that it increases the power of my fire magic spells. The power of my fire mana.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.

    ¡°Next I want you to use a fire pit spell on the frontline of the approaching forces,¡± Juan says with his arms crossed. ¡°After that I¡¯ll use my own to show you the difference.¡±

    I nod my head and raise both hands before taking a deep breath and starting to cast the spell. Making several glowing red spell circles appear all around me, following which they rush over to the ground beneath the frontlines of the enemy forces.

    And in seconds, they begin to shoot out dozens of fire lances straight into the ground, piercing deep in the process. Then more lances shoot out from the sides of the lances in the ground, connecting the lances in a massive circle.

    I feel my mana draining close to empty as the spell finishes off by blasting out powerful flames all in the center of the circle, quickly burning away all the ground and some above it to make a massive pit with a diameter of thirty meters filled with flames and burning corpses.

    Exhaustion fills me after the spell finishes draining my mana, but the flames continue for several seconds afterwards. With the enemy soldiers all backing away and activating more defenses. Specifically defenses against Tier IV spells like that one, which cost a lot more to keep going. Hence why they weren¡¯t up that soon.

    Because most Tier IV spells have a rather limited scope in how far they can be activated from.

    And they obviously weren¡¯t expecting someone to be as close as we are, since we¡¯re on a floating platform high above the battlefield.

    Thanks to my latest attack though, the enemies are finally beginning to notice us. Because while the fire storm spell was very ambiguous in terms of its source, this spell was not.

    ¡°It¡¯s bad,¡± Juan says, making me grit my teeth a little as I clearly understand what he means. ¡°Watch my fire pit spell and learn to improve your own.¡±

    He steps forward before narrowing his eyes a little. Then thousands of fire lances shoot into the ground and the process repeats itself. Except with far more fire lances than mine had by a massive number.

    And just like mine, flames blast out into a circle around the enemy forces.

    But unlike mine, Juan¡¯s circle spans their entire army. Including every last soldier and magician.

    Turning the entire beach into a burning pit from hell.

    All without a single spell circle throughout the process, proving that Juan is, indeed, a Class S magician. Both in power and skill.

    Juan¡¯s spell was far faster, larger, and more destructive than my own. Outclassing me in nearly every way possible.

    The only way I could one-up him in that is if I were to use death flames.

    But he¡¯s been rather against me using death flames. At least during his lessons. Since it tarnishes the purity of fire magic according to him.

    So I¡¯ll just leave the death flames for when he¡¯s not around and we aren¡¯t having lessons.

    Anyways, even without any spell circles to study, I can tell quite a few things about the spell that are different from my own. So I immediately begin taking notes.

    Whether it¡¯s about the sheer number of fire spears he launched, the speed at which they replicated to form the circle, or where the flames shot out from.

    I mark down every last detail while the Class S magician watches me.

    And while the noble¡¯s army and ships from the Collective Kingdoms down below are silent as the grave.

 B4 | Chapter 26

    Somewhere high above the Shores of the Kingdom of the Fallen

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 29

    Juan Sequani flies through the air while expanding the air around him as he approaches the meeting point decided upon by the Class S magicians. No matter how little interest he has in attending the meeting.

    If it were up to him, he would just continue teaching his new student until he can¡¯t teach him anything else. After all, his new student is the absolute perfect student he could ever ask for.

    Nathan Fox does not need to eat, nor does he need to sleep. He can¡¯t die. He doesn¡¯t age. He uses fire magic with an at least above average talent level. Even if Juan would prefer his talent to be a bit higher.

    His student doesn¡¯t have any interest in romance or hooking up with girls like many boys his age, and he puts everything he has into his magic studies.

    He is talented at programming and is incredibly driven to grow stronger.

    But he couldn¡¯t stay. Not when the walking pile of rotten bones kept interrupting his training in his attempts to drag him to the meeting.

    And it was either to continue letting him pointlessly interrupt, or just go to the meeting to get him to stop interrupting future lessons.

    That filthy creature will meet its end some day if it¡¯s the last thing I do¡­

    Juan constantly glares as he flies through the air before finally arriving at the meeting spot, where he finds the target of his anger already flying at next to an air ship. A more recent invention of the Republic that uses magic to power itself without any electricity or gas. And the ship of which the magicians attending their meeting that can¡¯t fly are currently standing at the edge of.

    ¡°You¡¯ve finally arrived, hot headed toad,¡± the filthy bag of bones says with smugness clear in his tone, making Juan want to incinerate him instantly. But he holds himself back to at least give the other Class S magicians a semblance of unity between himself and the skeleton.

    The Class S fire magician¡¯s eyes narrow a little bit as he feels incredibly thankful that his student also dislikes the skeleton. Because he doesn¡¯t know how he¡¯d handle it if his student liked the man, regardless of the official adoption the skeleton forced on him.

    After a few seconds, Juan finally calms down and turns his fiery gaze onto the other Class S magicians currently here. Along with a couple others that are currently arriving.

    Amongst the ones currently here, Juan sees Afvalder von Schr?der, Edgar Brodnax, Violet Fox, and Leopold Houk. But Katherine Nash and Emma Sonnen are both currently arriving as well. Which leaves only two Class S magicians set to arrive for the meeting not present.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.

    Leodmir Archeron and the Chairman of the Republic of Arcania.

    Two of the three biggest instigators of the entire war.

    Juan narrows his eyes at the other magicians as his irritation at being there increases a bit with their absence. Because the other magicians here aren¡¯t even worth looking at in his eyes.

    At least the doctor, Chairman, and bag of bones all have rare special magic affinities. The other magicians here aren¡¯t on the same level at all.

    Because rarer and more powerful special magic affinities are the only affinities that can even come close to matching fire magic. Just as the people from his homeland taught.

    Just as his father, the last Emperor before his brother took the throne, taught.

    Although the bare minimum respect he had for the doctor disappeared the moment he heard about what the man has done to his student over the years.

    While Juan is waiting for the last two Class S magicians to arrive, he ignores the other Class S magicians to send a message to his homeland. One notifying them of his student¡¯s existence. And telling them to take him in should Juan ever pass away.

    Then, almost as if planned, the moment he finishes sending the message out, the two magicians arrive. With the doctor arriving simply through teleporting and appearing in a purple flash of light, and the Chairman flying through the sky with his body coated in black and crimson anti-magic mana. No doubt manipulating the mana itself to move his body around as a carrier.

    And the moment they arrive, both of them turn towards the bag of bones and Juan as the Chairman asks, ¡°Why did you team up?¡± Meanwhile the doctor stays silent and simply glares at them. No doubt perfectly aware of why they teamed up.

    ¡°Why would that be any of your business?¡± Juan asks without even looking at the other Class S magicians who are clearly looking back at him with that same question in their eyes.

    Artorius Hunter narrows his eyes before asking, ¡°This wouldn¡¯t have anything to do with this supposedly immortal magician I¡¯ve been hearing about, would it?¡±

    Juan notices the corner of the doctor¡¯s lips twitching ever so slightly at that question, clearly implying he doesn¡¯t wish for the other Class S magicians to learn about Juan¡¯s new student. Which doesn¡¯t surprise Juan in the least.

    Most magicians of the two continents would leap at the chance to obtain immortality through any means necessary. Whether moral means or not.

    This is the continent that was originally created through several settlers made up of criminals exiled from the main continents after all. Even if that was centuries ago.

    Juan himself is the only non-criminal to come to the continent and set up a nation of his own. Just so that he could keep an eye on the continent and report to his brother about new events.

    The Class S fire magician notices the increased interest in the other Class S magicians at the mention of Nathan¡¯s immortality. So he immediately says, ¡°The idea of an immortal is ludicrous at best outside of the use of death magic. All the reports I¡¯ve been told imply this supposed immortal magician is nothing more than a death magic magician being trained by Adalwolf.¡± He turns his attention to the bag of bones, hiding his grimace at having to actually refer to the skeleton by name. ¡°Right, Adalwolf?¡±

    Despite the skeleton not having any sort of face, Juan can feel the smugness radiating from him as the bag of bones answers, ¡°That is correct. I have taken in and begun training a new death magic user who I have named the crown prince of the Kingdom of the Fallen.¡±

    The Chairman looks between the two for a few seconds with his eyes narrowed before eventually stating, ¡°Very well. But mark my word, I will get to the bottom of your alliance.¡±

    And after that, the meeting finally begins, leaving the Class S magicians to add a few new rules to this war game of theirs.

    All while Juan simply wishes to go back to training his student.

 B4 | Chapter 27

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 1 | Day 30

    And that makes one more spell.

    A faint smile stretches across my face as I watch the geyser of molten lava shoot up from the ground beneath the enemy soldiers¡¯ feet.

    The spell in question was the first spell Juan has been teaching me to utilize lava. Or rather, to create it by applying just enough flames and heat to rocks to turn them into lava without just incinerating them entirely. And then to utilize said magma by having an explosive force shooting it in a single direction.

    Magma special class magicians are a major threat on the battlefield, but fire magicians can do some of what they do simply through the use of fire mana. Which is the entire point of this lesson.

    To teach me that you don¡¯t have to have a special affinity of magic to do what those special affinities can do sometimes.

    Of course, that won¡¯t work with, say, space magic or something. After all, I can¡¯t alter space to teleport me with fire magic.

    It¡¯s just not going to work.

    But I can use fire magic to damage and forcibly alter the earth at a much less efficient pace to do that same thing some earth magic does. Or use fire magic to create lava or magma and fire it off like a cannon like magma special class magicians can do.

    On another note, I glance up at the enemy magicians who have been bombarding me with lightning spells for a while now with more than a little irritation. Because the lightning tickles, and it¡¯s getting very annoying.

    So I do what any reasonable person would do and blast them with death flames, making them run the hell away if they aren¡¯t killed immediately by them.

    Then I return my focus to the new spell I made. Which Juan calls lava pillar.

    The spell seems to work, but it needs a few more tests to make sure it doesn¡¯t have any unseen problems with it.

    After all, surprises in a battle thanks to a faulty spell are some of the largest reasons for fatalities amongst magicians. Ignoring stupidity and arrogance, which are the top reason for fatalities.

    On another note, Juan mentioned a couple things to me during our training that shocked the hell out of me. Even more so because he mentioned them as if they weren¡¯t important or shocking at all.Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    Like the fact that apparently our entire continent was designated by the rest of the world as nothing more than a trash heap to send criminals centuries ago. And that apparently magicians aren¡¯t complete selfish assholes on the other continents like they are here.

    It makes sense though if everyone on our continent is descendant from criminals.

    Every last person.

    Especially if our nations were made by said criminals.

    Although his revelation that he came from the other continents to look in on ours isn¡¯t as shocking. Since that is the general consensus amongst the people anyways.

    At least, his coming to our continent from another is. Not the ¡®looking in on our continent¡¯ part.

    Anyways, those revelations at least make me less disappointed in humanity. So there¡¯s that.

    ¡°What did I say about using death flames?¡± I suddenly hear Juan¡¯s voice, which sends a chill down my spine due to his exact words.

    Well, shit.

    I turn around to look at him as I answer, ¡°You said not to use it until my fire magic is ahead of my death magic.¡±

    Juan nods his head while floating down from the sky and ignoring the fleeing army beneath us that seems terrified of the man. And for good reason.

    ¡°And is your fire magic ahead of your death magic yet?¡± Juan asks with his eyes narrowed a little.

    I simply shake my head.

    Thanks to all the lessons I¡¯ve gotten from the skeleton over the course of multiple months, my understanding of death magic is quite a bit ahead of my understanding of fire magic. Even with Juan¡¯s instruction over the past week or so.

    Honestly, I¡¯m more surprised by the fact that he¡¯s planning on letting me use death magic at all instead of trying to limit me to just fire magic than anything. Since I was honestly expecting him to try banning me from using death magic at all.

    ¡°I¡¯m letting you use death magic once your fire magic surpasses it only because a magician must use all available means of strength they possess,¡± Juan says, clearly reading my thoughts on my face or something. Which is still unnerving how he does that. ¡°The next time I catch you using death magic before your fire magic has surpassed it, I will be throwing you into a pit to personally experience fire magic and force your understanding to catch up quickly. Since you want to use death magic so much.¡±

    ¡°Understood,¡± I state with a nod of my head.

    Although I can¡¯t help but feel a tiny bit curious about this exercise he just mentioned. Because it sounds like a good way to train.

    The man blinks in surprise at the sight of me not at all frightened by the idea of that training exercise. But he quickly recovers as he turn to look at the lava on the battlefield and says, ¡°It looks like you¡¯ve finished the fundamentals of the spell.¡±

    I turn to look at it as well as I say, ¡°I still need to test the spell to find any faults in it, but it is acceptable enough to be used away from allies.¡±

    He glances at me before nodding and looking at the battlefield again.

    I, of course, say away from allies because the spell could backfire and do things that aren¡¯t expected. So it could hurt my allies.

    Neither of us care about it hurting me though, since I¡¯m immortal.

    So it¡¯s fine to use it when I don¡¯t have any allies nearby. And I¡¯m not trying to make it target a single individual.

    ¡°The next lesson is to focus on your understanding of mana itself,¡± Juan says while turning to look at me with his eyes narrowed a little. ¡°I am going to begin teaching you the fundamentals of controlling mana without mana circles.¡±

    Oh.

    A smile stretches across my face.

    This¡¯ll be good.

 B4 | Chapter 28

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 3

    Or not.

    I feel bored out of my mind as I repeat the exercise given to me by Juan over and over again. One time after another. For hours on end. Even entire days in fact.

    To the point that I¡¯m not even allowed to leave my lab or fight on the battlefields anymore.

    Which kind of exposed the whole ¡®contracts don¡¯t affect me¡¯ thing to the other nobles. But they¡¯re all too afraid of Juan to do anything to me. So that¡¯s fine.

    What isn¡¯t fine is Juan¡¯s specific training method.

    It¡¯s one that takes full advantage of my immortality while also not at the same time.

    I¡¯m stuck trying to force mana out of my body without a spell circle but in a way that won¡¯t harm my body. And if I do end up setting myself ablaze, I have to stop and restart entirely. But if I manage to get the fire mana out of my body without losing control of it, he just has me slowly bring it back inside of myself.

    Which I¡¯ve never managed to do without setting myself on fire again.

    So I¡¯ve just been sitting here in my lab setting myself on fire over and over and over again for entire days now. All while wearing fireproof clothes. Since that¡¯s better than sitting in my lab naked for days doing this.

    The point of the exercise is to get my control over my own fire mana at an all-time high. To perfect it to the point that I never lose even the tiniest amount of mana from within my grasp.

    And after I¡¯m able to do the entire exercise multiple times without any slipups, Juan wants me to create numerous spell circles of my own making before copying exactly what my most basic spells do in the spell circles.

    Without the scripts.

    With one formally crafted spell circle with scripts running on one side of me and one made by my own mana manipulation without scripts on the other to compare the two.

    Then the third stage of the training comes after I manage to copy a spell without the script. Which involves me doing it without the setup of a spell circle at all. Simply through controlling the mana.

    As for when I¡¯ll actually reach the third stage?Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.

    Probably not for a very long time.

    And I mean a very long time.

    Considering how I can¡¯t even get halfway through the first stage without burning my body from the inside out. I can¡¯t even get the mana to leave my body in a way that¡¯s different from how I do it with my spell circles. Which is instinctive and done through repeatedly using that trainer device to teach a user to make spell circles that I did when I was first becoming a magician.

    And even that is specialized just to make spell circles. So there are several things a Class S magician manipulating their mana wouldn¡¯t do that someone does for those spell circles.

    I let out a sigh when I fail another attempt.

    This is both annoying and boring. And what¡¯s worse is the fact that Juan isn¡¯t even here to give me tips. He just straight up told me to work on this, said something about time being the only teacher for learning mana manipulation without a spell circle, and went off to fight in the war. Since he¡¯s still technically expected to do that in our agreement.

    And if I had to guess, he feels doing it this way by leaving me to work on mana manipulation is a way to teach me even without being here to do it personally. Which is annoying but probably not wrong.

    I sigh again before focusing on my mana manipulation. Trying to go through it as carefully as I possibly can. But even with that, it takes me another week to make any sort of progress at all.

    That progress being at least getting my mana through my muscles and the rest of my flesh to the little magical membrane that runs along my skin.

    Getting my mana through that, however, is proving to be impossible. Without blowing it up, that is. Since that happens a lot.

    And has left my clothes rather damaged numerous times even with their fireproof nature.

    Because explosions are more than just flames.

    Right when I¡¯m about to give up for the day to take a break though, a certain Class S magician walks through the entrance of my lab with a satisfied look on his face.

    ¡°Good,¡± Juan says with a nod of his head. ¡°You¡¯ve reached the crucial point of the first stage. Things will get a lot easier after this.¡±

    I blink at that before narrowing my eyes a little in my skepticism.

    ¡°Child, know that most magicians aiming to master mana manipulation never reach the progress you have achieved until they are at least fifty-five years of age,¡± Juan says, startling me with this little revelation. And boosting my pride a little bit. ¡°Because even one mistake while practicing can end up with them dying a gruesome death or becoming crippled for life. And there are no simulations that can perfectly imitate direct mana manipulation.¡±

    Oh. So there¡¯s no way for a magician to safely and securely train to master their mana manipulation.

    Which explains why there are so few Class S magicians around.

    If someone wants to become one, they have to fully master mana manipulation without a spell circle. And if they make even the tiniest of errors while trying to do so, they could die or lose a limb.

    Yet just looking at how many times it¡¯s taken me to get this far alone¡­ imagining having to do that without making any mistakes is honestly a little frightening.

    ¡°Now I expect you to clear this next hurdle within a year, understood?¡± Juan says, shocking me again. Enough that I find myself gaping at him. ¡°Good. While you practice this step, I expect you to continue your experimentation on the battlefield starting tomorrow.¡±

    I continue gaping at the man even as he leave my lab, closing the door behind him.

    Within¡­ a year?

    That¡¯s going to be difficult.

 B4 | Intermission 2

    Back in the Republic owned Territory

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 24

    ¡°Is everyone here?¡± Amelia asks with a grim look on her face. One that is mirrored on Cyria¡¯s face but not on the others. Not on the faces of those who don¡¯t know the purpose of the meeting.

    When she sees everyone in the room nod, including Aidan, Sofia, Cyria, Rebecca, and Nathan¡¯s old teachers, Leonidas de Ashford and Dawn Suess, she continues, ¡°Then let¡¯s begin.¡±

    And without wasting a second, she presses the button on the remote for the projector. Making a screen appear at the front of the room showing dozens of pictures taken from the frontlines on the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    Amelia¡¯s eyes narrow a little at the sight of the pictures despite her having seen them before. And she¡¯s not the only one who reacts to them, as the others in the room all show their own reactions as well.

    Aidan, Sofia, Cyria, and Rebecca all display shock clearly on their faces at the sight of the man in the pictures. Meanwhile the two instructors both show barely visible relief. But no surprise.

    Amelia marks that down to ask them about later.

    For now she says, ¡°These pictures were all taken over the past couple months on the frontlines of the Continental War in various locations across the Kingdom of the Fallen. And they have all been verified to prove legitimacy.¡±

    Everyone just continues staring at the pictures.

    The pictures of a man with dark brown hair, glowing crimson eyes, black veins running across his face from his eyes, and a face that everyone recognizes. Or at least, they recognize with the exception of the glowing eyes and black veins.

    In the pictures, the man is throwing around spells one after another almost like he¡¯s testing them. All while completely ignoring any attacks other people make against him. With any damage caused by said attacks being regenerated immediately in a way everyone there remembers.

    Just like the ¡®fire regeneration spell¡¯ Nathan Fox was known to use in the academy. Except far stronger than any healing spell any of the people in the room have ever seen.

    ¡°This man, known to each of the nations as the Undying Magician and Crown Prince of the Kingdom of the Fallen, has been going around the battlefields experimenting and training his own mana while fighting,¡± Amelia continues while carefully watching everyone in the room for any unusual reactions. Or to be more specific, carefully watching the two instructors in the room. ¡°He is known to be completely unkillable no matter how much damage is dealt to him. All the way to the point of being able to reform completely after his body was erased by over half a dozen Class A magicians attacking him at once.¡±Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.

    Amelia¡¯s narrowed gaze turns into a glare when she sees the complete lack of surprise on the two instructors¡¯ faces. Confirming that they already knew about this beforehand.

    Whether they knew about him from the news or from before he disappeared, she isn¡¯t sure yet. But they knew about this and didn¡¯t say anything at the very least.

    ¡°W-what¡¯s his name?¡± Aidan asks, making Amelia turn a much softer gaze towards her old friend.

    Amelia takes in a deep breath before slowly answering, ¡°The Undying Magician¡¯s name was confirmed nearly a month ago to be Nathan Fox.¡±

    Gasps come from her friends before silence fills the room. Meanwhile the instructors just share a glance.

    At this point Amelia turns to look at said instructors and asks, ¡°Instructor Leonidas, did you already know about this?¡±

    The man stays silent for a few seconds before eventually answering, ¡°Yes. I knew about it.¡±

    Amelia¡¯s eyes narrow once again as she continues, ¡°Did you know before Nathan ¡®died¡¯?¡±

    Everyone in the room except for Instructor Dawn turns to look at Instructor Leonidas. But Amelia doesn¡¯t care. She just keeps her eyes glued on him without taking them away for even a moment.

    ¡°Yes, I did,¡± Instructor Leonidas finally confirms. ¡°I¡¯ve know about his immortality since he first entered the academy.¡±

    Silence fills the meeting hall.

    But the silence doesn¡¯t last long before Amelia feels her anger growing to a point where she can¡¯t hold herself back anymore. As she casts several dark spells, making the room grow dim as lances of pure darkness form around the instructor.

    All while said instructor ignores the attacks that barely manage to scratch a barrier he had apparently cast since before entering the room.

    He knew what would happen from the moment he came in.

    ¡°The secret was the boy¡¯s and his doctor¡¯s, not my own,¡± Instructor Leo states with a cold look to his eyes. ¡°If you have a problem with it, take it up with the doctor and our own society.¡±

    His words completely deflate Amelia¡¯s anger, meanwhile the others just sit in shock at the news.

    And despite the specific words Instructor Leo said, Amelia almost immediately understands who he means when he says ¡®doctor¡¯.

    She remembers the many times this ¡®doctor¡¯ has been brought up in relation to Nathan back from their old conversations. And the fear he seemed to feel towards the man that she could never understand.

    But now that she knows all of this, there¡¯s only a single face that comes to mind.

    ¡°This doctor you speak of,¡± Amelia says, her voice beginning to tremble a little bit. ¡°Was it Doctor Leodmir Archeron?¡±

    The room grows eerily silent after she speaks the name of the Class S space affinity magician.

    And after a short pause, the instructor nods his head and says, ¡°Yes. He was Nathan¡¯s doctor.¡±

    Amelia clenches her fists at her sides and glares down at the table in front of her. Feeling both sadness that her friend couldn¡¯t confide in her, and anguish at the thought of everything he¡¯s had to deal with on his own.

    And at the thought of how she was happily going through her life without knowing any of it.

    Eventually she raises her head and opens her mouth to speak, only for Aidan to beat her to it as he stares at the instructor and says, ¡°Tell us everything.¡±

    Instructor Leonidas and Instructor Dawn share a glance before nodding. Then Instructor Leonidas turns to them and says, ¡°Very well.¡±

 B4 | Chapter 29

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 25

    I can¡¯t help but grimace as I run through the latest battlefield with my sword in hand cutting enemy soldiers apart while failing miserably at my magic. Doing the newest training method my hellish teacher gave me.

    A method that no one would ever use with a student who isn¡¯t immortal.

    One where he straight up banned me from using any spells at all. From using even a single spell circle.

    And instead ordered me to only use magic through directly manipulating my mana while fighting through a battlefield. Because ¡®if I can¡¯t do it while surrounded by dozens of enemies, it doesn¡¯t matter¡¯. Also, in his words, ¡®you need to practice doing it so much that you can do it in your sleep, and doing it while fighting will train you to do just that¡¯.

    But, of course, I haven¡¯t managed to make a single spell with my mana manipulation alone.

    So¡­ this has led to a lot of discomfort for me. Seeing as I¡¯m running through a battlefield cutting apart enemy magicians and soldiers with my sword while repeatedly setting myself on fire and blowing myself up on accident.

    None of which is fun.

    What¡¯s even worse is that I¡¯m pretty sure the other soldiers, magicians, and even some of the nobles are sending me pitying looks sometimes when I see them. All because of Juan¡¯s training methods, which have been on full display for everyone to see.

    I¡¯ve even seen some pitying looks sent my way from the enemies. When they aren¡¯t running for their lives, being cut down, or trying to capture me.

    Although some of the enemies have resorted to trying to get me to turn traitor against the Kingdom of the Fallen. Which is interesting.

    The Class S magicians seem to be leaving me alone at least. Most likely because of Juan and the skeleton.

    I¡¯m not sure what they told them, but they¡¯re the only ones I can see stopping them from acting.

    On that note, Juan has been around to teach me less and less lately. Although I guess it makes some sense, since the battle between the Class S magicians is heating up. Especially after one of them was taken out of the running in the past few weeks.

    Specifically the dark Class S magician leading the forces of Entaria. Who also happens to be the second newest Class S magician to reach that Class. Other than the Chairman of the Republic, of course.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    Which was exactly how he was killed. He was too arrogant and was captured in a pincer attack between the chairman and the doctor. Who ironically enough weren¡¯t working together at the time.

    The guy just had poor luck.

    And thanks to that, his entire nation is on lockdown with their forces leaving the war.

    As for what will happen with Entaria after the war? According to the agreement, it¡¯ll end up being the property of whoever wins the conflict. But I kind of doubt Entaria will just sit around waiting just because their Class S magician was killed in an accidental pincer attack.

    Not that it¡¯ll matter much to the other nations now that they have no Class S magicians backing them up.

    I let out a sigh as I continue failing miserably at forming any sort of spells. Which my distracted mind is probably not helping.

    If there is one other bright side about the past few weeks, it¡¯s that Juan had a special type of armor forged by his own hand for me. With some help from the skeleton and one other Class S magician who is completely neutral to this current war.

    The Class S nature magician, Leith Allen.

    And this particular set of armor makes it so I don¡¯t have to end up exposing myself to everyone on every battlefield anymore.

    So that¡¯s nice.

    The armor isn¡¯t the greatest in terms of actual defensive prowess, but it is immune to fire damage, death damage ¨C not that death magic actually damaged armor in the first place ¨C and it can repair itself even after complete and utter annihilation of the entire set of armor. And rather quickly too, simply through draining nature mana from the ground through my boots.

    Or, in the case of my boots being annihilated, through any part of the armor. Albeit at a slower pace than the boots.

    And it even has a special charge that it can hold for when the entire set is annihilated.

    As for if that charge runs out and there isn¡¯t any of it left to drain from the ground? It can drain directly from my own mana supply. But only as a last resort, and only with my permission.

    Overall, it¡¯s a wonderful way to stop me from ending up naked in the middle of a battlefield over and over again.

    Because apparently that was bothering Juan and the skeleton quite a bit.

    Probably not as much as it was bothering me though.

    Anyways, I continue trying and failing and trying and failing over and over again to use a spell with direct mana manipulation. But every single attempt ends in failure. Failure without even managing to get my mana past the magical membrane around my skin, much less into the form of a spell.

    At the very least though, I am managing to learn things from a lot of the attempts.

    Even if I¡¯m not learning anything from just cutting apart these soldiers. They¡¯re pretty much meant to be nothing more than distractions while I manipulate my mana. Which makes me feel a little bad for them.

    Or it would, if it weren¡¯t for the fact that they¡¯re here fighting in a war in the first place. And I chose the specific battlefield where the White Kingdom is because they are all obsessed with war and have a choice to fight or not. Unlike the Republic where joining the military is mandatory for magicians.

    So the people I¡¯m killing are all here by choice, and none were forced to-

    My thoughts are interrupted for a few moments when I¡¯m blown up. Although I find it difficult to tell after I reform again whether it was me who blew myself up or some other magician who blew me up.

    Then it¡¯s made clear when I¡¯m blown up again without even doing anything with my mana.

    Rude.

    I rush over and cut the fire magician¡¯s head off before continuing my training.

 B4 | Chapter 30

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 26

    After an entire day of this rather annoying training, I find myself surrounded by a dozen Class A magicians from the alliance. All of whom look rather upset.

    Which makes sense I suppose, considering that I¡¯ve been running around their battlefields slicing apart their soldiers and magicians for over a way now. And on top of that, I¡¯ve accidentally blown several of them up along with myself when my mana control training fails miserably.

    Unsurprisingly, none of the Class A magicians even bother to say hi much less try to convince me to surrender. Simply because they¡¯ve already tried so many times by now that there¡¯s no point in expecting me to suddenly change my mind this time around.

    In response, I go ahead and send a message to Juan telling him about what¡¯s going on. Because I can¡¯t exactly stop these people from capturing me with nothing but mana control ¨C or rather mana control failure ¨C and my blades and guns.

    What is surprising though is the message I get in return from him almost immediately.

    One telling me to go ahead and use that spell on them. The last spell he taught me personally, and the only one he spent quite a bit of time going over to make sure I had it perfect. And he even said that I could go all out and use death magic just for this one battle.

    So without hesitation, I summon undead all around the battlefield using the dead corpses of soldiers and magicians before ordering them to converge on the Class A magicians who are forming a ring around me. Meanwhile the other soldiers and magicians who aren¡¯t dead are pretty much long gone by now. Having retreated to their own sides, most likely on orders from the Class A magicians and the bastard noble in charge of this battlefield.

    After taking care of my distraction, I focus on what exact magicians are amongst the Class A magicians here. Only for a massive dome of poisonous fog to appear all around me. Followed shortly by a larger dome around it made of steel, and numerous other domes within it made of other elements.

    There¡¯s poison, flames, lightning, water, darkness, and the list just goes on and on.

    Both regular affinities and special affinities.

    I frown as my body rapidly begins to deteriorate.

    They¡¯re really going all out right away this time. Which means they at least learned their lesson from the last attempt they made.

    But it¡¯s not enough.

    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.

    Not this time.

    I take in a deep breath before letting it out. Even as metal chains begin to bear down on me, wrapping around my wrists and ankles.

    And even as the poison changes to turn into a sort of drowsiness effect. One I¡¯m certain is meant to knock me unconscious.

    I just ignore it all as my eyes flash open and I begin activating the spell. All while my undead soldiers outside continue attacking the Class A magicians, no doubt making all these spells of their slower and stopping them from casting the more complicated ones.

    But that¡¯s not a problem for me. Not when I ignore every last spell currently affecting me to cast hundreds upon hundreds of glowing, fiery red spell circles.

    The circles continue appearing one after another as I enter script into them at a blindingly fast pace. One far faster than any magician my age should be able to handle.

    So fast that it hurts my brain to do. Even if all the damage to my brain is immediately repaired.

    One spell circle after another. Thousands of circles.

    Enough that it fills the domes I¡¯m in with a bright flaming light to fill in the darkness made by the dome of dark mana.

    And clearly sensing my actions, the magicians outside begin to speed up with the spell they¡¯re starting to cast as well. A massive one no doubt on par with my own.

    But with my undead still attacking them, along with my insane speed at spellcasting, not to mention the fact that most magicians aren¡¯t used to joint casting like they¡¯re doing¡­

    A grin stretches across my face.

    ¡­I finish first.

    With one last line added to the final circle, along with a feed of fire and death mana fed to it ¨C the only spell Juan would let me make using death mana, strictly because it¡¯s for my protection ¨C my spell activates. Immediately causing a massive wave of pitch black flames to burst outwards from me and all the spell circles in a form similar to a solar flare. Blasting all of the domes apart with its force before continuing on to blast the Class A magicians who seem just about ready to finish their own spell.

    Which I find a little surprising, but whatever. I still beat them to it.

    Most of them ditch their spell the moment they sense my attack though, with all of them preparing defenses for themselves.

    But it¡¯s all for naught when my Tier VIII spell ¨C a citywide destruction spell and one of the requirements to reach Class A ¨C blasts into their defenses and incinerates them in seconds. Followed shortly after by the majority of the Class A magicians themselves, with the exception of about a fourth of them who manage to escape by using a spell to flee instead of blocking.

    And it doesn¡¯t stop there, because the spell continues outwards in a massive flare, turning the very ground into a pitch black wasteland all around. With the water of the coast being completely evaporated for several kilometers.

    Whether it¡¯s enemy soldiers, enemy magicians, enemy ships, or even the fortress manned by the noble here, absolutely everything is completely destroyed.

    Turned to naught but pitch black ash.

    I pant in exhaustion before collapsing onto the ground once my spell finally comes to an end, the thing having drained every last drop of my mana in that one attack. Not that it stays like that for more than a second. My physical exhaustion at least. Since that is restored immediately.

    The mana exhaustion stays though, since my mana isn¡¯t affected by my time reversal.

    But even that doesn¡¯t matter.

    Not when I see the completely desolated land all around me.

    And the three Class A magicians who are still flying away with their metaphorical tails between their legs.

    A smile stretches across my face at the sight.

    Good.

    And now with this, I just need to bring my mana arcs to nine hundred and I¡¯ll be considered a Class A magician.

 B4 | Chapter 31

    Within the Alliance Headquarters

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 26

    No one speaks within the headquarters as the Class A magicians leading the current alliance all watch the recording of the Undying Magician¡¯s clash with their own Class A magicians. And how the man managed to wipe out almost an entire force of Class A magicians.

    But the silence doesn¡¯t last forever as the Class A magician currently serving as king of the Collective Kingdoms says, ¡°I am withdrawing from the hunt on the Undying Magician. He has become too much of a threat to handle, and our kingdoms have more important problems to handle right now.¡±

    ¡°We will be staying out of this from here on out as well,¡± the acting ruler of Hardlight states chimes in with his arms crossed.

    The remaining nations all grit their teeth while watching the recording again.

    Their tense atmosphere doesn¡¯t last long though. Not when the ruler of the White Kingdom suddenly gets a call, making the other rulers glare at him.

    Until he answers the call with a short and simple, ¡°Yes, Grand General?¡±

    Telling them all that it is his Class S magician calling him. And in the process making them all stay silent.

    The ruler of the White Kingdom nods his head and says a few more things before ending the call on a simple, ¡°Understood, ma¡¯am.¡±

    Then the call ends and he focuses on the other rulers within the room who are all waiting to hear what he has to say. Or to be more specific, what his Class S magician had to say.

    ¡°The Grand General has declared that she will personally handle the Undying Magician,¡± the man states, shocking those within the room. So much so that it takes them ten entire seconds before the explode into questions.

    ¡°How will she deal with his protectors?!¡± ¡°Will she be able to get the Undead King and the Fire Lord away from him to attack?¡± ¡°What¡¯s her plan for him after capturing him?¡±

    The ruler of the White Kingdom raises a hand to silence them before answering, ¡°I do not know what her plans are. But rest assured that she will handle this problem. So let us move on to more important matters. Like the attention of the other continents currently placed on our war.¡±

    Silence fills the chamber again.

    <hr>

    Within a dark room somewhere off the Continent

    Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 26

    Three people silently watch a recording from the abandoned continents without saying a word until the end of the recording. At which point one of the three finally states, ¡°It looks like he found a worthy successor after all.¡±

    Both of the other two in the room nod their heads in agreement.

    Of the three people, all three of them are Class S magicians. And all three have glowing red eyes, signifying their fire affinity.

    But none of them show even an ounce of greed for the immortality of the magician on the screen.

    ¡°We should keep an eye on him until the end of their conflict,¡± one of the three Class S magicians declares, making the other two nod their heads in agreement.

    ¡°Then we will recruit him,¡± another of the three states, ¡°before any of the other nations get a chance to do so themselves.¡±

    ¡°And if he refuses, an alliance with the abandoned continents may be necessary,¡± the final Class S magician says.

    The three rewatch the video once more. Then they proceed to watch other recordings of the war as a whole going on within the abandoned continents.

    ¡°We may have to take action either way,¡± one of them says after seeing the progress made by the people of the abandoned continents. Progress that is still heading towards their former glory before being sentenced to the continents, but is still not on the level of the other continents.

    <hr>

    On the Edge of an Island looking out in the direction of the Abandoned Continents

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 26

    ¡°Interesting,¡± a man wearing a purple robe says while looking at the Abandoned Continents. ¡°Very interesting.¡±

    The man quietly taps his foot as everything around him looks frozen in place. As if time itself had stopped.

    ¡°To think I could find a potential candidate on those dusty old abandoned continents¡­¡± the man says with his hands held clasped behind his back. ¡°And an unusual one at that.¡±

    ¡°Another candidate?¡± a deep voice echoes around the time-locked continent, following which the head of a massive serpent barely leaves the surface of the water around the island. Then the serpent¡¯s eyes narrow a little in the direction of the abandoned continents. ¡°Indeed¡­ odd.¡±

    Silence passes for several minutes as the two stare off in the direction of the abandoned continents, only for them both to notice one of the Class S magicians of the continents beginning to make her way over towards the unusual one.

    ¡°Will you sssseeketh them out?¡± the serpent asks, its voice turning into an elongated hiss when speaking.

    The man continues watching for several seconds before eventually answering, ¡°I will, but not until he awakens himself. And I will not involve myself in their war.¡±

    Silence once again fills the island frozen in time. With it only being broken by the sound of the serpent dipping its head back under the water again, leaving the man alone on the island.

    But the man¡¯s gaze never leaves the abandoned continents, where the next candidate lies.

    And he knows he isn¡¯t the only one with his eye on them, as he can sense numerous other gazes pointing towards the abandoned continents.

    He watches for several more seconds before eventually raising his hand and making time mana leave it to form a massive dome around the island. Enhancing the time magic around the island once more.

    Meanwhile his voice echoes out from within the island one last time before the island begins to fade from view.

    ¡°The time is not yet right.¡±

 B4 | Chapter 32

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 29

    At this point I¡¯ve made some progress in my mana manipulation training. Not much, but some.

    Enough that I at least have a very vague idea of how to proceed. Even if I haven¡¯t been able to do much of anything with that idea yet.

    On another note, I¡¯ve noticed a distinct lack of higher Class enemy magicians as of late in my training routes. Almost like the enemies are avoiding putting their higher quality officers in areas that I¡¯m currently at.

    Which is amusing if nothing else.

    Then something unexpected happens.

    I get a report through my terminal that two of the enemy Class S magicians have shown themselves on the opposite side of the continent, with another two appearing halfway between there and here on the other end of the continent. All at once.

    So Adalwolf heads towards the two on the other end of the continent while Juan leaves my training here to head to the other two.

    But just half an hour after he leaves, I find a woman suddenly appearing in front of me.

    A woman I recognize from the news.

    Shit.

    Emma Sonnen. The wind affinity Class S magician ruling over the military of the White Kingdom and a known-military fanatic.

    The woman has short gray hair and green eyes, and is wearing a relatively tight military suit of gray armor. Meanwhile she should be in her late sixties if I remember correctly, and she has a rather stern look on her face.

    And more importantly, she shouldn¡¯t even be here. Since she¡¯s one of the ones that was reported to be on the other side of the continent right now.

    Unless¡­ illusion or light magic?

    ¡°Come with me,¡± the Class S magician orders. ¡°Willingly or not.¡±

    She doesn¡¯t bother waiting for an answer as her eyes flare with a gray-green light and the wind all around me suddenly begins to speed up before forming a large cage. One that doesn¡¯t break even when I shoot out death flames at it.

    I quickly send out an SOS to both Adalwolf and Juan, but I know there¡¯s no way they¡¯ll make it here quickly enough.

    Stolen novel; please report.

    The enemy planned this out to capture me. Using the other Class S magicians as a distraction to make Juan and the skeleton too busy to help me while one of their Class S magicians captures me.

    Without hesitation, I use a self-destruct spell to blow myself up along with the cage. Only to find the cage perfectly fine even after I reform.

    ¡°Give it up child, my cage won¡¯t be broken by some minor sparks,¡± Emma states as she begins to bring me along with her inside of the wind cage. But she doesn¡¯t bother to say anything else. Even as I try to attack the cage over and over again with numerous different spells.

    Not a single thing works though. Not even erasing my entire body and trying to reform outside of the cage after the cage has already passed where I was.

    All that does is make her expand the cage before shrinking it again with me at the center.

    All without using even a single spell, making it so I have no idea when or where she¡¯s using her magic.

    I grit my teeth as my desire to learn direct mana manipulation grows ever stronger from this sight.

    Eventually I give up on trying to get out of the cage and instead just watch as we fly over the ocean. But I don¡¯t give up on escaping entirely.

    Not at all.

    In fact, Emma made one massive mistake in her plan.

    I glance off to where I sense Incendia following us with a tracker in her mouth. One that will send my location straight to Juan and Adalwolf.

    So even if they manage to make it back to their lab and begin experimenting on me, it won¡¯t take long for me to be freed by those two.

    The skeleton said before that he would save me only if a Class S magician captured me, which is exactly what happened. And Juan is most likely rather pissed off at the idea of someone interrupting my training.

    It¡¯ll be interesting to see how they react.

    Actually, it may even lead to a rather interesting clash.

    With that in mind, I just wait around as Emma carries me off to some random lab in the White Kingdom. Not even bothering to hide our travels as she carries me over some cities in the process.

    Unfortunately, a wind affinity magician is a lot faster than a fire or death affinity magician. So I probably can¡¯t expect them to arrive too quickly. Especially since they were fighting other Class S magicians at the time.

    If I had to guess, I¡¯ll probably be here for a couple days at least.

    When Emma tries to transfer me to some other holding facility inside of the lab, I don¡¯t just let her do it. Instead I cause quite the number of problems and blow up more than a few areas of the laboratory. One area after another.

    All the way until I am finally sealed up inside of some fancy magi-tech cage that I find rather hard to break out of.

    Although I¡¯m not particularly worried about it. I could probably break out of it if I damaged it enough. After all, it can¡¯t have enough energy to survive a nonstop barrage of attacks over the course of multiple weeks.

    So I turn that into my next form of training. Just trying to break out of the thing while also training my mana manipulation.

    Meanwhile Incendia flies very high over the lab with the tracker on her in order to bring Adalwolf and Juan straight here.

    Alrighty. Time to see how long it takes for me to get out of here.

    And to see if I break out on my own first or if they free me.

    Most likely the latter, considering that I can still see Emma in the laboratory.

    I guess she¡¯s going to join in on the experiments.

    Well, whatever. I doubt the experiments will even bother me now that my pain tolerance is off the charts.

    Time to train while I wait.

 B4 | Chapter 33

    Different places across the World

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 29

    At various times surrounding Nathan¡¯s kidnapping, Class S magicians in four different locations get messages all about the same thing.

    On the northern end of the Kingdom of the Fallen, Juan Sequani grits his teeth when he sees the message about his student¡¯s kidnapping. Then he finds himself forced to defend against attacks from the two Class S magicians in front of him.

    Only for one of the magicians to disappear into thin air, confirming Juan¡¯s suspicion that the magician was an illusion.

    And that the original one was the magician who kidnapped his student.

    Meanwhile on the western end of the Kingdom of the Fallen, Adalwolf Giese just feels irritated at the kidnapping of his forcefully adopted son. He doesn¡¯t feel any worry as he knows nothing can hurt the boy, but he still feels annoyed by the idea of one of the Class S magicians of the mainland interfering with the younger generation.

    But he can¡¯t leave his battle either. Not yet.

    So he continues his own fight against the two Class S magicians in front of him.

    And after over an entire day passes since Nathan¡¯s kidnapping, on one corner of the Republic of Arcania, the Chairman of the council stares at the message on his terminal with his eyes narrowed. Then he rubs his chin and begins to grin before muttering, ¡°Interesting¡­ very interesting.¡±

    After making a few preparations, the Chairman then proceeds to leave the Republic heading in the direction of the laboratory in the White Kingdom. All while the other two Class S magicians are already on their way there, having finally driven off their respective Class S magicians by now.

    Lastly, on a continent far away from the abandoned continents, a group of Class S magicians watch the entire affair on several screens. All while showing interest in seeing how the Class S magicians will clash once they arrive at the lab.

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    And that¡¯s another failure¡­ I wonder just how long it¡¯ll take for me to perfect mana manipulation?

    Actually, a better question would be how long it¡¯ll take to be able to do mana manipulation. Much less perfect it.

    Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    I open my eyes to look at my surroundings ¨C which is, of course, still that little magical cage ¨C to find that I am currently missing my arms and legs. Although they¡¯re also reattaching themselves as I think about them. With the people outside of the cage taking notes.

    That explains why I couldn¡¯t move my mana to my arms and was stuck trying to manipulate it around my chest instead¡­

    After looking for a few seconds, I close my eyes again and continue training.

    Over the course of the last day, these magicians have been going crazy about experimenting on me. But if I¡¯m being honest, I barely notice most of what they¡¯re doing thanks to my incredible pain tolerance.

    In fact, I think I feel worse pain just from wandering around the battlefield.

    As for their experiments? As I expected, none of them have born any fruit whatsoever on making themselves immortal.

    At most they¡¯ve realized that it¡¯s most likely not possible without the same natural mana disaster that happened all those years ago to happen again and somehow interact perfectly with someone again. Without killing them in the process, which is highly likely to happen if someone tried forcing it.

    And that¡¯s assuming they even could try to force it.

    After all, it would take two Class S magicians battling, with one of them being a spatial magician, for it to happen. So they¡¯d have to get the doctor¡¯s permission.

    And there¡¯s no way that would ever happen.

    Not to mention that even if they did get his aide, it wouldn¡¯t amount to much. Since the chance it would result in the exact same accident is practically abysmal.

    Once they realized that, the magicians started thinking about other possibilities to get immortality. With one person even bringing up trying to have someone make a child with me to see if the child would have immortality too.

    That idea was thankfully shot down rather quickly though, mostly because I¡¯m a vampire. And it¡¯s a known fact in society that vampires can¡¯t have children.

    Now whether that actually applies to me or not, I have no idea. But I doubt I¡¯ll ever have kids anyways, so it doesn¡¯t really matter to me.

    Other than that, they also discussed trying to eat my flesh. But none of them wanted to try that just for the infinitely small chance it would actually do something. Seeing as they¡¯re not cannibals.

    Plus they knew the flesh would revert back to my body before they could even bring it to their mouth so there was no point in trying anyways.

    Oh, and there¡¯s the fact that they¡¯re afraid doing it would turn them into vampires too. Which I doubt it would.

    I do find the fact that none of the magicians are willing to enter the cage with me anymore after I burnt several of them to a crisp when they tried amusing.

    Except for the Class S magician, Emma. She¡¯s perfectly fine coming in here to experiment on me since I can¡¯t hurt her no matter how hard I try. Even when I blow myself up.

    When I did that she just waited until I ran out of mana to do her experiments.

    Rather patiently at that.

    I am rather surprised though by the fact that she didn¡¯t even bother to take away my things. She just left them all on me.

    Except my sword, which she did take. But that makes sense.

    For now though, I¡¯m just focusing on my-

    My thoughts cut off and my eyes fly open when I hear a loud explosion. With the first thing that enters my gaze after opening my eyes being the sight of the laboratory around the cage now covered in flames and a distinct lack of a ceiling that was once there.

    Then Juan slowly floats down into the laboratory.

    Nice. He¡¯s finally here.

    Time to go back to the war again.

 B4 | Chapter 34

    The Laboratory

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    Emma Sonnen feels more than a little upset. Both at the Undying Magician, who she went to great lengths to kidnap believing that she¡¯d be able to figure out at least a hint to his immortality in the short time it would take for his protectors to come and save him, and at her own incompetent researchers.

    For not being able to catch a single rat lurking around their laboratory.

    She grits her teeth as she looks up at the true ruler of Natra as he floats over the ruins of her laboratory with his fire magic. Then her gaze turns to the north, where she can see the undead king heading their way as well.

    But what¡¯s worse than that are the other magician she can sense heading their way.

    The Chairman of the Republic.

    All because she had a spy in her midst who reported her actions to him along with news of the Undying Magician¡¯s existence.

    And even worse is that, despite all of this trouble, the only thing she¡¯s learned about the Undying Magician so far is that it is unlikely to be able to take, copy, or remove his immortality in any way. At least with the knowledge she has.

    Which infuriates her to no end.

    In the corner of her eye, she sees Juan briefly turning his gaze in the direction of the Chairman, only to turn it back towards her again a second later. Then he snaps his fingers, making more explosions ring out across the laboratory.

    Destroying every last bit of the place, starting with the cage holding his student.

    How did they even find this lab so quickly?

    Emma¡¯s eyes narrow as she looks around, trying to find how the undead king and fire overlord found the lab so much sooner than she expected they would. Since it should¡¯ve taken them an extra day or more to find where she took him.

    They shouldn¡¯t have come to the lab immediately after dealing with their battle.

    Emma even made sure to check every piece of equipment the Undying Magician had on him when she captured him. But she didn¡¯t find anything that could be used for tracking purposes other than his terminal, which she took and jammed.

    She knows that the Chairman is here due to a traitor, but now she has to wonder if there¡¯s another traitor.

    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    That is, until she notices the black bird of flames flying straight down towards Nathan before landing on his shoulder. At which point her eyes widen in shock.

    Because the bird has a device inside of the black flames that it simply drops onto Nathan¡¯s hands.

    A tracking device.

    How¡­ could I miss such a thing?

    Before she can wonder about it any further, the other Class S magicians all arrive. Starting with the undead king, followed by the Chairman.

    Leading to a faceoff between five Class S magicians in the same place.

    But right as she¡¯s about to open her mouth to speak, ignoring how the Chairman is ignoring her and staring at the Undying Magician, a purple flash of light shines in the area. With the psychopathic doctor appearing an instant later with his own eyes latched onto the Undying Magician as well.

    Another one?!

    At this point she begins to wonder if she needs to clear out her entire staff and replace them just to check for traitors.

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    Well this is unexpected.

    I knew the skeleton and Juan were coming, but I wasn¡¯t expecting the doctor and the Chairman to come.

    And on that note, I guess the Chairman seems to know about my secret now. Judging by his gaze.

    Up until now, the skeleton has been covering for me by saying that I¡¯m only immortal because of my death magic affinity. But I guess he¡¯s probably got a spy or something in this lab and knows otherwise now.

    Or he just learned from the reports on the battlefield. Which is entirely possible.

    Either way, this is going to be an interesting series of events.

    ¡®Thanks, by the way,¡¯ I tell Incendia with a smile while quickly beating a hasty retreat away from the direct area of the soon-to-be battlefield.

    ¡°Of course, any time,¡± Incendia immediately replies with a stoic sounding voice in my head.

    Before I can get away from the other Class S magicians, however, a purple mana begins to cover me. Only for it to be shattered by a black and crimson mana almost immediately, making me blink when the two forces fade away.

    Then the process repeats again two more times, giving me ample time to figure out what¡¯s going on. Both from the colors of their mana, along with the sight of Class S of the magicians above the ruins of the laboratory.

    It¡¯s the doctor and the Chairman.

    The doctor keeps trying to teleport me away from here or something, meanwhile the Chairman keeps blocking him from doing so by canceling out his magic with his anti-magic.

    So I guess it¡¯s a good thing the Chairman is here. Since I don¡¯t know how quickly the skeleton or Juan could stop the doctor from teleporting me away.

    The skeleton and Juan share glances before they both glance at the two magicians who are glaring at each other. The doctor and the Chairman.

    Then they both begin attacking the doctor right away, clearly deciding that he¡¯s the worse threat right now.

    And, of course, the Chairman takes full advantage of that and begins attacking the doctor as well. Leading to a bit of a three-on-one.

    But the Chairman does occasionally send some attacks towards the other two, and the Class S magician of the White Kingdom doesn¡¯t just sit back and let them do what they please as she attacks all four of them.

    Meanwhile I just begin sneaking away to find a nice spot to watch this battle.

    Because it¡¯ll probably help me a lot with my studies.

    Although I need to make sure that I stay far enough away. Because a battle of this scale will no doubt have affects on reality itself. Just like the battle that caused the warping of time and space that made me immortal.

    Even with that knowledge, I won¡¯t just leave.

    After all, this will be the most interesting battle I¡¯ve ever seen.

    And I¡¯m not missing it.

 B4 | Chapter 35

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    The Class S magicians surprisingly don¡¯t spare even a moment to chat, instead getting straight down to business. Which means fighting. And the shockwaves from their battle are destroying this laboratory even more.

    Not that there was much left of the laboratory that wasn¡¯t already destroyed.

    Anyways, I watch them fight for a little bit before realizing that my stuff ¨C specifically my terminal, sword, and storage unit ¨C are all still somewhere hidden in the lab. So I should go find those.

    Of course, I make sure to keep an eye on the battle and continue taking notes even as I search the ruined lab for my things. And once I finally find said things, I go ahead and put them on my person while still watching their battle.

    After keeping a close eye on their battle for several minutes, I begin to understand several things about the Class S magicians. Some of which I already knew, in the case of Juan and the skeleton, and some of which I didn¡¯t.

    The skeleton likes to coat everything in his miasma to both whittle away at his opponents and to obscure their view as he uses attacks that ignore their armor to directly target their bodies. Meanwhile Juan uses a lot of explosives, both in his offense and defense. Blowing up anything that gets close to him automatically and manually while also trying to blow up his enemies.

    But that¡¯s not all, since I know Juan from our training sessions. I know that he also likes to sneak in attacks as well.

    Ones that his enemies don¡¯t know about.

    Like subtlety raising the temperature around the battle more and more in a way that can¡¯t really be blocked. Which causes discomfort and a lack of focus in his enemies at first before turning downright harmful to them when it gets hot enough.

    As for the skeleton? When it comes to subtle attacks like that, he also has his own. Like trying to sneak in death mana into his enemies¡¯ bodies to turn them into undead during the battle.

    Although Class S magicians know how to counter that. So it¡¯s pretty much a nuisance that they have to keep their eye on and be careful for.

    After those two are the Class S magicians I am not being trained by. Starting with the doctor, who I have actually seen battle before.

    One of the doctor¡¯s biggest points in his fighting style seems to be always keeping on the move. Since he keeps teleporting all over the place, never staying in one spot and always making sure to counter every attack that¡¯s sent his way by sending the attack back if possible.

    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.

    Or rather, back at a different Class S magician. Seeing as most of the Class S magicians here are almost immune to their own affinities by this point.

    So sending their own attacks back at them would be rather pointless.

    But that doesn¡¯t stop him from using his spatial magic to adjust their attacks trajectories to hit other Class S magicians here.

    Then there¡¯s the wind magician who kidnapped me. She seems to like enhancing her body with the wind. Using it to move faster and stronger, and to fly.

    It¡¯s almost like she¡¯s an enhancement magician with how she fights.

    But she also uses the wind for protective purposes, creating wind walls and the like. And she creates blades of wind that cut through steel like butter.

    Not to mention me, since I¡¯ve been cut by them before quite a bit as well.

    They¡¯re very sharp.

    Then there¡¯s the anti-magician.

    His fighting style is rather¡­ unique.

    He mostly just sits there with a field of anti-magic mana around him. Mana that completely unravel every spell that gets near him. Meanwhile he occasionally shoots out anti-magic bullets at his enemies.

    But other than that, the only things he really uses his magic for are to fly and to coat his weapons. Pretty much making his weapons anti-magic weapons.

    And thanks to that he flies around with two anti-magic swords in hand and a field of anti-magic mana around him.

    So his fighting style is very different from the others, not to mention incredibly simplistic.

    At the end of the day though, it works.

    The doctor just avoids him though, repeatedly teleporting out of the way. Seeing as the doctor seems to be his main target out of all of the Class S magicians here.

    Then again, the two have had bad blood for a while now. What with the whole war thing going on between them that was happening long before this large scale war broke out.

    On another note, he¡¯s also the youngest out of all the Class S magicians here. And not by a small margin either.

    He¡¯s by far the youngest here.

    From what I remember, Artorius Hunter is just 38 years old. The youngest Class S magician in the history of the continents.

    Meanwhile the doctor should at least be 65 or 66 years old, Juan is in his 70s, and Emma is in her late 60s.

    Then there¡¯s Adalwolf, the skeleton.

    He¡¯s an immortal skeleton from a fallen kingdom and probably the oldest human alive. Assuming he can even be considered human.

    I continue watching them battle for hours upon hours, with the entire area around the laboratory having turned into naught but a wasteland at this point. Meanwhile there are large gaping holes in reality itself around us, with the laboratory having been torn to shreds as well. And that¡¯s not even mentioning the fact that there aren¡¯t any living creatures left around here other than the Class S magicians and me. With everything and everyone else having been killed in the wake of their battle.

    But despite all of the damage, I just continue watching the battle and taking notes.

    My note taking quickly focuses on their mana manipulation though. Not their spells.

    Partially because I¡¯m trying to learn mana manipulation, and partially because they¡¯re not using scripted spells that I can steal in the first place. At most I¡¯d be able to copy the basic ideas behind what their spells do. But nothing more.

    Either way, this battle is going to help me a lot.

 B4 | Chapter 36

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    Their battle lasts for several hours straight before one of the Class S magicians finally begins to leave. That, unsurprisingly, being the wind affinity Class S magician of the bunch. The one that kidnapped me in the first place.

    Which makes sense, seeing as she¡¯s probably the one using the most mana out of the lot to continue fighting. And the weakest of the bunch. Seeing as the others there are rather special.

    The anti-magician, who is barely using mana to do anything other than just coat his weapon and block attacks and keep him airborne.

    The death magician who has been increasing his mana supply for ages now, making the amount he uses rather moot in this battle.

    The fire magician who is known as one of if not the most powerful magician of his age on the continents. Probably because he comes from outside of the continents.

    And the space magician who is also one of the most powerful magicians of the continents.

    In all honesty, Emma can¡¯t really compare with any of them. Except maybe Artorius, since the Chairman is the newest to become a Class S magician.

    He still wins out in endurance though just because of his affinity.

    As for why Emma decided to do all of this despite knowing her weakness compared to them?

    It was probably because she expected to get some sort of results in the time it took for them to get here. Only to fail at that instead.

    I also doubt she expected so many Class S magicians to come.

    Honestly, I didn¡¯t expect that either. But their little arguments in the second half of their battle explained why the other two came.

    She doesn¡¯t exit the battle without leaving a little something behind though. Which I find myself flying high into the air because of as I ride the damned tornado she threw behind herself in her departure.

    This stupid tornado is making it difficult to watch the others. I can¡¯t see anything through it after all.

    Thanks to the tornado ¨C which is so big it is larger than the laboratory itself was  before it was destroyed ¨C I end up being thrown around for over an hour. Then the tornado finally begins to toss me outside of it, leading to me just falling straight down towards the ground.

    Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    While I¡¯m falling, I make sure to use the height to search for the other Class S magicians. And just as I expected, none of them are in the tornado right now. With all four of them being outside of it and still fighting.

    Although, two of them seem to be injured, and they¡¯re not too far from the tornado either. With the tornado actually moving in their direction. So there¡¯s that.

    Of the ones that were injured, there¡¯s the Chairman of the Republic, whose anti-magic barrier must have been shattered by the sheer power of the tornado, and there¡¯s Juan, whose particular affinity doesn¡¯t do all that well at defending against wind. Seeing as wind and fire are an¡­ odd mix.

    Wind enhances fire but isn¡¯t really put out by fire. In fact, wind is also enhanced by fire.

    The two enhance each other.

    So it¡¯s not exactly easy to defend against fire or wind with each other.

    Although it is a bit easier to defend against wind with fire than the other way around. At least for a Class S magician.

    After all, the fire also involves heat, whereas the wind doesn¡¯t have any effect on the temperature. Making it entirely possible to boil the wind magician alive if they use the wrong type of barrier. Even if the flames don¡¯t directly reach them.

    My thoughts are cut off when Juan does something unexpected.

    When the tornado gets too close for comfort for the other magicians, they begin to build distance between themselves and it again. But not Juan. Nope. Instead the fire Class S magician creates a massive sphere of flames around him before shooting out a massive geyser of flames into the tornado.

    Turning the tornado into a tornado of flames.

    Flames that shoot out of the top of the tornado and rain down on every last thing in the area, including the other Class S magicians.

    Oh, and on me too. But I ignore them.

    For the first time in the battle where they¡¯re in my view, I take my gaze off of the Class S magicians just to watch Juan¡¯s spell at work. Because it¡¯s absolutely beautiful.

    His spell combines both his own flames and the last wind magic spell that Emma cast before fleeing. The spell I¡¯m pretty sure must be a Tier X spell, considering the fact that I can even see cuts in reality around us from it. Albeit tiny ones.

    The cuts look like tiny little holes that lead into some sort of pitch black space filled with mana. But even if they¡¯re small, they¡¯re still cuts in reality.

    Which is only possible through Tier X spells.

    As for Juan¡¯s spell? It looks like it¡¯s a weaker Tier X spell.

    So it¡¯s a strategic scale spell but not quite one that can damage reality.

    I continue watching the flames rain down from the sky while the other Class S magicians try to protect themselves from them, only for my eyes to notice some of those rifts in reality beginning to burn a little bit at the edges. Which I guess does prove that they¡¯re damaging reality after all.

    Still. The surrounding area is going to be off limits to the public for a long time after this battle. There¡¯s no doubt about that in my mind.

    I watch the beauty of the flames for a bit before finally crashing into the ground and then immediately running from the tornado while looking up at the flames and the Class S magicians.

    Magicians who are now fighting while protecting themselves from the raining flames.

    This battle is very different from any battle I¡¯ve seen before.

    And I¡¯m all for watching it all the way through to the end.

 B4 | Chapter 37

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    The next one to make their exit from the battlefield is the Chairman of the Republic. No doubt because he¡¯s running low on mana.

    But unlike Emma, he doesn¡¯t make a grand exit. He just turns around and begins flying away.

    The only special thing he does while fleeing is send a single powerful wave of anti-magic mana at the other magicians. Undoing any magic they¡¯re currently in the middle of casting, along with any magic they already have concurrently cast.

    Like the magic keeping them flying in the air for example.

    I blankly watch as the other three all just kinda fall out of the air before managing to catch themselves again just barely before they manage to force the anti-magic mana wave away from them mere meters above the ground. Which would¡¯ve proven fatal to Juan and the doctor.

    Although the skeleton would¡¯ve been fine even if he went splat. Because he¡¯s an immortal.

    Plus he wouldn¡¯t have gone splat anyways, seeing as he¡¯s just bones. So there¡¯s no flesh to go splat anyways.

    Putting the logistics aside for a moment, the doctor seems to change his plans now that it¡¯s become a one versus two for him. Seeing as he immediately teleports over to me and tries to capture me again.

    I¡¯m sure the Chairman¡¯s absence has something to do with his change of plans too, actually. Since he was the biggest factor behind his inability to capture me.

    But even with the Chairman being gone, he still fails. Mostly because the skeleton wrapped me in a large bubble of death mana and miasma.

    A place that surprisingly feels rather nice to be in. Probably because I¡¯m a vampire.

    Or sort of a vampire.

    Anyways, the doctor tries to teleport the entire bubble of death mana and miasma, only to fail when he keeps getting attacked by the other two while trying. And while he¡¯s doing that, I can¡¯t help but notice something inside of my body.

    Something strange.

    Every time his space magic gets anywhere near me, I notice a tiny little fluctuation in the space mana locked inside of my body. The very same space mana that I can¡¯t separate from myself no matter how hard I try to move some of it to my mana arcs.

    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Is this¡­ huh.

    I stop paying attention to what¡¯s happening in the battle and begin focusing solely inside of myself. On the spatial mana that¡¯s merged with the time mana in my body.

    And to my surprise, I find that it has a little bit more give than it had before. With that give growing stronger the closer the doctor¡¯s spatial mana is to me.

    Very interesting.

    I can tell there¡¯s no way to fully separate all of the mana from me, and if someone tried, it would just replace itself. But I think I might be able to separate out a tiny sliver if I really tried hard.

    So I try just that. I pull on the spatial mana while trying to unravel it from the time mana. But just a tiny sliver of it.

    Any more and all I¡¯d be doing is something akin to trying to separate two random spots on an Arcadian Metal sword with my bare fingers and no damage already on it. Or something like that.

    Meaning it¡¯s impossible.

    I continue trying to do it, to separate even just a single tiny arc of space mana from the space mana flowing through my body, only to fail in the end when I sense the space mana around me vanishing in an instant. Making me open my eyes to find that the doctor must have fled.

    Damn. And I was so close¡­

    I finally turn my attention to the skeleton and Juan, only to surprisingly find both of them to be rather injured. With Juan having an arm almost cut off and the skeleton literally having two arms cut off.

    Although the skeleton¡¯s skeletal arms regrow in a few seconds, so it¡¯s not a problem for him. And Juan is currently at work healing himself.

    He¡¯ll probably have his wound healed soon enough.

    As for the rest of our surroundings? There seem to be a bunch of cuts all over the place that have traces of space mana all over them.

    Out of curiosity, I move up to one of the cuts. But it isn¡¯t enough to even budge the space mana inside of me.

    Which is a pity.

    I let out a sigh as I realize that I¡¯ll probably have to be directly hit with the doctor¡¯s mana to free even a single arc of space mana. And that¡¯s only with me focusing on freeing the arc with everything I¡¯ve got.

    Meaning I wouldn¡¯t be able to pay any attention to the doctor while doing it.

    Which isn¡¯t exactly smart to do when the guy is attacking me. Considering that he could just teleport me away and I¡¯d be captured again.

    I purse my lips as I try to figure out some way to free even a single arc of mana, but nothing¡¯s coming to mind right now.

    All I need is that one arc. Then I could convert one of the death or fire mana arcs I have to space, and I could train that arc to split it. Pretty much giving me a third affinity entirely.

    Assuming my mana arcs will even let me convert them to space mana, that is.

    Death mana is running purely throughout my entire body, but space mana isn¡¯t purely running through it. It¡¯s mixed with time mana to form a sort of space-time mana instead in the form of a natural wonder of sorts.

    So it may not even work.

    I sigh again at that thought before the skeleton asks, ¡°What has you sighing so much?¡±

    ¡°Nothing important right now,¡± I answer with a shake of my head. ¡°Anyways, I started making some progress on my mana manipulation. Not much though.¡±

    Both the Class S magicians just stare blankly at me. Almost like I¡¯m some sort of strange creature they¡¯ve never seen before.

    ¡°What?¡± I ask while tilting my head.

    Did I say something strange?

 B4 | Chapter 38

    The Ruins of the Laboratory after the battle

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    Adalwolf Giese is used to a lot of strange things in his life.

    He¡¯s a walking skeleton after all. One that uses death magic and is therefore immune to death itself so long as he has mana remaining.

    Not only that, but he¡¯s also a Class S magician. And the only Class S death magician in the entire world, even including the other continents.

    If he ignores his adopted son, that is. But even he wasn¡¯t born a death magician.

    Despite all of that weirdness, Adalwolf never expected he would ever see someone ignore being experimented on as he just practiced his mana manipulation. But now he¡¯s seen it.

    And he genuinely has to question if his adopted son is mentally stable or not.

    Because he seems to have lost a large part of himself by now.

    Can he even feel pain anymore?

    Adalwolf is a skeleton and can¡¯t feel pain at all, but even if Nathan is immortal and is a vampire, he still has nerves. So he should still be able to feel pain.

    Yet the number of times Adalwolf has seen Nathan¡¯s limbs completely eviscerated, or even his entire body getting annihilated to the point of nothing being left is more than Adalwolf can remember. All without the boy expressing any pain.

    Not anymore at least.

    Nathan used to express pain to some extent. But Adalwolf doesn¡¯t remember the last time he¡¯s seen him with an expression that looks like he¡¯s feeling anything.

    If Adalwolf is being honest with himself, a part of him is growing afraid of Nathan. Afraid of what he¡¯ll become in the future.

    After all, Nathan is immortal in the truest sense.

    He can¡¯t die in any way imaginable.

    It¡¯s just impossible.

    And he¡¯s already reached this far in his brief two or so decades of life.

    So how strong will he become in three thousand years?

    Part of Adalwolf is terrified at the thought, while another part if excited.

    But for now, he¡¯s just someone who needs protection lest he become a test subject for a long time.

    Adalwolf glances at the fire overlord, Juan Sequani. Only to find the man looking happy with this rather than fearful.

    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

    Part of that might be because Juan only has a couple decades left to live at the longest, so he won¡¯t be alive in thousands of years. But Adalwolf believes most of it is because all Juan cares about is making the ultimate fire magician.

    And Nathan¡¯s outlook and immortality are perfect towards reaching that end.

    Regardless, Adalwolf turns his attention towards the direction that Emma fled in. Then, after sharing a glance with Juan once the man calms down enough, both he and Juan rush off in that direction.

    Having already healed their wounds and decided to take some blood in exchange for their lost time.

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    So¡­ why are they flying off without me? Is this part of my training or something?

    My answer comes to me rather quickly in the form of a message from both of them. One that pretty much comes down to them going after Emma to get revenge for this entire affair.

    Huh.

    Well, rest in peace Emma.

    Anyways, their message said to just wait here for them. So I do just that and sit down on a random piece of rubble while focusing inside of myself to continue my mana manipulation training.

    Although I don¡¯t really get much progress, even over the course of the next few hours.

    And eventually I¡¯m interrupted when I feel a bullet entering and leaving my skull. Which makes me black out for a brief moment before I turn to look at where the bullet came from with a slight frown on my face.

    That was rude.

    Who shoots first and asks questions never when they¡¯re at the ruins of a laboratory?

    My question is answered at the sight of some sort of sniper kneeling far away from the ruins of the laboratory. One wearing Republic armor.

    As for why my question is answered?

    It¡¯s because said soldier is waving at me with a smile on their face.

    Huh?

    Who the heck shoots someone in the head and then waves hello at them afterwards¡­?

    I climb to my feet out of curiosity before jumping straight over towards them while using flames to accelerate myself. All the way until I reach them, landing right in front of the man.

    And I can smell and hear the other people in the area. Four others to be exact.

    ¡°I knew it!¡± the man who shot me shouts. ¡°You¡¯re really the Undying Magician! Nathan!¡±

    I blink at that before frowning. But the man just lowers his sniper rifle without giving me a chance to say anything. Then he walks up to me and reaches out a hand for a handshake.

    ¡°You probably don¡¯t remember me, but I was a student at the academy!¡± the man says, surprising me yet again. ¡°My name is Felix Rolander!¡±

    I stare at him for several seconds, occasionally glancing between his face and his hand while doing so. And after thinking for a bit, I eventually ask, ¡°Who?¡±

    The man stumbles in place while his teammates begin laughing so hard one of them falls over. Proving this group to not be a very disciplined group of soldiers.

    Or, considering that they¡¯re magicians, I guess they should be officers.

    The person named Felix reaches back with the hand he was offering to shake mine with before scratching the back of his head as he says, ¡°Yeah, yeah, go ahead and laugh. I didn¡¯t expect him to remember me anyways.¡±

    I stare blankly at him for several seconds while patting the pommel of my sword that¡¯s still in its sheath.

    Honestly, I don¡¯t remember many of the people from the academy. So I don¡¯t know if he¡¯s telling the truth or not.

    The only ones I strongly remember are my team, Amelia, and the instructors.

    I didn¡¯t sense that he was lying though.

    ¡°If you¡¯re from the academy and know about me, that must mean¡­¡± I ask with my eyes narrowed.

    Felix meets my eyes again ¨C which is surprising since most people I¡¯ve met nowadays avoid my eyes, although that could be because those people are enemy soldiers ¨C and nods his head. Then he grins at me while tapping away on his terminal before holding the arm with the terminal on it out in front of him.

    ¡°Everyone from the academy already knows about you,¡± he says with his grin growing wider the moment a screen appears as a hologram above the terminal.

    One with a very familiar face on it.

    I blink before feeling the corners of my lips quirking ever so slightly upwards as I plainly state, ¡°Amelia.¡±

    She smiles back at me and says, ¡°Nathan.¡±

    Now this is certainly an unexpected surprise.

 B4 | Chapter 39

    The Healer¡¯s Mansion back within the Republic

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    Not long before their call

    Amelia frowns as she sits on a chair in one of the living rooms of the Healer General¡¯s mansion. A mansion that also happens to be the home of one of her friends, who is the daughter of the Healer General. Cyria.

    Something has been bothering Amelia for a while now. Ever since she learned that Nathan was alive.

    She¡¯s seen pictures of him, and while he does look like the same person even if he is clearly no longer human, there¡¯s just something that¡¯s bothering her about it all. Something that¡¯s different about him.

    Although that much is obvious at a glance. Just from her seeing the videos of him running through battlefields without a care as he gets torn to shreds, burnt, blasted, and destroyed in any way imaginable. All without even looking away from his terminal or the results of his spells.

    Spells that are destroying entire swathes of soldiers.

    Now, Amelia is also a soldier. A magician at that. So she¡¯s not shy when it comes to killing on the battlefield.

    But what she was seeing in those videos wasn¡¯t a soldier killing enemy soldiers.

    It looked more like an apathetic creature slaughtering cattle to test something.

    Amelia remembers what Nathan was like the last time she saw him. Back when she and him were best friends. And she remembers their time in school before the academy even more clearly.

    Nathan was never all that expressive, but he was still a kind man who looked out for his friends. Even if he would say that he didn¡¯t really care about much, he¡¯d still step in and help if a friend was in need near him.

    Regardless of his own safety.

    And that was no doubt before he became immortal, since she remembers seeing his injuries staying then. Back when he saved her life all those years ago and ended up in the hospital for it.

    So seeing the videos recorded on the battlefield hurts Amelia more than she cares to admit.

    Just how much have you been through¡­?

    Amelia grits her teeth at the thought while clenching her fists.

    She¡¯s currently alone at Cyria¡¯s home, since Cyria herself had invited her over for an overnight planning session with Sofia. Only for an emergency to happen before Cyria and Sofia could even get back to the mansion, leading to the two of them having to go handle it.

    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.

    So Amelia¡¯s just left waiting for the two of them to finish with the emergency summons so they can continue the planning session they were going to do.

    One directly involving the very immortal magician she¡¯s been fretting over this entire time.

    Amelia eventually puts her head in her hands and lets out a sigh of frustration. Only for her terminal to suddenly buzz on her arm, making her instantly move to check who is calling.

    But unlike what she was expecting, the call isn¡¯t from Sofia or Cyria.

    It¡¯s from another officer. Her subordinate in fact.

    A subordinate she would normally be leading on a mission right now if not for the Healer General¡¯s order keeping her and her friends off of the frontlines.

    Why¡¯s he calling?

    After a second, Amelia sits back in her chair and takes a deep breath before answering the call.

    Just to be shocked by the sight of the terminal camera being facing someone else rather than her subordinate.

    Someone she has been wanting to see for a while now. Ever since she heard he was still alive.

    Nathan.

    Nathan Fox.

    Amelia feels countless emotions coming over her all at once. But the leading emotion is sadness.

    It¡¯s not anger at how he lied to them all. Or disappointment at how he hid his condition from everyone, even if she doesn¡¯t understand much about how or why he¡¯s immortal. Or even when he became immortal in the first place other than a couple tiny hints.

    She feels sad as she sees the expression on his face. One of complete apathy, albeit with some faint hints of surprise on it.

    Just how much pain¡­

    Amelia shakes her head before finishing the thought when he says, ¡°Amelia.¡±

    So she smiles back at him and says, ¡°Nathan.¡±

    She can tell so much more about his current state from this close up call than the long-distance glimpses she got through those recordings. And what she can tell hurts her more than she can say.

    It¡¯s not even his physical differences that hurt her. Although she¡¯s saddened by those and what pain they may have caused him too.

    It¡¯s that she can see very little feeling anymore inside of the glowing crimson eyes she can see staring back at her through the screen. Almost like Nathan has turned off almost all of his emotions regarding others at this point to focus only on his goals.

    What those goals are, however, Amelia has no clue.

    And that bothers her even more.

    ¡°I¡¯m guessing the Healer General told you about me?¡± Nathan asks while raising one eyebrow.

    Amelia¡¯s eyes widen a little bit. Both at his words, which imply the Healer General knows more than what he¡¯s told them, and at the familiar habit Nathan has.

    A habit she knows very well.

    ¡°No, he hasn¡¯t,¡± Amelia says as her smile grows wider and far more genuine and less sad. All because of that one change in Nathan¡¯s expression. Even if his expression is still lacking the same amount of warmth he used to have. ¡°I¡¯ll be sure to ask him the next time I see him.¡±

    Nathan lowers his brow and stares for a few seconds as Amelia continues smiling at the screen.

    He may be different, and he may have gone through so much on his own, but he¡¯s still Nathan. Those habits don¡¯t lie.

    ¡°No, I¡¯ll just tell you everything myself,¡± Nathan says with a shake of his head, surprising Amelia. ¡°I might as well now that the Chairman knows about me too. There¡¯s no reason to hide it anymore.¡±

    And so, Amelia immediately sits up to listen while clenching her fists, feeling nervous about what he¡¯s about to say.

    ¡°I¡¯ll start from the beginning,¡± Nathan says, his eyes narrowing. ¡°All the way at the mountains near my home.¡±

 B4 | Chapter 40

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    In all honesty, I don¡¯t think I ever was really all that normal of a person. But I¡¯m not entirely sure either way. Not after having gone through so much and having any normality that may have been within me dying completely.

    Pain, death, loss, no control, experimentation, involuntary altering of my body, and the list goes on.

    After so much of it, someone just grows numb. Especially when there are no actual lasting permanent effects on said someone other than the altering of the body part.

    There¡¯s only so much a single person can take before their mind has to adapt to it in order to not feel the pain and despair anymore.

    And I don¡¯t regret my mind having changed to what it has come to now.

    But I never really thought much about how others would think.

    I saw my parents, but they¡¯re different. They¡¯re my parents and I know they¡¯ll accept me.

    They already did in fact. When I meet with them from time to time.

    My friends, on the other hand¡­

    There¡¯s no reason they have to accept me for who I¡¯ve become. For what I¡¯ve become.

    And I only realize this now as I see Amelia¡¯s face while she looks back at me through the screen. Looks at me with a look of sadness and of grief.

    She looks like she is upset that I never told her, but not angry. And not scared either.

    It¡¯s¡­ kind of nice.

    Looking at her like that makes me want to tell her everything. Something I¡¯d never consider doing if it weren¡¯t for the fact that my immortality is no longer a secret. That pretty much everyone of importance knows at this point.

    Even the Chairman knows, considering how he was just trying to kidnap me as well. Just like the other Class S magicians here.

    So I begin to describe everything that¡¯s happened to me ever since becoming immortal.

    Every last detail.

    All without shedding even a single tear. Since I don¡¯t think I¡¯m even capable of that anymore.

    The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.

    Actually, do vampires even have tears?

    I¡¯m not sure.

    Either way, Amelia listens to me the entire time without interrupting. She looks sad and almost like she wants to hug me but obviously can¡¯t.

    All of which make me continue speaking without stopping.

    About the accident. The doctor and his experiments.

    The academy days and what I would do back in my room to keep up with the higher talent magicians. When I would continuously practice my spells in there even as they would burn me alive or blow me up.

    Then what happened after leaving the academy and going to the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    The skeleton and what he did to me, what I then did to the enemy soldiers. Just tearing them apart without a scrap of hesitation left at this point.

    The nobles. The war. Juan.

    Everything.

    And by the time I finish, Amelia is bawling her eyes out crying. Which shocks me more than words can say.

    She never cries after all.

    Ever.

    I don¡¯t think I have seen her cry in my entire life.

    Meanwhile the soldiers standing here with me holding the terminal all look shocked themselves at my story. Shocked to the point that they¡¯re just silent and staring at me with horror clearly visible on their faces.

    But I ignore them as I watch Amelia cry while feeling the corner of my lips quirking upwards ever so slightly in a smile.

    It¡¯s kind of nice to see someone cry for me.

    While she¡¯s doing that, I go ahead and ask the soldiers to transfer her contact information over to my terminal. Which they do while still stunned into silence.

    Although I can¡¯t help but notice that they flinch when they get close to me. Almost like I¡¯m a wild beast they¡¯re afraid of.

    I don¡¯t really blame them though. Not after telling them about my literally treating soldiers like experiments.

    And I don¡¯t even feel bad for that anymore.

    If I ever really did.

    What¡¯s worse is that I don¡¯t even want to get any of my old feelings that I¡¯ve lost back. Because I know I¡¯m going to live on forever. And with that knowledge comes the knowledge that I¡¯ll be put through just as bad things eventually.

    Which would just kill those feelings again then. Not to mention that the people I care about now won¡¯t even be alive then and will have died of old age.

    So I won¡¯t have anyone with me then.

    Except Incendia.

    I glance at the phoenix who is currently on my shoulder, making my faint smile grow a little bit wider. Then I turn back to the screen when I hear Amelia finally speak again.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry you had to go through all that on your own¡­¡± Amelia says with a sad look on her face and a tear still running down her cheek. But at this point she¡¯s not really crying anymore. Not much at least. ¡°If you ever need someone to talk to, know that we¡¯re here for you.¡±

    I blink at that.

    We?

    My thoughts almost blank out when I see two others appearing on the screen as well. Sofia and Cyria.

    And both of them are crying just like Amelia is.

    I blink once, then twice.

    Then I let out a dry chuckle as I realize they¡¯ve probably been there for at least most of my explanation of events. Yet they still look like they feel the same way as Amelia.

    At this point I just need to tell Aidan and Rebecca everything.

    I glance up when I notice the skeleton and Juan approaching from the horizon. Then I look back at the screen and tell them, ¡°I added Amelia¡¯s contact information to my terminal, so I¡¯ll call you back later. Something just came up.¡±

    They nod their heads before I hang up the call. Both to talk to the Class S magicians and to give them time to calm down and digest everything I just told them.

    I take a deep breath for a second, then focus on the approaching Class S magicians with a faint smile on my face.

    Time to see if that Class S wind magician is still breathing or not.

 B4 | Chapter 41

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 30

    As it turns out, that Class S wind magician is, in fact, not breathing. I know this before even asking, before the magicians even reach me in fact. Because the answer is as clear as the head that I now notice being carried by Juan behind him in a little cage of flames.

    Guess they beheaded her.

    My eyes widen a bit when they get closer, and I realize the head is moving on its own. Clearly implying that the skeleton raised her head as an undead.

    The hell? Why¡¯d he bother doing that?

    My answer comes when I realize that the head is moving its eyes around like a normal human being. A normal, headless, human being. Which isn¡¯t all that normal, but the head still clearly has intelligence in it.

    I guess he raised her with her mind intact?

    But that won¡¯t last long. Not when she¡¯s just a head.

    From what I understand, you can bring a person back from the dead as an undead, but they won¡¯t last long. And the amount of time they last is entirely dependent on how much of their body is left.

    Something about the soul needing flesh attuned to the soul itself to tether itself to, and a dead body ¨C unlike a living body ¨C only having a loose grasp on the soul even if it¡¯s the previous body owned by the soul. So loose it will eventually lose the tether entirely no matter how much someone tries to force the tether. And the grasp is even weaker the less flesh there is to tether it to.

    I¡¯m not well versed in all of that since I don¡¯t have soul magic or any subordinates who can use soul magic.

    But I guess the skeleton does have someone who can use soul magic. So that¡¯s interesting.

    I wonder where they are and why they didn¡¯t follow?

    Juan and the skeleton immediately turn their attention to the frozen stiff soldiers from the Republic. Then they glance at me and I shake my head to signal them not to kill them. So they both ignore their presence as they look around at me, then at the terminal on my arm that still has Amelia¡¯s contact information pulled up.

    Until it goes into sleep mode that is.

    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.

    Juan just continues to ignore it as he pulls the flaming cage around him and focuses on it. But the skeleton doesn¡¯t ignore it.

    ¡°Nathan, I will give you one warning as a fellow immortal,¡± he states while staring at me with the blazing flames in his eye sockets. ¡°Do not get close enough to mortals to care about them.¡±

    I blink at that before narrowing my eyes ever so slightly.

    ¡°I won¡¯t meddle with your relationships, but for your own good, you should stay distanced from mortals,¡± he continues, making me relax ever so slightly at the confirmation that he won¡¯t hurt any of my friends. ¡°Your family is one thing as you are already close to them, but those friends of yours from the academy are another. You will outlive them, and it will hurt to see those you care about growing old and dying, leaving you all on your own.¡±

    I don¡¯t say anything in response to him. But I am glad that he¡¯s not going to do anything to them.

    That said, his words do hurt.

    Because I know they¡¯re not wrong. That it will probably hurt when I see them growing old and dying of old age.

    All while I¡¯m still forever unchanging. Other than my magical prowess.

    I grit my teeth at that thought before taking a deep breath and letting it out again. Then I turn to look at Juan as I ask, ¡°What¡¯s with the head?¡±

    Juan answers without turning his gaze from the head, ¡°It¡¯s easier to bring proof to show that she¡¯s dead to the other Class S magicians and their own nation. And the filthy corpse is why she¡¯s undead right now.¡±

    So I turn my gaze towards the skeleton, only for the skeleton to answer before I can ask him anything, ¡°I wanted to get intel about the alliance from her if possible. But she hasn¡¯t been very talkative, so I¡¯m going to have to resort to force when I get back to my lab.¡±

    I blink at that before glancing at the head without a hint of pity.

    If it weren¡¯t for the fact that she kidnapped me and was just running experiments on me then I¡¯d feel bad for her. But thanks to that I don¡¯t feel anything for her.

    Juan looks at me for several seconds out of the corner of my eye before I turn to look at him and tilt my head a little bit. Deciding not to ask anything out loud since he looks tired. And a tired teacher is never a good thing when it comes to my next lesson. Especially if I irritate him somehow.

    Not that he¡¯s ever been anything but nice to me thanks to my immortality and fire magic. Even if his lessons tend to be rather difficult.

    ¡°You should take a break from training for a few days,¡± Juan suddenly says, shocking me so badly that my jaw drops open. And I¡¯m not the only one as the skeleton¡¯s jaw also drops open. Which looks more comical on him since he¡¯s a skeleton.

    I stare at him and so does the skeleton.

    In fact, even the head of the Class S wind magician stares at him in shock despite her just being a head.

    Did Juan just¡­ huh?

    That¡¯s¡­ not something I ever expected to see.

    Juan being considerate and worried about someone.

    I purse my lips for a moment before letting out a sigh and asking, ¡°Can I go check on my territory?¡±

    He nods his head and responds, ¡°I¡¯ll drop you off there before returning to the battlefield.¡±

    I nod my head in thanks, deciding I¡¯m too mentally exhausted by everything that happened in the past like hour or so to think about his strange behavior any further.

    Juan glances at the skeleton and hands him the head while saying, ¡°You deal with this.¡±

    Then he takes me into the air through his fire magic and we begin heading back to the Kingdom of the Fallen.

 B4 | Chapter 42

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 31

    By the time we arrive at my base, midnight has already passed, and I find myself floating down to the ground outside of my base in the dark of night. And the moment my feet touch the ground, Juan begins to leave. All without saying more than just a few words as he does so.

    With those words being that he¡¯ll come back to pick me up for more training in a few days.

    So after his exit, I go ahead and begin walking up to the entrance of the base without any lights. But I don¡¯t have any difficulty seeing despite that thanks to my vampiric nature giving me perfect night vision.

    As for the soldiers stationed outside of the base? They immediately begin to freak out when they see glowing red eyes approaching.

    Their freakout doesn¡¯t last long though, since I enter the light rather quickly when they shine it on me. At which point they realize it¡¯s me and stand down.

    Then they all begin to kneel down and simultaneously declare, ¡°Welcome back, Your Majesty. May your immortal glory forever light our path.¡±

    I feel a single brow twitch at that greeting, but I nod to them in response anyways as I continue walking past them into the base itself.

    From what I understand, Claire and the others have been experimenting with how the people here should refer to me. And they¡¯ve apparently finally stuck with one.

    Either that or the soldiers are just using a temporary one.

    That aside, I can¡¯t help but notice several things as I walk through the base.

    The first thing is that the base is a lot bigger than it used to be. So much bigger that I almost get lost. In fact, I would get lost if it weren¡¯t for my senses being far greater than a normal human being¡¯s senses.

    So I manage to smell and hear my way to my goal.

    After that, the second thing I notice is that there are a lot more people here than the last time I visited. Which is no doubt because of the reports I¡¯ve received from Claire. The ones about the forces previously belonging to nobles who have died in this war coming over and joining under my forces.

    The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.

    Or at least, the forces that manage to get away from whatever successor the previous noble may have had. Since plenty of them have successors.

    Although not all of those successors actually have the power to rule their forces.

    And the third thing I notice is that the greeting the soldiers gave me at the entrance is definitely the one Claire and the others settled on in the end. Considering how all of the people I greet, whether they¡¯re soldiers or civilians, are all giving me that very same greeting the moment they notice me.

    As for how they¡¯re all able to recognize me at a glance despite me not ever seeing a large majority of them? That¡¯s probably because of my vampiric traits.

    Or to be more precise, probably because of my crimson eyes. And the black veins slightly protruding from my eyes due to being around so many people at once in an enclosed space.

    Then again, for all I know it could be because of Incendia who is perched on my shoulder that¡¯s giving it away.

    She is a rather large tell after all.

    Anyways, I eventually reach my room and collapse onto my bed without saying a word to any of the people I left in charge of the base. Because I just feel like lying down for a change.

    I don¡¯t actually remember the last time I just straight up sat down or lied down. Not with all of the nonstop training I¡¯ve been going through. All the way from dusk till dawn back to dusk again.

    Every single day without any sort of break. Without any sleep and without any time to relax.

    Huh. Now that I think about it, maybe that¡¯s why Juan decided to have me take a break?

    I highly doubt he knows about Amelia and the conversation I had with her before his arrival, seeing as he shouldn¡¯t know about them. In fact, even the skeleton shouldn¡¯t know much about them.

    The only one I can see really knowing much about them would be the doctor. And he¡¯s not in power in the Republic anymore. In fact, he¡¯s a public enemy to the Republic.

    Plus the Healer General is helping protect Amelia and the others. So if he does attack, they should be able to call for help at least.

    At the end of the day though, the doctor isn¡¯t the type to bother with that. He takes the quickest and most likely to succeed path towards a goal.

    And taking time to kidnap some protected students who may not even be important to me in his eyes isn¡¯t worth his time. In his eyes at least, judging based on what I know of him.

    I let out a sigh at that thought.

    Either way though, I¡¯m sure the Chairman of the Republic has defenses set up all over to counter space mana. Unless he¡¯s just stupid that is.

    And I don¡¯t think he¡¯s stupid.

    I roll over to stare up at the ceiling of my rather fancy room ¨C a room that¡¯s a lot fancier than the last time I came here ¨C before closing my eyes. All while Incendia just lies down on my bed herself and begins to take a nap.

    My thoughts go back to what the skeleton said. About my having to watch my friend grow old and die right before my eyes.

    It hurts to think about, but at the same time, I know it¡¯s not right to just avoid them because of that. After all, I¡¯ve always known that everyone I meet will die eventually while I won¡¯t.

    So why should I start worrying about getting close to other now? Especially since I already care about them anyways.

    I let out another sigh before sitting up again and moving my arm with my terminal on it in front of me.

    Then I go ahead and give Amelia a call.

 B4 | Intermission 3

    Numerous places across other Continents

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 31

    On one continent after another, numerous Class S magicians who were watching the battle over the laboratory begin to discuss amongst themselves how to deal with the war getting closer and closer to an end. And more importantly, how to deal with the immortal magician on the abandoned continent.

    Of the other continents, almost every last one of them shares some similarities. Specifically being the Magician¡¯s Tower, the method in which each nation on the continents decides which nation is the most powerful, and the relative peace on the continents.

    But things become a lot more complicated on the continents when Class S magicians and potential Class S magician seeds ¨C those magicians who have clear potential to reach Class S someday ¨C come into play. Because Class S magicians are considered the main way for a nation to determine its power compared to the other nations.

    It all comes down to how many Class S magicians each nation has.

    And thanks to that, every last nation and organization on the other continents outside of the abandoned continents immediately turns their attention to the Undying Magician. Even the most powerful organization of the continents ¨C the Magician¡¯s Tower ¨C shows their express interest at the idea of a potential Class S seed that will never die.

    Because if they can get the Undying Magician to join their ranks or at least become an ally to them, they will have a permanent Class S magician on their side. One who will be around for eternity.

    So all of the Class S magicians on the other continents immediately begin to send more spies to keep an eye on the abandoned continent. All just to watch over the Undying Magician himself.

    But not a single one makes contact with him. Instead they keep watch to make sure other forces don¡¯t make contact with him first.

    As they all wait for the war between the abandoned continent¡¯s nations to come to a close first.

    <hr>

    At the Peak of the First Magician¡¯s Tower

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 31

    ¡°Well this is just getting more and more unusual, now isn¡¯t it?¡± The Tower Master of the First Tower declares with his cheek resting on his knuckles and his elbow on the throne atop the raised dais of the tower¡¯s peak. Meanwhile over two dozen other Class S magicians just like himself stand around the tower looking at a large screen showing the Undying Magician.

    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°Things are heating up around the different continents,¡± the Tower Master of the Second Tower says while looking down at a tablet in front of him. ¡°All of the different nations watching the events of the Abandoned Continent are currently trying to covertly find a way to recruit the Undying Magician without the other nations finding out. But none of them are sure how to proceed.¡±

    ¡°Right,¡± the Fourth Tower Master mutters with a frown on her face and her arms crossed. ¡°The Abandoned Continent was abandoned for a reason, so the people there aren¡¯t treated very well. I¡¯m sure he won¡¯t trust anyone coming to him with offers of an alliance or just treatment within their ranks.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s what everyone else is worried about,¡± the Third Tower Master says while the woman paces back and forth. ¡°Everyone believes the immortal will simply assume we¡¯re trying to capture and experiment on him somehow. That no one would genuinely treat him well.¡±

    ¡°Then we just have to take things slowly and show him our sincerity,¡± the Seventh Tower Master states with his hands held behind his straightened back as he stares at the screen in front of him. ¡°Wear down at that wall he¡¯s built up in his mind and give him benefits without seeking anything.¡±

    ¡°Other nations are thinking the same thing right now, so how are we going to stand out amongst them?¡± the Sixth Tower Master asks as she frowns at the others.

    ¡°Glandella is right,¡± the Tenth Tower Master states while frowning at the Seventh Tower Master. ¡°The moment this war ends, every nation will be rushing over to meet with and make friendly with the Undying Magician all in an attempt to draw him over to their own side. So how are we going to pull him to us rather than allow him to be pulled to them?¡±

    The Eleventh Tower Master scoffs and mutters, ¡°That¡¯s assuming he even decides to work with anyone.¡±

    All of the Tower Masters nod their heads in agreement at that and go quiet for a short while.

    ¡°We can¡¯t offer him a place as a Tower Master until he is officially a Class S magician, and I¡¯m not even sure if he would understand what the meaning of that position would be,¡± the First Tower Master states with a single finger held up. Then he raises a second finger and adds, ¡°We can¡¯t be sure he will trust that we aren¡¯t just going to turn around and experiment on him at any moment.¡± He raises a third finger. ¡°And to him, we will just be one of dozens of different powers all flocking to him the moment he¡¯s just finished a long conflict.¡± The First Tower Master lets out a sigh. ¡°At this rate no one will be able to get close to him anytime soon.¡±

    ¡°I feel like some nations may wait until he reaches Class S to show that they¡¯re different from the others,¡± the Fifteenth Tower Master says, ¡°so why don¡¯t we wait a little bit before contacting him?¡±

    ¡°Rather than that, we should be the first to contact him,¡± the Eighteenth Tower Master says, shooting down the Fifteenth Tower Master¡¯s suggestion. ¡°That way we can leave an impression on him.¡±

    ¡°We can discuss this more over the next few months, but for now there¡¯s something more pressing to deal with at hand,¡± the First Tower Master declares while raising his hand, deciding to cut off the discussion for now. ¡°There have been signs of disturbances from Chrono Island.¡±

    Silence fills the tower for several seconds at his declaration.

    Then every gaze turns towards the screen showing the Undying Magician.

    As they all realize instantly why the only time magician in the world would show signs of awakening.

 B4 | Chapter 43

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 2 | Day 31

    The moment the call connects, I find all of my team members together in one place.

    Amelia, Cyria, Sofia, Rebecca, and Aidan. All together at Cyria¡¯s place.

    I find myself stumped as I wasn¡¯t expecting to meet them all again like this so soon. Probably because some part of me was just expecting to talk to Amelia again, or at most Amelia, Cyria, and Sofia. Since she was expecting the other two to arrive soon when we spoke before.

    Not all of them at once like this.

    Before I can say anything though, Aidan just smiles at me and says, ¡°Long time no see.¡±

    That makes the faintest hint of a smile appear on my face. And just like that, I begin retelling my story once more. Albeit with a bit more ease than the last time. Partially just because of Aidan¡¯s laidback attitude.

    An attitude that hasn¡¯t changed since I met him.

    We continue talking for a while, with only the occasional interruption on both sides of the call. With some of my subordinates knocking on the door and asking for my help for some matters, and some soldiers stopping by or family returning home on their side.

    But eventually we finish the catchup from my side.

    Then they begin their own catchup as they tell me everything that¡¯s happened since we were split up.

    And it¡¯s one unexpected story, if I¡¯m being honest.

    As it turns out, the five of them took a couple weeks off to recover from the shock of losing their teammate. Also known as me. Then they were called back without a choice by the military, with the general only having been able to give them that amount of time off.

    All because of the crappy Chairman forcing the students to work. Even if he didn¡¯t force them onto the frontlines.

    After that, they fought for the military for quite a while. Earning their way up the ranks until they all became officers even before graduating from the academy and being given officer ranks for that alone.

    But they apparently never stopped thinking about me throughout the entire time. And that tainted their view of the Republic even further than how they already viewed it. The fact that not a single person they knew cared about my death.

    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.

    Although in the case of the two instructors, they pretty much already knew I was immortal. So they knew what was going on.

    They didn¡¯t know that back then though, so they just assumed not a single person so much as batted an eye at my death. Which made them grow a grudge against the Republic.

    One that just continued to grow more and more.

    And when they found out I was still alive, that grudge only grew. Because they knew exactly why I fled the Republic. Making them resent the Republic even more.

    So at the end of their explanation, I find myself rather shocked. Both due to their own experiences, and because of what they ask me after it all.

    ¡°Can we join you in the Kingdom of the Fallen?¡± Amelia and Aidan ask simultaneously without even looking at each other as they do so.

    One thought after another flashes through my mind at breakneck speeds. About the troubles they ended up going through after my disappearance. And about the possibility that someone could end up trying to use them against me.

    Whether that¡¯s the doctor ¨C although I doubt he would ¨C or the Chairman of the Republic, it¡¯s entirely possible someone could try that.

    And I honestly could see the Chairman potentially trying that. Assuming he even realizes who I am.

    What¡¯s worse is that I know the skeleton would probably just kill them if they end up being successfully used against me. Because he would see it as a weakness and a waste of time.

    So he¡¯d just get rid of them.

    Juan on the other hand would just get rid of the ones using them against me. Then probably ignore their existence.

    My thoughts halt the moment I feel a single tear trailing down my cheek. And just like that I¡¯m frozen stiff.

    A¡­ tear?

    I blink before turning my attention back to the screen as the others start asking if I¡¯m alright.

    Several seconds pass like that, then I feel the faintest hint of another smile warming my face.

    Right. If I ask the skeleton to bring them here then he¡¯d be more than happy to.

    And since he doesn¡¯t need any more hostages, I don¡¯t have to worry about him taking them and treating them like my parents. Especially since they can be used to aide in my combat strength for this war. Unlike my parents who are not combat material.

    Meaning these five will actually be helpful in the war. Which is exactly what the skeleton wants.

    He wants me to lead his nation and become a true son in a sense to him. A true successor.

    I take a deep breath before wiping the single tear and nodding my head at them as I state, ¡°Yes, you can come here. I will ask the King of the Kingdom of the Fallen to pick you up.¡±

    When I tell them yes, that they can come here, their faces light up like Christmas lights.

    But when I mention the second part? About the skeleton going to pick them up?

    Terror covers their faces.

    Right. I forgot.

    People are actually afraid of that bag of bones.

    Huh. Didn¡¯t really think about that.

    But whatever. Doesn¡¯t really matter.

    He¡¯s the best way to get them here safely after all.

    ¡°Oh, and do you want your families to come with you?¡± I ask out of curiosity, only for some of them to numbly shake their heads no and others to nod yes.

    Hmm, guess it makes sense Cyria would say no. What with her father being a general from the Republic.

    He probably wouldn¡¯t want to leave after all.

    Anyways, this will be nice.

    And I can expand my inner circle here at the Undying Caverns too. With more people I trust.

    For the first time in a while, I feel rather happy.

    I just hope I can keep this feeling for longer than the last time I felt it.

    Whenever that was.

 B4 | Chapter 44

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 1

    ¡°Very well,¡± the skeleton says with a nod of his head on the other side of the terminal call. Not even showing a hint of hesitation. ¡°I¡¯ll collect them later today and deliver them to your base tomorrow.¡±

    I stare blankly at the screen for several seconds before muttering a thank you. Following which the skeleton nods his head and ends the call without another word.

    Huh.

    Wasn¡¯t expecting it to be that easy. I knew he wouldn¡¯t have much issue with it, but I thought I¡¯d at least have to work for the help somehow.

    Not that I¡¯m complaining.

    I let out a sigh of relief before sending a message to Amelia and Aidan telling them about the skeleton¡¯s plans. Then I walk over to my lab where I begin doing some research on the new spells I got inspiration for while watching the battle between the Class S magicians.

    That battle has already had a lot of significance on the war. Mostly because of the fact that Emma, the Class S magician and leader of the White Kingdom, was killed. Leading to the White Kingdom¡¯s loss during this war.

    And since the Class S dark magician hailing from the Entaria is already dead as well, that takes two entire nations out of the war. Leaving just the Collective Kingdoms, the Republic, the Kingdom of the Fallen, Natra, and Hardlight left.

    On top of that, the Kingdom of the Fallen and Natra are working together. Thanks to me, of course.

    Meanwhile Hardlight and the Collective Kingdoms are still working together in their little alliance. One that¡¯s dropped off significantly.

    Actually, that alliance of theirs has been crumbling since the start of the war.

    First the Republic and Entaria withdrew from the alliance, only for Entaria to be kicked out of the war entirely with the death of their Class S. Then the White Kingdom was kicked out of the war as well with Emma¡¯s death.

    At this point the war has almost become a free-for-all. With the other nations fighting each other almost as much as they¡¯re fighting the Kingdom of the Fallen. Which has given us a lot of breathing room in the meantime.

    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.

    Although they are still focusing a bit more on us than the others. Strictly because they know very well that our leader can¡¯t die. So their only way of beating the Kingdom of the Fallen is through military force.

    As for the Class S magicians? They¡¯re actually staying rather quiet right now.

    The Chairman hasn¡¯t been seen on the battlefield since the clash at the lab, likely due to his injuries and exhaustion. And the doctor hasn¡¯t been seen either. Although he¡¯s rarely ever seen anyways, so that¡¯s not anything new.

    Out of the Class S magicians who are still showing their faces publicly, that being the Class S magicians of the Republic that didn¡¯t participate, the ones from the Collective Kingdoms, and the skeleton, only the skeleton is going around slaughtering enemy forces. Largely because he doesn¡¯t have to worry about dying.

    Even Juan has been careful while he recovers from the battle.

    Although why the Hardlight and Collective Kingdom Class S magicians aren¡¯t fighting in the war right now is beyond me.

    Unless it has something to do with why we haven¡¯t seen the doctor or the Chairman? That would be nice. If they¡¯d off them for us.

    Too bad it¡¯s rather unlikely.

    The war has definitely progressed though, with or without the Class S magicians. With thirteen of the previous twenty-eight nobles being killed during the war, and eight of their territories being seized entirely.

    The other five of those thirteen dead nobles were just succeeded by their successors though, with their territories successfully being defended by said successors. Leaving a total of twenty nobles left remaining now.

    All of this not counting me, of course. Since I¡¯m considered a royal and not a noble.

    I let out a sigh ¨C this one being one of exhaustion rather than relief ¨C as I continue working on my experiments. But instead of spending all day and night working on them, I actually stop after a few hours and go outside to sit on the edge of the cliff overlooking the caverns¡¯ entrance.

    The skeleton also mentioned earlier during our call that we have some people from other continents keeping an eye on the conflict here. And on me.

    And while Juan says that the other continents are nowhere near as aggressive and just plain terrible as people as the people on the abandoned continents, I still find it hard to wrap my mind around it. After all, I¡¯m just used to how magicians are on the abandoned continents.

    So I¡¯ll stick with seeing is believing.

    Until I see how the other continents work, I won¡¯t believe it.

    I lie back down on the ground to stare up at the full moon in the night¡¯s sky. Meanwhile Incendia just flies in circles in the sky, clearly stretching her wings a bit.

    It feels like I¡¯ve been locked in a continuous cycle for years now. One that I¡¯ve only just broken out of somehow.

    And that¡¯s¡­ strange.

    It just feels odd to be out of it.

    Odd to not do something productive at every single waking moment of my life.

    That said though, I¡¯ll be going back to war in just a few days. And back to experimenting.

    So I may very well reenter that cycle again.

    But for now, I¡¯ll just enjoy this peace. Especially since the team will be arriving tomorrow.

    I continue staring up at the night¡¯s sky for several minutes before eventually climbing to my feet and stretching a bit despite not needing to. Then I look around for a moment and begin heading towards the skeleton¡¯s treant.

    Because I feel like seeing my parents and just chatting right now. At least until the night is out.

    After that I¡¯ll come back to greet the team when they arrive.

 B4 | Chapter 45

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 2

    To my complete and utter surprise, the moment my team members arrive, I find myself pulled up in a large group hug. With each one of them practically jumping at me and hugging me. At which point they start crying.

    Of course, I find myself incredibly awkward as I have no idea what to do in a situation like this. And the skeleton isn¡¯t much help as he just looks slightly amused ¨C which is impressive in an of itself seeing as he has no face to look amused with ¨C before leaving without a word.

    So I¡¯m left awkwardly standing in the middle of the five teammates without knowing what to do. And I can¡¯t even move my arms or anything because they¡¯re literally pinning me here in the middle of them, arms and all.

    What¡¯s worse is that my bloodlust makes me feel slightly hungry due to their incredibly close proximity bringing the smell of their blood way too close to me for comfort. Although I reign that in rather easily at least.

    More importantly, the soldiers outside of the Undying Caverns watching us look stunned as hell. Like their entire world view is falling apart.

    So I guess there goes the stoic image I had with them.

    It ends up taking a few more minutes before the lot of them finally let me go. Then I bring them through the Undying Caverns while completely ignoring the looks from my soldiers as they kneel to me during my passing. Looks that are clearly asking something along the lines of, ¡°You have friends?!¡±

    Which I find rather insulting. Even if it¡¯s an understandable question to have.

    Fortunately for me, I don¡¯t hear a single person ask the question out loud. Even with my supernatural hearing.

    Although that¡¯s probably because of my supernatural hearing. Since it¡¯s not exactly a secret that I can hear damn near everything in the caverns.

    I continue giving them the tour while settling in the parents and family of anyone who actually brought their family along before we eventually end up in the command center of the Undying Caverns. Which has changed drastically from before.

    The command center now is a rather large room with one chair closer to the entrance of the room looking out over numerous chairs and terminals across the walls on a lower level of the room. All with several more seats that stand out a bit more on a middle level between the lower and top levels.

    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it

    Honestly, it looks rather similar to some spaceship bridges on science fiction tv shows.

    And standing behind the seat reserved for me are my other top officers.

    ¡°Let me introduce everyone,¡± I state while putting one hand in a pocket and motioning towards the first one of my top officers standing on the right. Claire, who is currently wearing a more military uniform than she usually has on. ¡°This is Claire Taylor, and she¡¯s my second in command here at the Undying Caverns.¡±

    After her, I move on to the one standing in the center. Benjamin. Who is wearing the same enforcer military uniform he always wears.

    ¡°This is Benjamin Anderson, the leader of the Undying Caverns¡¯ enforcers,¡± I tell them before glancing at them and adding, ¡°who are pretty much the military here.¡±

    Then I focus on the last of the three and finish, ¡°And this is Ryan Haris, the head of logistics here.¡±

    The old man is still wearing his kevlar armor, just like always. So there¡¯s not much different about him than the last time I saw him.

    I proceed to introduce all of my friends to my top ranking officers, along with any other officer who happens to be in the room and overhears us. Then I go ahead and sit down on my seat which is pretty much just a throne as I watch them and work on the programming of my spells at the same time. Just to see how they get along.

    Since my team will be joining them as top officers in the Undying Caverns.

    Specifically I¡¯m planning on having Aidan and Cyria work right under Benjamin in the enforcers, with Amelia being in charge of diplomacy between other nations and nobles since she¡¯s was raised in one of the leading families of the Republic, and the other two being under her command. Which I think should work well for now.

    If there are any problems then I can always address them when they come about.

    Fortunately, it looks like they¡¯re all getting along rather well. So that¡¯s good.

    Although Claire is the type who can get along with anyone. And Ryan is like an old, stern grandpa to his subordinates. Treating them like they¡¯re family when they¡¯re on his good side and beating the shit out of them if they¡¯re not. If they¡¯re his enemies or if they¡¯re traitors.

    As for Benjamin? Well, he¡¯s just staying silent and nodding his head every now and then. But I didn¡¯t really expect anything else from him if I¡¯m being honest.

    Benjamin is known in the caverns as being even quieter and more stoic than I am after all.

    I continue watching them as they move on to discuss how the Undying Caverns is currently performing. Both some of their operations along with their logistics. Including the number of people living here, the number of soldiers, and so on.

    Which actually surprises me a bit since I didn¡¯t realize we had that many soldiers.

    I knew we had a lot of new citizens living inside of the Undying Caverns, but I didn¡¯t realize there were so many new soldiers too.

    Then again, I¡¯ve seen quite a few soldiers around the place. Far more than I used to.

    I guess I just don¡¯t really pay much attention to that stuff.

    That aside, it looks like things are going well. So I finally stand up and leave the command center to head towards my lab.

    Time to go back to experimenting again.

 B4 | Chapter 46

    Somewhere in the Barren Pass

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 3

    Doctor Leodmir Archeron feels incredible irritation as he proceeds to teleport from one location to another, not having enough mana to teleport very far away. And only recovering just enough mana to teleport shorter distances between each teleportation. All while fleeing from his pursuers.

    After leaving the battle with the other Class S magicians and making it back to his base in the Barren Pass, he was ambushed by even more Class S magicians. Including Class S magicians who used to be his own allies against the Chairman of the Republic.

    Dorothy Umbra and Afvalder von Schr?der, two Class S magicians from the Republic and a poison and light affinity magicians respectively. Along with Violet Fox, a Collective Kingdoms Class S poison affinity magician.

    And when he asked why they were trying to kill him instead of the Chairman, since every single one of the Class S magicians have problems with the Chairman for one reason or another, they answered that there was also an ambush on him at the same time. Completely shutting down any potential for him to get out of the situation in an easy manner.

    The doctor grits his teeth in a rare visible showing of irritation. Because he was supposed to go in and snatch up the subject during the conflict between the Class S magicians earlier before going back to his research and leaving the entire conflict behind him.

    But he wasn¡¯t expecting the Chairman to be there. The one man who can easily block any teleportation right away nearby himself.

    Not even the skeleton can stop him from teleporting in and teleporting out with the boy if he knew exactly where the boy was and could go in and out with ease. The only reason he¡¯s never been able to capture him before was the barrier the skeleton constantly had on him to block out Leodmir¡¯s perception of him.

    A barrier that the wind affinity Class S magician had shattered during her own mission to capture him while he was fighting her army.

    In the end, he didn¡¯t get a single thing from the battle against the other Class S magicians. Other than wounding the Chairman. And he had to leave empty-handed.

    Leodmir tilts his head to one side to avoid a fist coated in radiation that flies straight past his head where it was previously at. Then he manages to teleport away once more, appearing in a frigid cave underground. One of the many he took note of while scouting the land in the Barren Pass.

    Right now he¡¯s stuck in a stalemate against the three Class S magicians. Since none of them have been able to capture him for over an entire day now, and he¡¯s not able to escape them either.

    This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.

    All because the two poison magicians coated the entire surface in a thick fog of poison while the light magician travels with his entire body turned into light so that he can pass through the ice without worrying about the poison. Completely limiting where Leodmir can go as he travels from one underground cave to another.

    He barely even has the mana to put up any sort of barrier when he arrives, much less fully protect himself from the poison.

    But even if Afvalder is as fast as light physically, he still has to spend several seconds with every teleportation to figure out where Leodmir teleported to exactly.

    The most infuriating part of all this to Leodmir though is that he can¡¯t even wait them out for them to run out of mana. Because they have three people amongst them while he is all alone. So every time one of them starts to run low, the others just stall him out to keep him here.

    Completely blocking any manner of escape Leodmir can think of.

    And the thought of being trapped in an endless chase by inferior magicians of basic affinities is absolutely intolerable to Leodmir.

    But he can¡¯t do anything about it but continue fleeing.

    <hr>

    Somewhere in the Republic

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 3

    It is right about now that the Chairman of the Republic strongly regrets a great many things he¡¯s done in the recent years. Not out of remorse or any feeling like that, but because of the situation he now finds himself stuck in.

    As he holds off three Class S magicians all at once.

    One of which is a former subordinate of his at that. The water Class S magician, Archibald Winters. Meanwhile the other two are enemies. The enhancement Class S magician, Edgar Brodnax, and the ice specialized water Class S magician, Katherine Nash.

    And they¡¯re all fighting against him with full tanks of mana, making the only reason he isn¡¯t being annihilated right away being that he is in his own base. One he¡¯s lined up with defenses all over the place.

    Because, unlike what many people assume, Artorius Hunter is incredibly paranoid. So paranoid that he has placed more traps and other defenses in his personal base than he believes are in the entire Republic.

    So the three Class S magicians are struggling to break inside of the defenses around the base.

    But struggling and not getting anywhere are different things. And even Artorius can tell that they¡¯re very slowly making progress.

    Which leaves him stuck with hoping that the defenses last long enough for him to recover his mana.

    Only then will he stand a chance against all three of them. With the use of anti-magic mana to cancel out all of their own mana and turn it into a fight without magic.

    When the Chairman first heard about the Undying Magician, his first thought was to capture him to try to figure out how he became immortal. Just like all of the other Class S magicians out there. All the other magicians out there in general on the abandoned continents.

    But when he realized that the anti-magic mana running through his body would likely ruin any chance at immortality for himself, he decided to instead capture the boy so that no one else would be able to use him. Then decide what to do with him after that.

    And the White Kingdom¡¯s capture of the boy gave him a perfect chance to make a move.

    Or at least, that¡¯s what Artorius believed.

    Now he understands that this kidnapping may end up being the main turning point in the war.

    And not a good turning point for Artorius.

    For now, he has no choice but to try to hold out against the Class S magicians and free himself before the death and fire magicians manage to recover from the battle to take advantage of his situation.

    So Artorius simply sits down in his meditation chamber and begins to focus on recovering his mana while his defenses protect him.

 B4 | Chapter 47

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 5

    Several days pass after the arrival of my former team, and surprisingly enough, they end up fitting in very well. Better than I fit in, actually. Which is¡­ bizarre. But not at the same time, seeing as I¡¯m an immortal vampire.

    Just as I planned, Aidan and Cyria have been working under Benjamin in the enforcers while Amelia has been leading diplomacy in the base with Sofia and Rebecca under her supervision. And while I was honestly expecting Aidan¡¯s damn near immediate adapting to the changes and getting along with the other enforcers, I wasn¡¯t expecting Cyria to get along with them all so well right away too.

    Cyria was never the most social of people after all. So I was expecting her to take a while to adapt to the changes.

    But nope. All the enforcers took to her right away, welcoming her along with Aidan in with warm welcomes. And she turned out to be a lot more social than I remember her being.

    On top of that, Aidan surprised me with how strong he¡¯s become. Since I don¡¯t remember him being all that strong from when I last saw him.

    Yet now he¡¯s strong enough to impress some of the enforcers. Which is impressive in its own right.

    Although his personality hasn¡¯t really changed much. Except that I have noticed that he isn¡¯t as laidback as before.

    At least not when battling.

    But I get the feeling some of that is because of me. Since all of them seem to have gone through some tough times since my disappearance.

    Which I do feel a bit sorry for.

    I¡¯d feel more sorry for it if I was actually the one responsible for that. But I wasn¡¯t. So it¡¯s not really my fault.

    The only reason I feel a little sorry for it is because I didn¡¯t tell them about my being immortal beforehand. And even that is a bit of a stretch.

    As for Amelia and her team? There isn¡¯t much diplomacy going on right now since we¡¯re at war, and a lot of the nobles don¡¯t particularly like me. So they go out of their way to avoid me.

    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.

    But there are also several nobles who are allies. Which has led to some negotiations.

    We¡¯re not absolutely required to aid in the war. Even if we are counted amongst the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s forces for the whole ¡®must defeat a certain percentage of the forces of a nation to win¡¯ thing.

    And since we¡¯re not required to help, we have room to negotiate benefits for helping them. Which has led to Amelia working together with the enforcers to send some reinforcements to some of the nobles who are in trouble. All for a generous amount of compensation, both in material form and in the form of magical knowledge.

    I actually find myself feeling more than a little impressed by how much she¡¯s managed to do in just a few days. To the point of no longer worrying about them at all.

    She¡¯s even working efficiently together with Claire, who finally has a lot more free time herself now that some of her responsibilities have been passed off to other people. Specifically to Amelia.

    After all, Claire was the one handling any diplomacy we had before. Along with a myriad of other things, including but not limited to running the base, managing team meetings between the top officers, assigning duties to those outside of the structure of the top officers departments, deciding on the layout of the base and city within the Caverns, and so on.

    In all honesty, she was probably a little overworked. I just never realized until now since I pay so little attention to the Undying Caverns as it is.

    There are so many things I¡¯m starting to notice after meeting with my friends again¡­ but it¡¯s time to go back to the battlefield now. To go back to experimenting and improving myself.

    I¡¯ve been working on training my mana arcs this entire time, along with messing with learning mana manipulation, so I haven¡¯t just been sitting here doing nothing. Even if I¡¯m on a bit of a vacation right now.

    Despite that, I need to go back to the frontlines. And I don¡¯t feel anything about what I¡¯ll be doing there regardless of these new things I¡¯m feeling after reuniting with them.

    I tap my armrest as I sit on the throne in my rather grand looking throne room ¨C a place created for me by Claire during my absence on the battlefield.

    After thinking for a bit longer on all the new developments, I go ahead and let out a sigh before standing up from my throne. Then I put my hands in my pockets and begin leaving the throne room. All while sending out messages to the top officers and my friends about my departure back to the battlefield.

    I haven¡¯t heard from the skeleton since he dropped the others off here, so I¡¯m not sure what¡¯s going on with him. But Juan sounds like he wants to get back to training me again. And I want to reach Class S as soon as I can.

    It certainly doesn¡¯t hurt that my experimentation to improve my spells has the side effect of helping with the war effort. Which means more favors from the other nobles that Amelia can use for the Undying Caverns.

    As I¡¯m stepping out of the throne room with some soldiers closing the door behind me and continuing to stand guard there, I get some messages on my terminal. All of whom are from the top officers and friends I just messaged myself. And all of them are well wishes or affirmatives, varying depending on who they¡¯re from.

    So with that, I finally leave the Undying Caverns again to head back to the battlefield. While making sure to send a message to Juan as I do so.

    Time to continue the experiments.

 B4 | Chapter 48

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 6

    On my way to the frontlines of the war, I go ahead and check up with the situation out there. On every battlefield at that and not just the one I¡¯m currently heading to.

    And what I find is rather interesting.

    First off, the Kingdom of the Fallen is still being attacked from every direction. With each nation having gained a foothold after claiming at least one of the nobles territories on the borders. But the White Kingdom and Entaria both lost their footholds and retreated when their Class S magicians were killed, and they were kicked out of the conflict. Leading to the other powers fighting over control of their empty territories.

    Although one of the territory owners is now our ally and is aiding in protecting us rather than attacking.

    So of the directions, the Collective Kingdoms is attacking from the East. Then there¡¯s the Republic that is attacking from the South. Followed by Hardlight in the West, and Natra holding territory in the North.

    Albeit with Natra just defending the North at this point rather than attacking from it. Which has been helpful.

    As for who has taken the most territory? That would be the Republic, followed by the Collective Kingdoms, then a decent gap and Hardlight. All because Hardlight is by far the weakest nation left in the running.

    Sorta.

    Hardlight as a nation itself is stronger than the Kingdom of the Fallen. Just because it has better technology and is a tiny bit larger in general. It¡¯s also a lot more together as a nation than the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    But at the same time, its far weaker in military power than the other nations. Especially in terms of its Class S magician.

    After all, the Class S magician of Hardlight specializes in healing magic. Which is why she hasn¡¯t been in all that many of the conflicts against the other Class S magicians.

    At least not many public ones.

    I have heard that the Class S magicians are all rather busy right now attacking the doctor and Chairman. And neither of the two, who have been weakened by their battle at the laboratory, have managed to get away.

    Which is causing problems on the frontlines. For the other nations, that is. Not the Kingdom.

    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.

    All because Juan and the skeleton are taking advantage of this to attack the Republic and the Collective Kingdoms¡¯ territories. Rather rapidly reclaiming them for Natra and the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    As for Hardlight¡¯s alliance with the Collective Kingdoms? I¡¯m not sure how long that will stand.

    They kind of need the alliance to deal with Natra and the Kingdom of the Fallen regardless of whether or not their current assault manages to take out the Chairman or not. But at the same time, neither of the two nations have really ever seen eye to eye. And Katherine from Hardlight thinks only about her nation as a whole. She doesn¡¯t think about her personal gains like the other two nations.

    On top of that, the two Class S magicians of the Collective Kingdoms are¡­ rather personal in their motivations.

    Violet only cares about her own alchemy related stuff and probably doesn¡¯t give a shit about the war. And Edgar just enjoys fighting.

    So neither of their leaders actually care about the war if I had to guess.

    Although they probably care about the whole not dying part. Which means if push comes to shove they¡¯ll look out for each other rather than their nation. Unlike Katherine who will look out for her nation over herself.

    All that said, I decide to head to Hardlight¡¯s territory to claim some of that back while I experiment with my mana manipulation and spells. Seeing as that¡¯s the only place without one of our Class S magicians attacking. And because they¡¯re in an alliance too.

    Not to mention that it¡¯s the weakest of the three right now.

    It makes it the ideal target for me.

    So while I finish making my way towards the West, I go ahead and figure out which spells I want to experiment on. Starting with a spell similar to the one I saw Juan pull off. One that was literally burning reality.

    And while I know I can¡¯t actually make one like that yet, seeing as I don¡¯t have the mana to even pull a spell like that off, I can work on the basic idea behind it.

    As for the rest of my time on the battlefield? I still need to focus on my mana manipulation.

    After all, being able to manipulate mana without a spell circle¡­ it just seems so interesting. Not to mention powerful.

    I think back on the Class S battle over the laboratory. At how fast their reactions were. And how none of them could predict what the others would do next since there wasn¡¯t any spell circles at least implying where their spells were targeting. Or giving away that they were even using a spell in the first place.

    Although I¡¯m sure a Class S magician can easily sense when they¡¯re using magic no matter how fast they¡¯re using it, unlike me. Since I could only notice a tiny trace that they were using magic. And only after the effects already started.

    It was just too small a trace to notice when they first start manipulating mana.

    When someone uses a spell circle, they have to use mana to create the spell circle. Then they use the spell itself, which takes a very brief amount of time to activate.

    And during the time of creating the spell circle, magicians can sense the mana. All before the spell even starts.

    But with direct mana manipulation the Class S magician just immediately starts the spell without any spell circle formation period.

    Overall, it¡¯s a massive powerup on the battlefield.

    So I want to master direct mana manipulation as fast as I can. Which means I need to train as much as possible.

    My eyes narrow as I continue flying through the air using my flight spell in the direction of the closest battlefield.

    The sooner I become Class S, the sooner it¡¯ll be that I won¡¯t have to worry about others capturing me.

    Probably.

 B4 | Chapter 49

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 6

    When I get to the closest battlefield, I immediately set out to begin killing the enemy soldiers on it while trying again to master mana manipulation. And, of course, I make sure to stop every now and then to work on that new spell. But I don¡¯t just focus on the spell since I know I won¡¯t be able to use it right now anyways.

    So several days begin to pass slowly as I work mostly on my mana manipulation but also that spell a little. During which time the enemy forces gradually begin to pull back. Most likely due to my presence pushing them back.

    And the noble forces fighting them along with me cheer at this turn of events.

    But I ignore all of it to focus on my mana manipulation, which I haven¡¯t gotten much progress on throughout this.

    We continue to push the enemy forces back more and more all the way until we push them back to the border of the current territories between us and the territory they¡¯ve claimed thus far. Then I decide to change things up a little and jump straight past them, heading towards one of their fortresses where their important figures are for the war.

    I¡¯m not making much progress on my mana manipulation right now, and these enemy commanders are all just sitting safely in their fortresses. So it would probably be a good idea¡­

    I stop as I¡¯m in the middle of pulling out my sniper rifle. And after a brief hesitation, I go ahead and put it away. Then I continue moving towards the shores of the Kingdom of the Fallen, where I find Hardlight¡¯s ships all moored.

    Before I deal with the commanders in the fortresses, I should deal with these ships.

    So without any further hesitation, I enter the water from a ways away from the ships. Then I begin to swim upwards when I get close to them while coating myself in death energy to avoid any sort of life sensors.

    Although I can¡¯t really avoid devices that detect movement down here. But doing it this way should at least convince them that I¡¯m just debris floating up to the surface or something.

    I continue to swim upwards before finally reaching the edge of the ship. Then I fly out of the water and onto the side of the ship. Where I quickly set about preparing numerous explosives all around the ship. And after that I move on to do the same thing to all the other ships.

    This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.

    Of course, enemy soldiers occasionally catch me, and I¡¯ve been caught on numerous security cameras by now. But these ships aren¡¯t manned with enough powerful magicians for it to matter.

    To the point that I honestly just end up ripping the throats out of everyone on the later ships when it comes to some of the ships that found me almost immediately.

    Unfortunately for these battleships though, they¡¯re made to defend against outside threats. Not to defend against intruders inside of the ship that got in before they could stop me. And even the ones that did find me before I got on board still couldn¡¯t stop me for obvious reasons.

    So over the course of several hours, I manage to go through each and every ship setting up explosives. No doubt making the enemy leaders back in the fortresses and on their own homelands aware of my actions by now.

    But I don¡¯t really care if they¡¯re aware or not at this point. I just quickly begin to make my way back to the fortress where I set myself up high in the sky with my sniper rifle out. All the way above the clouds.

    Then I aim at the closest fortress to search for high ranking officials and higher Class magicians. All with a little screen pulled up in front of me showing me the faces of several of their higher Class magicians.

    And the moment I get one in my sights, I activate the explosives in one of the ships and pull the trigger on a death flames enhanced bullet. Blowing up one of the ships entirely the moment the bullet fires and penetrates through the skull of the magician.

    Then I move on to the next high Class magician or officer and do the same thing. Blowing up a ship right as I pull the trigger.

    One after another. All with only a small amount of the enemies even being aware that their leaders are being sniped one after another.

    Because they can¡¯t hear the sound of the gunshot over the explosives. And I am trying to take out the leaders that are alone or almost alone first.

    Of course, this only lasts for so long. Both because there aren¡¯t an infinite number of ships, and because there are some who see their leaders getting sniped and report it. So I eventually find myself being fired back at even as I move between different fortresses the moment I finish up with the enemy leaders at any particular fortress.

    But through this, I manage to kill off a large majority of the enemy forces by the time I blow up their last ship.

    Overall, I¡¯m rather proud with this little job. Even if I probably wouldn¡¯t have been able to pull it off if the enemy¡¯s Class S magician was here.

    The enemy¡¯s Class A magicians would¡¯ve caused some annoyance, but that¡¯s all they would¡¯ve done. Unless they all came out at once.

    But I made sure that wouldn¡¯t happen by doing it the way I did.

    Eventually I return to working on training my mana manipulation while just running around their armies on the ground. Armies that are in complete shambles now. And as I do that, I hear through my terminal¡¯s connection with the nobles here that they are registering more enemy reinforcements being set out from Hardlight.

    Too bad I doubt they¡¯ll make the same mistakes again.

    A pity.

    Anyways, back to training.

 B4 | Chapter 50

    The Alliance Headquarters

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 21

    ¡°He has been slaughtering my forces for weeks now! Are you not going to do anything to deal with this problem?!¡± the acting ruler of Hardlight shouts across the large round table ¨C one far too large for the two people in the room ¨C at the current king of the Collective Kingdoms.

    ¡°Both your nation and our own have already decided to leave the Undying Magician be,¡± the King of the Collective Kingdoms states with a cold look on his face.

    The acting ruler of Hardlight glares at the King of the Collective Kingdom and slams his fists on the table as he shouts, ¡°You just don¡¯t want to draw his attention to the Collective Kingdoms! What sort of alliance is this that you can-¡±

    ¡°An alliance of necessity,¡± the King of the Collective Kingdoms says, cutting off Hardlight¡¯s own ruler. Then he says, ¡°Without the aid of a Class S magician, we won¡¯t be able to hold the Undying Magician. We¡¯ve learned that much from his time in the White Kingdom¡¯s captivity. And we have also learned what happens to those who kidnap him.¡± He shakes his head with a frown and looks at the screen that appears above the large table showing the Undying Magician¡¯s current actions on the battlefield. ¡°The only ones who could hope to capture him and keep him from the Dead King and Fire Overlord are our own enemies.¡±

    Silence fills the chamber as the two stare at the screen for several seconds.

    Eventually the silence is broken when the King of the Collective Kingdoms states, ¡°So we wait until the plan is complete. Then we try to draw the Undying Magician over to our side. Or keep him out of the conflict entirely.¡±

    The Ruler of Hardlight grits his teeth as a wave of fury envelopes him. Because he knows full well that the Collective Kingdoms is just sacrificing Hardlight as a decoy while their plan goes through to kill the doctor and the Chairman.

    Silence once again fills the chamber before the Ruler of Hardlight calls a pause on the meeting and both leaders move to other rooms. At which point the Ruler of Hardlight makes a quick call to the Class S magician of Hardlight to inform her of the news.

    And to his complete lack of surprise, he gets the answer he was both expecting and hoping for. Then he proceeds to go back into the meeting chamber and once again meets with the King of the Collective Kingdom.

    But this time he goes in with over a dozen soldiers, making the king narrow his eyes. Both with understanding and irritation.

    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    Almost like he knows exactly what the Ruler of Hardlight is planning on doing.

    And the Ruler of Hardlight is pretty sure he probably does know. It¡¯s not hard to figure out considering who the Class S magician of Hardlight is.

    So without any hesitation, the Ruler of Hardlight declares, ¡°Hardlight will officially be leaving the Alliance starting now.¡± Then he nods his head once in respect for his former ally and leaves the chamber, along with the fully crumbled alliance behind.

    An alliance that no longer has anyone in it other than the Collective Kingdoms. Marking the complete and utter end of the alliance as a whole.

    And it doesn¡¯t take long before the Ruler of Hardlight makes a call to the Dead King personally.

    When the call picks up, the Ruler of Hardlight immediately declares, ¡°Hardlight officially requests of the Kingdom of the Fallen to accept Hardlight as an annexed state of the Kingdom of the Fallen with independent ruling rights.¡±

    ¡°Very well,¡± the Dead King answers immediately without any hesitation or emotion in his voice. ¡°Contact my son about the details.¡±

    Then he hands up the call without another word, making the Ruler of Hardlight let out a sigh of relief.

    The reason the Ruler of Hardlight decided to submit to the Kingdom of the Fallen is a simple one.

    Their Class S magician requested it.

    There¡¯s no more reason than that.

    Katherine Nash cares about nothing more than her own nation¡¯s safety and influence. But with the way the war has been going recently, Hardlight would eventually end up destroyed and under someone else¡¯s control anyways. So submitting to a force that isn¡¯t the one who betrayed them and also isn¡¯t the one they were previously attacking is the only way for them to survive.

    And doing it this way grants them individual ruling rights even if they are under the Kingdom of the Fallen¡¯s control in the end.

    On top of all of that, the Kingdom of the Fallen is the only power with an alliance still remaining, and they¡¯re led by the Dead King and Fire Overlord. With an immortal magician sculking the battlefields.

    The Ruler of Hardlight, Arnold Hardlight, frowns as he walks through the halls of the alliance headquarters with his soldiers all around him to protect him from any possible retaliation by the Collective Kingdoms. But no retaliation ever comes even as he leaves the building and enters his own battleship on the shore outside of it.

    After giving out numerous commands while making his way to the bridge of the ship ¨C specifically ones to end hostilities with the Kingdom of the Fallen ¨C Arnold finally stops, takes a deep breath, and begins to look for the Undying Magician¡¯s contact details. Only to find nothing but contact details for his organization.

    The Undying Caverns.

    Arnold takes a deep breath before glancing at a notification on his terminal telling him that Katherine is finally ending her assault on the anti-magic magician and returning back to the base. Having at least succeeded in freezing his arm and destroying it. Completely killing off the cells near it and in his body¡¯s own blueprint to make it impossible to heal.

    She would have done a bit more, but the battle was too dangerous, and her priority is to protect her own nation. Not to kill the Chairman.

    So after feeling a little relieved to know that Katherine is returning, Arnold finally focuses on calling the Undying Caverns.

 B4 | Chapter 51

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 21

    While I¡¯m in the middle of a short break from slaughtering the Hardlight forces, I end up getting a rather large surprise. One in the form of a call from Amelia telling me about Hardlight¡¯s annexation by the Kingdom of the Fallen. And to be more specific, by me. Without me ever even hearing about it until after the annexation finished.

    Huh.

    Well then.

    That does explain why the Hardlight forces started to retreat while I was taking this little break. Since I was rather surprised when I saw that.

    Anyways, it looks like the Class S magician of Hardlight wants to meet me? Also, she has stopped her assault on the Chairman. Surprisingly after permanently taking one of his arms.

    So that¡¯s interesting.

    I wasn¡¯t expecting the Chairman to actually fall to their little ambush. Same with the doctor. So hearing that he¡¯s suffered a major crippling and permanent injury is actually a little surprising.

    Eventually I answer Amelia, telling her that I¡¯ll meet with the Class S magician. Then I begin to head back to the Undying Caverns again now that I no longer have any reason to stay at the frontlines between us and Hardlight.

    I guess this means the enemy alliance has officially crumbled to dust now. Without a single hint of it remaining.

    That thought has the faintest hint of a smile spreading across my face.

    Nice. So now we only have to deal with the Republic and the Collective Kingdoms.

    Oh, and the doctor, who is on his own in all of this.

    Speaking of the doctor, while I¡¯m on my way to the Undying Caverns for this little meeting, I get some news about him as well. Specifically that he managed to wound one of the three Class S magicians who ambushed him. But their ambush is still under way, and he¡¯s still on the run from them.

    Which means he¡¯s still out of the picture in terms of the battle.

    I¡¯m sure the skeleton finds all of this hilarious. What with how the doctor and Chairman were the ones who originally started this whole war. Yet now they¡¯re in this pitiful situation.

    Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.

    With one of them permanently missing an arm and still under ambush by two Class S magicians, and the other fleeing from three Class S magicians out of a lack of mana reserves remaining.

    It¡¯s pure irony at this point.

    All that said, I wish it was the doctor with the crippling injury instead of the Chairman. Because of everything that man has done to me throughout my life.

    But I guess he¡¯s technically in a worse situation right now than the Chairman, so it¡¯s probably fine?

    After all, while the Chairman is still one versus two, he has his base and all the defenses there protecting him against the two. Meanwhile the doctor is one versus three and without any defenses.

    It doesn¡¯t matter that the Chairman is missing an arm right now in all that.

    It¡¯s only a matter of time before he gets an injury too. Which will most likely be some sort of poison, considering that two of his enemy Class S magicians are poison affinity ones.

    Especially considering how the majority of the Barren Pass ¨C the place his base is located in ¨C has been turned into a poisoned wasteland. One filled with radioactivity on top of that thanks to the light magician chasing him on top of the poison ones.

    So at this point his base is pretty much uninhabitable even if he wins this.

    I¡¯d be surprised if he can even make it back to his base to get his research notes without wearing some sort of protective suit. Or just using his magic to protect himself, since that should be possible too.

    Not right now though. Not while he¡¯s on the run.

    Anyways, I continue making my way back to the Undying Caverns while working on my mana manipulation along the way. Trying over and over again to control my mana directly and use it outside of my body.

    I just keep trying to form even the most basic of spells, only for the mana to go out of my control and pretty much blow up my arm in the process every time without fail. Which probably makes for a rather bizarre sight from the ground.

    Makes me wonder if someone passing beneath me might think I¡¯m fireworks or something. Just from the explosions occasionally blowing me up.

    Probably not.

    I continue flying through the sky, only to eventually come to a grinding halt when I actually succeed in managing to shoot out a tiny bolt of flames without any sort of spell. Something I did without even really realizing it since I¡¯ve just been repeating things over and over again nonstop with tiny miniscule changes to how.

    Did I actually¡­ just succeed? At performing a spell without a spell circle?

    I stare blankly at my own hand before trying to do exactly what I just did again. But this time I fail miserably as my arm blows up in my face.

    No, I¡¯m sure I managed to do it. I just have to try to copy exactly what I just did.

    So I completely forget about the original goal of this little trip as I float in the air trying over and over again to do it again.

    It isn¡¯t until I get a call from my terminal that I remember what the point of this little flight was and begin heading towards the Undying Caverns again.

    Except now I have the faintest hint of a smile on my face that I can¡¯t seem to remove. Even as I continue trying over and over again while flying towards the Undying Caverns to repeat what I did earlier.

    I¡¯m getting closer to my goal of becoming a Class S magician.

    It¡¯s only a matter of time now. With both the mana manipulation and the mana arcs.

    Just a matter of time.

 B4 | Chapter 52

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 21

    To my surprise, when I arrive at the Undying Caverns, I find more than just the people I was expecting to find there.

    Overall, there is the ruler of Hardlight, Hardlight¡¯s Class S magician, the skeleton, Juan, and the most surprising of all being someone I recognize rather well. With that being Lilith Marshall.

    The Dark Magic Chairperson of the Arcanian Republic¡¯s Council.

    And on top of that, she¡¯s also Amelia¡¯s mother.

    The hell is a higher up of the Republic doing here? They¡¯re our enemies¡­

    Unless she decided to join us because Amelia did? Or something like that?

    My suspicions turn out to be very wrong when I enter the meeting room and the skeleton declares, ¡°It would appear that the Republic¡¯s own forces wish to rebel and kill their own Chairman.¡±

    That makes my mind blank out for a moment. And I¡¯m not the only one as Juan seems a little surprised and the Class S magician of Hardlight looks shocked.

    But I guess it makes some sense? Seeing as the Republic is pretty much just becoming a dictatorship with the Chairman forcefully ruling over the nation without giving anyone any real control.

    I just wasn¡¯t expecting it.

    So the Republic¡¯s people are coming to us for help while their Chairman is still under attack by the Collective Kingdoms and one of their own Class S magicians?

    ¡°Additionally, the Chairman of the Republic has proven far more tenacious than anyone could¡¯ve expected,¡± the skeleton continues, surprising me a little bit. ¡°He has invented a new anti-magic spell to completely block the effects of magic on his body while it is activated after losing his arm. Which is making it difficult for the two currently attacking him to deal him any damage.¡±

    Oh. Well that¡¯s¡­

    Unexpected.

    ¡°Can he still use magic while the spell is activated, or is he limited as well?¡± Juan asks while frowning and crossing his arms.

    The skeleton answers while still staring at Lilith, who doesn¡¯t look even the slightest bit phased by sitting in a room with so many Class S magicians, ¡°Artorius is able to use magic spells still while it is activated, but the most he can do are spells with the help of a magic circle and only up to Tier VIII.¡±

    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.

    Juan focuses on Lilith as he asks, ¡°So to make it clear, he cannot be killed or harmed by magic right now, but he can still use magic with spell circles while he himself keeps the protection spell activated? And the Tier of the spell he can activate is limited on top of this?¡±

    Lilith nods her head and answers, ¡°That is correct, Fire Overlord. Winters and the Class S magician from the Collective Kingdoms are keeping him at bay, but neither of them are capable of dealing any harm to him anymore.¡±

    ¡°So the only way to kill him now would be through brute force strength and weapons¡­¡± Juan mutters to himself while looking down. ¡°And enhancement magic won¡¯t be effective thanks to his anti-magic.¡±

    The others in the room look down in thought as I sit on a chair around the large round table we¡¯re at, just waiting for them to figure this out as I don¡¯t really care much. Until they all suddenly lift their heads and glance in my direction.

    At which point it hits me.

    Well that¡¯s annoying.

    Juan glances at Lilith and asks, ¡°So the reason you came to ask us for help was for Nathan?¡±

    The woman nods her head while staring at me with a faint smile, ¡°A vampire¡¯s strength is natural and not caused by enhancement magic strengthening his body. Therefore Nathan should be able to kill the Chairman if he can get close enough. And with the Chairman¡¯s magic being limited, he may very well be able to pull it off.¡±

    Great. Now the job is being tossed to me.

    ¡°We of the Republic will fully surrender to the Kingdom of the Fallen should you manage to kill the Chairman,¡± Lilith declares while turning her attention back to the skeleton again. ¡°Will you accept this deal?¡±

    The skeleton waves at me and says, ¡°This is up to the kid.¡±

    My eyes widen at the fact that he¡¯s actually giving me a choice for a first. Since he normally doesn¡¯t really give me a choice.

    Then again, the way things are going, the Chairman will eventually lose one way or another. Whether it¡¯s from his forces being annihilated by the skeleton and Juan while he is busy trying to survive, or through this. So the war will end in our favor either way.

    It¡¯s just that the Chairman will end up being a major problem in the future if he survives now. Which it¡¯s looking like he will without my help to take him down.

    But the skeleton probably doesn¡¯t care about that so long a the victor in the war is decided.

    I look down while clenching my fist a little. Then I remember everything the Chairman forced on my old team while they were fighting in the war.

    Well, damn.

    I let out a sigh.

    Well, whatever. This will give me the chance to fight against a Class S magicians with a handicap. So I might as well try it.

    I look up at the skeleton and nod my head, declaring, ¡°I will help.¡±

    Lilith smiles at me and says, ¡°Thank you, Nathan.¡± Then she turns serious again as she continues, ¡°I will bring you up to speed about the Chairman¡¯s personal spells, his fighting style, the weapons he uses, and everything you will need to know to win this battle.¡±

    I nod my head in understanding with that. Because I¡¯ll probably need everything I can to win against a Class S magician.

    Even if said Class S magician is crippled, immune to magic, and can only use weakened spells and only with a spell circle right now. So pretty much at the weakest he¡¯ll ever be.

    Regardless, this will take the war one step closer to being finished.

    Which means I¡¯ll be one step closer to freeing my parents.

 B4 | Chapter 53

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    A couple days later I find myself on a flight to the Republic of Arcania for the first time in quite a while. But I don¡¯t pay attention to my surroundings as I go. I just make sure to review everything I¡¯ve learned about the Chairman up until now.

    First off, the Chairman is the first anti-magic specialized magician in centuries. In fact, he may very well be the only anti-magic magician to have ever existed on the abandoned continents. Which is how he managed to rise to where he is now as the Chairman of the Republic.

    The man specializes in bladed weapons with very little if any use of guns outside of sniper rifles back in his earlier days. When he used to snipe enemy officers with his anti-magic bullets.

    Now he just generally specializes in using his blades in direct combat while enhancing his body directly with anti-magic mana. But not by literally strengthening his body but rather through controlling his body with anti-magic mana like a puppet to throw out stronger attacks than his human body should be able to perform.

    He also uses his anti-magic mana to fly around and to just avoid attacks in general, or to protect against attacks and break other magicians¡¯ spells. Which is one of the biggest uses of anti-magic mana in the first place.

    And now on top of all of that he is also immune to magic entirely. So no magic can harm him whatsoever.

    But thanks to his barriers around himself that he always keeps up, a normal mortal weapon cannot make its way to his skin to harm him. And if someone tries to enhance their body with enhancement magic or some other magic, his anti-magic will cancel out the enhancement entirely.

    Making it so that nothing can harm him right now.

    Nothing except a person who is just supernaturally strong like me. Someone who doesn¡¯t need magic to enhance their body and can break his barrier with an Arcadian Metal sword through my own brute force strength.

    To make matters worse, Edgar, the enhancement Class S magician, fled the moment he heard about Lilith rushing to the Kingdom of the Fallen. So he isn¡¯t even helping hold the chairman at bay anymore.

    And more importantly, the Class S magician is now perfectly capable of attacking the Kingdom of the Fallen while we¡¯re gone. Or Natra at that.

    Which means we can¡¯t even rely on the skeleton or Juan¡¯s help as they need to focus on protecting their territories lest one of the other Class S magicians arrive and start a massacre.

    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.

    And our forces don¡¯t number enough to be able to survive a massacre like that for long before we drop beneath the casualties mark for losing the war.

    On another note though, I will have the help of some Class A magicians along with the Class S magician of Hardlight and the Class S magician currently still attacking the Chairman. Mostly because the Class S magician of Hardlight only left the battle because of the Class S magician from the Collective Kingdoms. But they left the battlefield, so there¡¯s no reason for her to avoid it anymore.

    As for the Class S magician currently still attacking the Chairman? He is actually a relative of Sophia. So there¡¯s that. Not a close relative, but a relative, nonetheless.

    The only thing I had to make absolutely sure to do before leaving on this mission though was to discuss it with Rebecca.

    Because I know that the Chairman is Rebecca¡¯s relative as well.

    But as it turns out, she doesn¡¯t care about her uncle. In fact, she doesn¡¯t like him. So she is perfectly happy with him being killed.

    In fact, most of their family isn¡¯t particularly happy with what he¡¯s been doing. Even the current head of the Hunter family.

    I¡¯m rather relieved at that. Because while Rebecca wasn¡¯t too close to me, she was still someone I worked with.

    I continue my flight over towards the Republic for another couple hours before we finally get within sight of the battlefield where the Chairman is fighting Winters. And what a battlefield it is.

    The entire battlefield is covered in ice, with a massive base that is completely frozen solid despite cracks repeatedly forming and ice just dissipating around said cracks. Like the mana in them is just vanishing or something.

    But Winters just replaces the ice again instantly, making sure the base stays frozen solid.

    And the man inside of it stays inside.

    Looks like he¡¯s been struggling a lot with this¡­

    We continue flying until we¡¯re right outside of the base, with Katherine letting me down off of the floating chunk of ice she was using to carry us both. Mostly because using my own mana to fly would have wasted some of my reserves. Reserves that I need quite a bit for this battle.

    And after we touch the ground, I find Archibald Winters approaching the two of us while still making sure to keep an eye on the base.

    The man has brown hair and glowing blue eyes that look almost like water. Both because he¡¯s currently using ice and water magic to keep the Chairman at bay and because of his attunement to the water affinity. Just like how Juan¡¯s eyes glow red thanks to his understanding of the fire affinity.

    He¡¯s also wearing a strong looking set of aqua blue armor. Armor that looks like it¡¯s made entirely of Arcadian Metal, albeit died blue.

    So that¡¯s interesting.

    What¡¯s more interesting though is that he doesn¡¯t have any weapons on his person. Not even a single one.

    ¡°So this is him?¡± Archibald asks while glancing between Lilith ¨C who came with me and Katherine ¨C and myself. ¡°The Undying Magician?¡± When Lilith nods her head, he focuses on me and states, ¡°Please kill him for the sake of the Republic. I will aid you in any way I can.¡±

    Huh. He¡¯s rather straight to the point.

    It¡¯s nice in a way.

    I nod my head and turn to look at the frozen base.

    Time to fight to the death with my first Class S magician.

    Or to their death, I guess. Seeing as I can¡¯t die.

    Anyways, I just hope my plan works.

 B4 | Intermission 4

    Somewhere on Chrono Island

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    The lone time magician of the world watches with his curiosity piqued to the extreme as the Undying Magician ¨C his candidate ¨C works out his plan with the Class S magicians next to him for taking out the anti-magic magician. A rather curious magician in and of himself.

    But at the end of the day, he doesn¡¯t care about the anti-magic magician. Regardless of how rare anti-magic affinity is.

    All that matters to him is time magic. And even the candidate hasn¡¯t awakened his time magic yet.

    Although the candidate is getting closer to awakening it. So at this point he believes the boy will manage to do it.

    ¡°Will you depart the insssssstant the boy issss trained?¡± the enormous serpent asks while lifting its head from the waters around the island. ¡°Or will you ssssstick clossssse by?¡±

    The time magician stays quiet in response.

    Part of him wishes to depart immediately upon training his potential replacement, but part of him is curious how the world outside of the abandoned continents will react to the Undying Magician. So he isn¡¯t certain that he will let himself die right away.

    But he has been alive for millennia and is getting tired.

    ¡°That will be a decision for the future to hold,¡± the time magician eventually declares. ¡°At the very least I will stay around to see the way the world treats him. But I can¡¯t say beyond that.¡±

    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    ¡°Very well, Chrono,¡± the serpent states while turning its own eyes onto the boy of the abandoned continents. The lone child of the world with numerous affinities all thanks to misfortune caused by bad luck and reality itself. ¡°I will watch the boy asssss well.¡±

    The time magician solemnly nods his head without saying anything in response. Then the serpent slowly lowers his head back into the water again. Leaving him in silence once more to watch the boy.

    Amongst the continents of the world, all four of the official, non-abandoned continents have their own issues. But the abandoned continents are hell for all those who live on them. They¡¯re watched like a hawk by all of the nations of the other continents to make sure none of the criminals leave the continents without some sort of enormous change to happen to the abandoned continents or without permission to leave.

    Meanwhile the abandoned continents themselves are lawless places owned by the strongest magicians who originally created their own nations upon settling on the continents. Magicians who are long since dead by now and simply passed their control over the continents along to the ones controlling their nations.

    But more importantly, time will be coming soon for change to appear once more. For the other continents to enter the abandoned continents once more.

    Because regardless of who wins the war, a change so great that it means all of the abandoned continents merge together under one ruling force will be great enough for the Towers to appear.

    And on top of all that, there is the Undying Magician himself.

    The time magician can see all of the powers vying for his attention the moment he leaves the abandoned continents. All in the hopes that he joins their forces.

    But for now, the time magician will simply watch and see what happens to him.

    It may be incredibly difficult to find a candidate that matches every requirement ¨C so difficult this is only the second time it has ever happened, and the first time ended in failure anyways ¨C but he doesn¡¯t want to rush any of this.

    So he continues to watch over the boy silently from afar.

 B4 | Chapter 54

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    It takes quite a while, but we finally get the perfect chance to start the plan. One in the form of the Chairman finally stopping attacking the ice in the base. So we start out the plan by letting me walk inside of the base on my own with a few tricks up my sleeves. And in my mouth, in the form of a storage device connected to the mana planes.

    Our plan is rather simple. Distract the hell out of him, let him believe I¡¯ve lost all of my weapons, then attack. With the others coming and joining in after I get a hit in through this surprise. Assuming I don¡¯t just kill him right away with said hit.

    I have two Arcadian Metal swords ¨C both of which are courtesy of the Republic ¨C sheathed at my waist as usual with my own swords in the storage device in my mouth. And on top of that, the ring in my mouth is wrapped around my tongue with invisibility magic cast on it and more magic to make sure my speech is perfectly clear.

    Lastly, the ice magicians freeze the entrance that I enter through behind me.

    So with all of this, I make it inside of the base. And immediately begin to set off traps along the way. Traps that begin blasting me to smithereens except for anything I have made out of Arcadian Metal. Which includes my weapons and storage devices.

    I just continue walking through the traps without even bothering with dodging them. Because I both know I probably can¡¯t and because I want the Chairman to know about my presence here.

    As for the base itself? It¡¯s rather expensive-looking, if I¡¯m being honest. There is a very expensive luxury red carpet running down the hallway I¡¯m passing through, with black walls and a black ceiling. All of which match the Chairman¡¯s magical affinity perfectly.

    On top of that, the traps aren¡¯t even damaging the carpet. Which makes me wonder just what the carpet is made of and how expensive it was.

    Aside from that, the rooms I pass by are all filled with quite a few things. Both riches, laboratory rooms, storage rooms for random junk, and even some document rooms meant for storing documents.

    None of which I really care about.

    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.

    And when I reach the center of the base, I finally find the Chairman. With the man himself just sitting inside of some sort of circle on the ground in the center of the massive domed room.

    It doesn¡¯t take me long to realize the circle is something to help someone regenerate their mana. Which must be why he stopped attacking the dome.

    To recharge his mana.

    As for the question of whether or not he is fully drained of mana right now? That is answered when I get within a dozen meters of him and enter a smaller circle further from the outer wall. When I sense the mana in him flaring and see his eyes opening to stare at me rather blankly.

    The man himself looks exactly like he did when I last saw him at the battle over the laboratory. He has pitch black eyes with some small glowing red pupils at the center of them, and is wearing pitch black armor with the occasional red crystal on it as he sits there cross-legged on the ground. Meanwhile both of his swords are sitting next to him on the ground.

    But as he stares at me, I can¡¯t help but notice the black and red mana being let off by his body. Just emanating from his skin.

    I guess that¡¯s the spell he used to make himself immune to magic.

    ¡°They sent you in to fight?¡± the Chairman eventually asks, seemingly rhetorically and without any expectations of being given a response. ¡°Ridiculous.¡±

    The man doesn¡¯t even bother climbing to his feet as he narrows his eyes on me and asks, ¡°Since we might be here for a while, why don¡¯t we have a little¡­ chat?¡±

    That surprises me a little, but I eventually just shrug and answer, ¡°Sure.¡±

    He looks just as surprised as I am. Although it¡¯s slightly hard to tell when his eyes are widening considering the fact that he has no white in his eyes. The white that is normally around the iris and pupil is just pitch black.

    ¡°Wasn¡¯t expecting that, but maybe this will be more fun than I thought,¡± the Chairman states while still sitting down and without making any moves towards his blades. Although I can sense anti-magic mana around the blades that is connected to him. So he can probably pull them to himself at any moment. ¡°How about we start with a little story of mine that I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll enjoy.¡±

    Why do I feel like I¡¯m not going to enjoy this?

    ¡°I was born into the Hunter family with a particularly rare magic, as you well know,¡± Artorius continues without missing a beat, surprising me by how chatty he¡¯s turning out to be. ¡°And it was beat into me over and over again throughout my life to serve the Republic with everything I have in me. To do everything I can to the Republic¡¯s benefit.¡±

    Yeah, I know about how obsessive he is towards ¡®helping the Republic¡¯. So obsessive that he only cares about what he believes helps it. Not what others believe may help it.

    ¡°So to make up for all that shit, I decided to become the leader of the Republic so that whatever I want is what the Republic wants,¡± Artorius suddenly declares, shocking the hell out of me as I blink at him, barely managing to keep myself from gaping at him. ¡°Don¡¯t be so surprised, I¡¯m not so stupid as to believe that everything I¡¯ve done is only for the Republic.¡±

    The fuck¡­?

    That¡¯s¡­ not what I was expecting coming here.

    Not what I was expecting at all.

 B4 | Chapter 55

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    ¡°I couldn¡¯t give less of a damn about the Republic,¡± Artorius declares while staring up at the ceiling, making me briefly wonder if he¡¯s just venting at this point and doesn¡¯t care who he¡¯s talking to. ¡°The Republic has been nothing but a tool for me to use. One to destroy the Hunter family.¡± A frown crests his face. ¡°But then that damned Dead King had to show his bony face and cause this damned war.¡±

    Wasn¡¯t that your doing?

    ¡°Thanks to the war, my plans for revenge have been put on hold and I¡¯ve been stuck fighting this entire time,¡± Artorius grunts out with his frown quickly turning into a scowl. ¡°And now I¡¯m stuck here missing an arm and sealed away in my own base.¡±

    I glance at the missing arm in question, which makes me wonder why he has both of his swords here despite only having one arm. Unless he plans on using magic to¡­

    My thoughts are interrupted when an arm made out of anti-magic mana forms where his original arm should be. Then he reaches out and grabs both blades, making me immediately draw my own blades.

    But he doesn¡¯t use the blades right now. All he does is pull them to him and stab them into the ground to stare at them.

    ¡°I can¡¯t let everything I¡¯ve done go to waste, even if the Republic itself burns to the ground,¡± Artorius continues with a growing fervent look on his face that sends chills down my spine. ¡°Even if it means I die later, I won¡¯t lie down and die now.¡±

    The man suddenly starts activating several spells that begin to coat his blades in anti-magic mana. But I don¡¯t just sit here anymore as I rush forwards and slash at him with both of my blades while making a massive explosion of death flames all around the central chamber.

    Only for a burst of anti-magic mana to shoot out of him with a magic circle appearing at his feet, sending me flying straight towards the wall as my death flames are extinguished like a birthday cake candle. Then the man finally stands up with his blades in his hands ¨C magic hand and actual hand ¨C and turns his fervent and angry gaze towards me.

    ¡°I don¡¯t care if you¡¯re immortal, if you cannot die, or even if I can¡¯t capture you,¡± Artorius declares, his face pretty much insane at this point. ¡°I don¡¯t care if I die in the future so I couldn¡¯t give less of a shit about immortality. But will you be okay¡­¡± he pauses as he raises one of his swords and a large spell circle appears behind him, ¡°¡­in another plane?¡±

    The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.

    My eyes widen in shock as an enormous amount of mana is used to open what looks like a plane to the mana plane of anti-magic. A plane filled to the brim with black and red mana.

    Holy fucking shit, this guy is planning on tossing me into another plane¡­

    Well there goes our plan.

    I immediately inform the others about what¡¯s going on, after which they all begin to break in, destroying the ceiling of this chamber and rushing in from above. One Class A magician after another, along with two Class S magicians.

    And judging by how long it took them to get here ¨C which was instantly ¨C they probably started rushing here before I even asked. Likely having sensed the rift to the mana plane opening.

    ¡°You think this changes anything?!¡± Artorius shouts, his voice echoing all around the ceilingless chamber. ¡°How about you all join him?!¡±

    A powerful air vacuum begins to draw everyone and everything nearby into the large rift.

    But before it can grow powerful enough to actually draw in more than a couple unfortunate Class A magicians, ice begins to form all around it. Freezing everything in its vicinity. And when the Chairman tries to rush at it to shatter the ice with brute force along with his mana, I rush towards him with my own blades raised.

    He turns around at the last minute and brings both of his mana infused blades to clash with mine. And to his surprise, our clash actually turns out to be about equal. At which point he seems to return a lot of his attention to me instead of the Class S magicians currently focusing on keeping that rift frozen.

    From what I can tell, the only thing that will actually close the rift is to either kill Artorius or to make him drop the spell keeping it open. Since he didn¡¯t have the mana to tear a hole between the mana plane and the mortal plane, nor is he able to do that right now with his injuries and the anti-magic spell placed on his body.

    So we repeatedly clash with our blades one strike after another. During which time I quickly realize that he¡¯s a better swordsman than I am. Which I guess makes sense seeing as he¡¯s older and a Class S magician who specializes in swordsmanship.

    On the other hand I barely use real swordsmanship anymore. I¡¯ve just been overwhelming most of my opponents with brute strength from my status as a vampire.

    My old swordsmanship instructor would be disappointed.

    Fortunately for me, the other Class A magicians here who haven¡¯t been drawn into the rift are all attacking as well using spells. But the spells that hit Artorius personally just dissipate the moment they make contact with him. So the only attacks that actually do anything are the ones that hit his blades.

    And even those just serve to knock his blades off of their original target.

    Which is enough for me to make some headway in the battle. Or at least enough to keep me from being overwhelmed too badly.

    At most I¡¯ve caused a few minor cuts on him with my blades. Which is more than the other magicians can manage with that spell on him.

    Then things take a surprising turn when he begins to speed up.

 B4 | Chapter 56

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    I grit my teeth as I try to counter his blades with my own, but he continues growing faster and faster as the anti-magic mana coating his body grows thicker and yet more condensed at the same time. All the way until he manages to knock one of my swords out of my arm while said arm is returning to my body, sending the blade flying straight into one of the Class A magicians helping me out.

    And it doesn¡¯t end there as he manages to knock my other blade out of my other hand too, skewering another Class A magician in the process. Mostly because said blades are made of Arcadian Metal, which can pierce through barriers if said barriers aren¡¯t strong enough.

    The Class S anti-magic magician grins at me with a rather terrifying expression on his face. But the moment he turns his attention to the ice covering the rift, I summon another blade from my storage device before swinging it straight at him now that he¡¯s distracted.

    Unfortunately for us all, he manages to react in time. Only to redirect the blade though. Not to completely stop it.

    So instead of piercing through his heart like I was trying to do, my sword ends up piercing straight into his shoulder. The shoulder of the arm that is not severed.

    This time I feel myself grinning a little bit. Both at finally getting a hit and at the furious and horrendously shocked look on his face.

    I can tell my blow managed to shatter some of his pride. Just by that look.

    He looks like his entire world view is breaking. Like it shouldn¡¯t have been possible for me to hurt him or something.

    Which is ridiculous, but considering how powerful and young he is despite being a Class S magician, it makes sense that he would feel that way.

    The man lets out another roar and sends another anti-magic shockwave through the entire ceilingless chamber. Then he follows it up by suddenly speeding up again and slicing me to pieces, only for said pieces to reform.

    And right as I¡¯m wondering why he bothered doing that, I realize he somehow managed to slice apart my sword as well. And not just that one. He destroyed the other two swords I have out as well.

    Are you fucking kidding me?! Does he realize how hard it is to get those things?!

    I glare at him, only for a thought to flash through my mind that calms me down a bit.

    Stolen novel; please report.

    Right. I can just bug the Republic to get me new ones when they join us.

    Almost forgot they¡¯re joining us.

    That aside, it¡¯s still a problem. Because now I only have one blade left. The last one in my storage device.

    I really should¡¯ve asked for more.

    On the other hand, he is still holding both of his blades. And he¡¯s using mana to keep his newly injured arm moving. Just like his other arm that is made mostly of mana.

    Despite what I did, he still seems more focused on trying to break the rift out of the ice than on me. Even though a lot of the ice was dissipated with his latest shockwave.

    Probably because I¡¯m immortal and he can¡¯t kill me. So that rift is his only possible way of dealing with me.

    I look to the other Class A magicians in the chamber, only to find a lot of them having been knocked out by the shockwave of anti-magic mana. Either that or they just had their barriers shattered so they¡¯re backing away to protect themselves.

    As for the Class S magicians? They¡¯re still trying to reinforce the ice over the rift.

    I grit my teeth a little as I look back at the anti-magic magician, only to notice something strange. And the moment I notice it, my eyes automatically move towards the blood flowing from the Chairman¡¯s wound. The one I gave him.

    This wound is far deeper than the others and is still bleeding, unlike the other wounds that he sealed up with anti-magic mana the moment he got them to make them not bleed.

    Huh¡­ this may be the first time I¡¯ve been up close and personal with the blood of a Class S magician.

    And it smells¡­ enticing¡­

    I immediately feel my bloodthirst acting up as black veins no doubt spread across my face. And for some reason I feel a strong urge to drink that blood. Probably because it has a lot of mana in it.

    The Chairman looks startled by my sudden change in attitude. Enough so that he actually focuses a little bit more attention on me than he was doing before.

    Although just a little. Not enough in my opinion.

    After a brief pause, I rush straight at him with my claws extended before reaching out to scratch at his armor. Only for said claws to end up only leaving some scratch marks on the armor without actually damaging it.

    The man scoffs before swinging both of his blades in an X formation across my body. Chopping me into bits before I reform perfectly fine again as he is rushing over towards the ice.

    After a brief pause, I rush over to one of the Class A magicians before drinking his blood and feeling my strength rising a little bit thanks to it. Then I sprint straight at the Chairman again to claw at him. And this time I manage to push him a few feet to the left while leaving some slightly deeper cuts on the armor. But not enough to really do anything.

    And this time the Chairman turns around and glares at me before grabbing me by the throat and coating me in anti-magic mana.

    Then he just throws me all the way out of the building with an incredibly irritated look on his face. But I stop myself before I get far through the use of death flames.

    A faint smile spreads across my face in the midst of the bloodthirst.

    After turning around, I see the Chairman rushing over towards the ice and focusing on a large scale spell to no doubt shatter said ice.

    So I activate multiple acceleration spells right behind me while pulling out my last sword the moment my body shoots straight at the man.

    He notices me within seconds, turning his head at an angle to see me, but before he can do anything, Incendia ¨C who has been hiding this entire battle ¨C suddenly swoops in and attacks his face with her talons.

    And my blade pierces straight through the center of his back while he¡¯s blinded.

 B4 | Chapters 57 through Epilogue

    Chapter 57

    <hr>

    The Dome of the Chairman¡¯s Base

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    The Chairman has always been an arrogant man. He has always won every one on one battle he has ever entered, has always succeeded at everything he has done, and was born with one of the most powerful affinities.

    It¡¯s made him believe he¡¯s close to being a perfect magician.

    Which made it incredibly difficult for him to believe his own family when they tried to force him to work for the benefit of the Republic. Because his power should be used for himself and not the Republic.

    And while a part of him believed he should just ignore them and do as he pleased ¨C meaning killing them and moving on ¨C another part decided that the best revenge he could get on them was to twist their logic around on them. To become the absolute ruler of the Republic and make what¡¯s best for the Republic into what¡¯s best for him.

    Artorius genuinely thought it would be easy for him to achieve his goals. Because that¡¯s just how things always go for him.

    But then the doctor got in his way. And after him it was the other nations, and the other Class S magicians.

    One after another, everything began to go wrong.

    And now? As another blade from the blasted immortal pierces straight through his back and out his front? Just barely missing his heart in the process.

    This brat¡­

    The boy has been infuriating him ever since he appeared within the base. In nearly every way imaginable.

    The apathetic look on the boy¡¯s face, the indifference towards the Chairman himself, and the way the others sent him into the base seemingly confident he could beat the Chairman. Then the way the boy managed to actually wound him. And how he wouldn¡¯t stop attacking no matter how many times Artorius sent him flying or destroyed his weapons.

    And even though the Chairman knows why he is upset with him, he refuses to accept it.

    Because the Chairman is absolute. And he will not let himself be defeated by a little boy barely over half his age.

    So without hesitation, he finishes his spell and creates thousands of missiles made of pure anti-magic mana that slam into the ice in a massive bombardment. Shattering the ice into pieces and letting the rift once again begin drawing everything nearby into it.

    And the two closest things to the rift are Artorius himself along with the boy.

    Artorius feels glee as he gets sucked into the anti-magic mana plane along with the so-called Undying Magician. Because he feels absolutely certain that the boy¡¯s immortality will be stopped by the sheer amount of anti-magic mana inside of the plane.

    After all, no magic can be used inside of the plane unless it¡¯s anti-magic.

    And even if the boy somehow manages to still not die in it, there isn¡¯t a way for him to get out. So he¡¯ll be stuck living forever inside of the anti-magic plane.

    But Artorius¡¯s glee is short-lived when he feels something piercing into his neck. And out of the corner of his eye, he sees the boy with his fangs digging straight through his shoulder using a gap in his armor made by the boy¡¯s swords earlier in the battle.

    That¡¯s not all though as the boy grabs onto Artorius with both of his arms and his sword still stabbing straight through Artorius¡¯s center. Not giving Artorius the chance to take the blade out and coat the wound in mana.

    ¡°Get off of me, boy!¡± Artorius roars, his voice echoing through the endless expanse of anti-magic mana.

    To his surprise though, the boy actually does jump off of him. And he still doesn¡¯t look like he¡¯s showing any signs of pain or discomfort. Even though Artorius hurt the boy by trapping him in the plane and hurting him inside of it.

    Even the wounds he had are still closing. Clearing showing that his immortality works perfectly fine even in the anti-magic plane somehow.

    But more importantly, for some reason Artorius finds the boy cutting off his own head with a knife he got from some storage device and throwing his head straight through the rift. Right after Artorius begins to close the rift.

    Letting the head fly through the rift on its own before the rift closes.

    Artorius feels more confused than ever even as his vision begins to fade from all the many wounds he¡¯s collected in the battle. Wounds he is sure at this point must be fatal.

    Did he just¡­ kill himself? Or¡­ what?

    The Chairman isn¡¯t sure what the boy just did. Especially since he sees the head on his body not growing back.

    That is, until the boy¡¯s corpse begins to vibrate along with the space around it. Following which the corpse turns into a blur and moves straight through the plane and slams into an invisible wall. Shattering the wall like glass and revealing the mortal world outside of the plane.

    Artorius¡¯s jaw drops as he watches the body reattach to a head that he can see just rolling on the ground outside of the rift.

    Returning the immortal boy to perfect health again even as the rift stays open.

    And Artorius¡¯s vision continues to go dark.

    Are you¡­ kidding¡­ me¡­

    His thoughts come to a halt when his heart finally gives out, and he takes his last breath.

    <hr>

    The Dome of the Chairman¡¯s Base

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    Right after the two entered the rift

    Archibald Winters feels shocked after seeing the two enter the rift into the anti-magic mana plane. And a part of him wonders if the battle is now hopeless. Because the Chairman should be able to escape if his wounds don¡¯t kill him.

    But that fear goes away when he sees the Undying Magician latching onto the Chairman and digging his fangs into the Class S magician¡¯s shoulder. Following which the man roars out his anger and the rift begins to show signs of closing on its own.

    Now Archibald only feels a minor anxiety at the thought of their ally being stuck in the anti-mana plane forever. Since he is certain there isn¡¯t another anti-magic magician within the entire world.

    And that worry grows even stronger the closer the rift gets to closing.

    Only to turn into confusion when he sees a head suddenly flying out of the rift to slam into the ground right before the rift fully closes.

    Huh?

    Archibald blinks in confusion before sharing a glance with an equally confused Katherine. But when he turns back to the head again, he sees the thing trembling along with the space around it.

    Then something shocking happens in the form of another rift suddenly breaking open right in front of them before the Undying Magician¡¯s body flies through it and meets with the head. Following which he watches the body and head reattach like nothing happened.

    Archibald feels his jaw dropping in both shock and awe. And he notices the expressions of several of the people nearby turning grim as they realize just how immortal the Undying Magician truly is.

    So immortal that not even the anti-magic mana flooding the anti-magic mana plane can stop his regeneration. Not even a barrier between planes in fact.

    After a few seconds of staring, Archibald and the others turn back towards the rift to find two new things to note.

    The first being good news in the form of the Chairman¡¯s eyes closing and his heart beat stopping, signifying his death.

    And the second?

    The fact that the rift isn¡¯t closing, leading to a flood of anti-magic mana entering the mortal plane.

    Shit¡­

    He and the other magicians nearby immediately begin to worry again.

    How are we going to deal with this?!

    Chapter 58

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    Whew. I¡¯m glad that worked.

    After I ended up in the other plane, I honestly wasn¡¯t sure how things would turn out. What with me never actually being exposed to so much anti-magic mana before.

    For all I knew, it could actually kill me.

    But nope. I guess not.

    Natural mana from a reality warp really is powerful. It just refuses to budge to anything. At all.

    My next worry was about getting stuck in said plane forever. Because the Chairman could easily manage that.

    Fortunately for me, I thought of a rather unusual plan to get out. And it actually worked.

    At the very least, I knew my body would grow back if it were to be completely destroyed. But I didn¡¯t think my body would just break its way out of the anti-magic mana plane to return to my head.

    That¡¯s certainly¡­ something.

    It was probably a rather odd sight to behold for everyone here.

    There¡¯s a more pressing matter at hand right now though than that. What with the anti-magic mana plane still being wide open with a large, broken rift in front of us.

    Except this one is different from the rift the Chairman tried opening up before. Specifically in that this rift is expelling anti-magic mana out into the natural plane rather than drawing things into it.

    Well, shit. I have no idea what to do right now.

    Has a mana plane ever actually had its walls completely broken before? And is it even possible to fix it?

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, the problem will be dealt with in a moment,¡± Incendia states while flying down and landing on my shoulder, having been knocked out of the way by an angry Chairman before the Chairman and I ended up in the mana plane.

    Really? How?

    ¡°Just watch,¡± she says while looking up at the sky.

    So I look where she¡¯s currently looking, only to surprisingly find a man wearing purple robes appearing in the sky. One with glowing bluish orange eyes. Eyes that look similar to the time mana in my body but different. With shades of orange mixed into the blue and purple.

    As for the mana itself that he¡¯s letting off? It gives off the same feeling as the time mana in my body. Just stronger and somehow different.

    But that can¡¯t be possible. Not unless¡­

    My eyes widen as the realization comes to me.

    The realization that this man in front of me ¨C one who looks no older than me despite his incredible well of mana that I can sense flooding out of him ¨C must be a time affinity magician. Which shouldn¡¯t even be possible.

    Unless he¡¯s from another continent?

    The man looks around at the other magicians here before disregarding them entirely and looking at me. At which point he surprisingly nods his head with a faint smile on his face. Then he turns to focus on the rift as he raises one hand towards it.

    Without even the slightest hint of a spell circle, confirming along with his well of mana that he is indeed a Class S magician, time mana begins to spew out of his hand in the form of a spell. One that somehow begins to freeze time itself around the rift.

    Absolutely everything in it just freezes. The wind around the rift, the anti-magic mana leaving it, and even the rift itself.

    Nothing is spared.

    As for the man himself? He just looks at me one more time before nodding and vanishing from sight without a word.

    The¡­ fuck?

    Goosebumps suddenly run down my back, making me jump up high into the air above the base before I look around for the source of the terrifying gaze I sensed on me for a brief second. Only to not find a single thing.

    ¡°Do not worry for that is the Guardian,¡± Incendia states while yawning and closing her eyes despite still being on my shoulder. ¡°He protects this world and would never harm you.¡±

    Do you mean the one who just left or the gaze I just felt? Or are they both from the same person?

    ¡°The one who just left was the current Chrono, while the gaze was from the Guardian,¡± Incendia answers. ¡°All I will say for now is that they protect the world from damage like what your escape from the anti-magic mana plane caused. To learn more you must speak with them yourself.¡±

    I stare at Incendia for several seconds before eventually turning to look at the rift again. Then I lower myself down to the ground. Just to find a bunch of magicians staring at me like I¡¯m a ghost or something.

    Did I do something wrong?

    I watch them all for a moment, only to turn my attention towards the frozen rift. Along with the man still visible from here who looks dead inside of the rift.

    The Chairman.

    Good to see that he actually died. That means the Republic is now out of the war as well.

    Which just leaves the Collective Kingdoms and the doctor still remaining.

    Then this war will be over for good, and the Kingdom of the Fallen will be the new rulers of the abandoned continents.

    My thoughts halt when I see Archibald approaching me out of the corner of my eye. So I turn to him just as he says, ¡°Congratulations, Nathan Fox, for slaying a Class S magician.¡±

    And immediately after his words, the other magicians all begin to repeat his words in various ways.

    Or at least, the ones who are still conscious. Seeing as quite a few of the magicians who were helping with this battle fell unconscious. Whether due to mana deficiency or just being knocked out.

    What shocks me even more is that some of the magicians begin to kneel down to me and refer to me as ¡®Your Highness¡¯.

    I look over them all before feeling the corner of my lips twitching upwards.

    Interesting.

    Chapter 59

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 23

    After dealing with the Chairman and the aftermath of the battle, I quickly make my way back to the Undying Caverns with the two Class S magicians traveling alongside me. Meanwhile the other Class A magicians still at the base deal with everything back there. Including but not limited to collecting all of the documents and other stuff inside of said base and sealing the place off.

    Especially after one of the Class A magicians decided to try poking at the spot that¡¯s frozen in time, only to be frozen along with it. Likely forever. Seeing as no one has time magic to dispel that or alter it to free them. Except that one magician. The Chrono as Incendia described him.

    There¡¯s one thing that¡¯s bothering me though as I fly back towards the Kingdom of the Fallen. That being the time magic in my own body.

    It reacted to the Chrono¡¯s time magic, and the area with time frozen.

    Then again, I guess that makes sense. After all, it reacted to the doctor¡¯s space magic. My own space magic I mean. So why wouldn¡¯t my time magic react to someone else¡¯s time magic?

    It would be stranger if it didn¡¯t.

    Unfortunately, it didn¡¯t react enough for me to do anything with it. So my time and space mana still remain unusable for me.

    Which is a pity. But I at least know it¡¯s possible to awaken both of them.

    As long as the space and time magicians are still alive, that is.

    Anyways, we continue flying all the way to the Undying Caverns even after entering the Kingdom of the Fallen. Only for us to be greeted by the sight of thousands of soldiers all arrayed outside of my Undying Caverns while kneeling towards us. Or towards me to be more specific.

    I raise a brow while looking down at them from atop the platform of ice one of the Class S magicians made.

    Looks like they already know of our victory against the Chairman. Which makes me wonder who spilled the beans.

    My curiosity doesn¡¯t last long though before I find Lilith already standing at the back of the army with a faint smile on her face and her daughter standing next to her. The woman no doubt having arrived long before us with her dark affinity to warn everyone of our arrival.

    Then again, she could always just have called.

    Regardless, all of the people down there begin to shout as one, ¡°Welcome back, Your Highness! And congratulations on your successful hunt!¡±

    The corner of my lips quirk upwards as the Class S magicians and I just float here on platforms made of ice. And after a brief pause, I go ahead and raise a single fist into the air without saying a word. Which immediately sets off cheers all throughout the soldiers.

    Cheers at the sight of the war drawing closer and closer to a close. And at the loss of another powerful enemy.

    My next enemy is also already set in stone in my mind. With that being the doctor.

    Because there is no way I¡¯m letting him die by someone else¡¯s hands. Not to mention that I need him to unseal even the smallest sliver of my space mana. All to convert one of my mana arcs to space mana.

    So at this point there¡¯s nothing left standing in my way from targeting him.

    While there is still the Collective Kingdoms left to fight with, it¡¯s only a matter of time before they fall. What with it being them against the Kingdom of the Fallen, Natra, Hardlight, and the Republic at this point. With the other nations having already been completely eliminated.

    Although normally the Republic would have been eliminated from the war as well and wouldn¡¯t be able to help us. But they get a pass according to the skeleton because they pretty much turned the nation over to us before the Chairman even died.

    And with all of those nations along with several Class S magicians targeting the Collective Kingdoms, it¡¯s only a matter of time before the kingdoms fall. Leaving nothing but the Kingdom of the Fallen remaining.

    The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.

    Well, us and the allies we¡¯ve made. But Natra made an agreement that they¡¯ll join the Kingdom of the Fallen as an independently governing nation. Meaning they have full rights to govern themselves and the Kingdom of the Fallen can¡¯t do anything to change their laws, but they are technically a part of the Kingdom of the Fallen.

    As for Hardlight? They are now a part of the Kingdom of the Fallen. So they don¡¯t really even exist anymore. They¡¯re just part of our forces and territory.

    And the same goes for the Republic.

    Which technically includes all of the Class S magicians of the Republic. But only on paper. Seeing as none of them actually have to listen to our commands.

    They¡¯ll help us if they want.

    It¡¯s just that the Class S water magician here with me seems to be helping. Even after the battle ended.

    I¡¯m not entirely sure why.

    Actually, the way all of the Republic magicians have been treating me ever since seeing that battle has been a little strange in general. Almost like they¡¯re both revering me and afraid of me.

    Was my little stunt about cutting off my own head and throwing it through the rift really that frightening to them?

    Or maybe it was how my body broke through the boundary between the planes?

    That might have been it.

    Then again, it doesn¡¯t really matter all that much why they¡¯re treating me this way. I feel a little weird about the treatment since it¡¯s drastically different from what I¡¯m used to, but I¡¯m not upset with it.

    In fact, it feels good compared to the usual ¡®experimental subject¡¯ treatment I have always gotten from people after they¡¯ve seen my powers at work.

    I wonder if they¡¯ve finally been frightened enough to stop messing with me?

    That would be great.

    Intermission 5

    <hr>

    Somewhere within the Barren Pass

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 24

    Leodmir Archeron feels something snap in his head the moment he gets the news about the Chairman¡¯s death. Because he knows it means that the other Class S magicians will likely finish off the Collective Kingdoms before turning their attention towards him.

    But that¡¯s not the only reason he feels upset about the news.

    He¡¯s even more upset by the news about who killed the Chairman rather than the fact that the Chairman ¨C a convenient decoy for him ¨C is now dead.

    That test subject killed a Class S magician? If I didn¡¯t already know my source was reliable I would¡¯ve questioned the news¡¯s legitimacy. But he actually killed a Class S magician? And the Chairman at that?

    A large part of him wants to deny the possibility of that. Simply because of his time experimenting on the test subject to figure out a way to use his immortality for himself. And how, throughout that process, the subject was always so weak and unable to do anything to stop him.

    The idea of that same subject being able to kill the Chairman just won¡¯t click in Leodmir¡¯s mind. Even as he¡¯s still teleporting from one cavern to another, fleeing from the two Class S magicians chasing him. With the third from before having fled thanks to the Collective Kingdom¡¯s own trouble with the Republic.

    But the one that fled was one of the two poison magicians. Meaning he is still fleeing from the light magician with the two of them using as little mana as they can possibly use during the chase.

    So little mana that they¡¯re regenerating it just as quickly as they¡¯re using it up.

    Leodmir grits his teeth as he continues fleeing, teleporting away every time Afvalder catches up with him. Both at the humiliation he¡¯s feeling now and at the absolute waste of time this is causing.

    One thing Leodmir hates more than anything in the world is wasting time. Especially since he has so little of it left at his age of sixty-six.

    It¡¯s the main reason he is so dead set on trying to figure out the test subject¡¯s immortality. Even if he doesn¡¯t genuinely believe he¡¯ll be able to crack it.

    After all, he¡¯s the one who has seen the most about the subject¡¯s body over the years. So he would know.

    But Leodmir¡¯s mind just won¡¯t accept that fact.

    It just can¡¯t.

    Because if that¡¯s true then he¡¯ll die of old age in the end, wasting everything he has managed to accomplish his entire life.

    And that can¡¯t happen.

    Leodmir continues teleporting, only to suddenly see another message from his spy in the Republic. One about the Republic, along with a few other nations such as Hardlight and Natra, officially announcing that they have been annexed by the Kingdom of the Fallen. Albeit with Natra being self-governing still even after joining under the Kingdom¡¯s banner.

    The announcement makes Leodmir scoff, showing genuine emotion for the first time in a while outwardly. Even if there¡¯s no one here to see it.

    All because the one nation everyone believed to be absolutely screwed during this war is somehow coming out on top. With everything falling into their lap.

    And what¡¯s worse is that a small part of Leodmir realizes that the catalyst for all of this was the test subject.

    His test subject.

    It all started when the test subject entered the Kingdom of the Fallen and met and freed the Dead King. Making the skeleton reenter the politics of the abandoned continents around the same time as Leodmir¡¯s rebellion from the Republic. All of which eventually led to the war for total control of the abandoned continents.

    Yet it doesn¡¯t stop there as the test subject then proceeded to win over the Fire Overlord and therefore Natra, becoming the man¡¯s student and gaining a second Class S magician for the Kingdom of the Fallen. And thanks to the test subject¡¯s rampage throughout Hardlight territory within the Kingdom of the Fallen, even Hardlight ended up surrendering to the Kingdom.

    Then the last straw was the Republic, which surrendered after the test subject slayed the Chairman at their own request.

    Leodmir grits his teeth harder and harder the more he thinks about it. The more he thinks about just how much his own test subject has done to cause him trouble.

    To ruin everything Leodmir had planned.

    And the worst thing about this is that Leodmir can¡¯t do a single thing to him. Because now he has even more Class S magicians protecting him, and Leodmir is still stuck fleeing from the two Class S magicians chasing him.

    On top of that, even if Leodmir could escape, it¡¯s not like he can kill the test subject even if he didn¡¯t want to use him as a test subject.

    Everything couldn¡¯t be worse for Leodmir.

    Or at least, that¡¯s what he believes until he sees a brief description of how the test subject killed the Chairman. Specifically, how he managed to return to full health even with his head and body in different planes of reality, and how he wasn¡¯t affected even in the anti-magic mana plane.

    At this rate the only thing Leodmir can realistically do to harm him is to send him into another plane and leave him there until he somehow manages to find a way out. Or break his own way out, since that will entirely become possible when the boy reaches Class S and manages to make strong enough spells.

    For the first time in Leodmir¡¯s life, he genuinely begins to regret his actions.

    And to make matters worse, the light magician reappears within the cavern he¡¯s in as he finishes looking at the message. Making Leodmir instantly teleport away once more.

    A vein protrudes on the man¡¯s forehead as he feels his irritation reach all-time highs.

    So high he feels like his last sense of sanity may snap at any moment.

    Chapter 60

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 25

    The next two days pass by in a blur, mostly with a lot of discussion between the Class S magicians. All with us sitting around in one of the meeting rooms at the Undying Caverns. And the room itself feels rather stuffy even on the second day of being in this room.

    Which makes sense, considering that there are over half a dozen Class S magicians in this one room. Sorta.

    There¡¯s the Class S magician of the nation formerly known as Hardlight, Katherine, there¡¯s Juan, the skeleton, Archibald and two screens showing two more Class S magicians from the Republic as they chase after the doctor. Albeit with the two of them not adding much to the discussions, what with them chasing after the doctor.

    Those two magicians being Afvalder von Schr?der and Dorothy Umbra.

    Then there are two other Class S magicians in the room, both of whom are rather surprising.

    The first of the two is a newly advanced Class S magician who advanced just in the last few days. And he is a Class S magician belonging to Natra, surprisingly enough.

    Which, of course, means he is a fire affinity magician. Because Natra magicians love their fire. Just like Juan.

    Oh, and he is Juan¡¯s son. Because yeah.

    The man has a similar aesthetic to his father in his red business suit and white dress shirt, with red eyes that don¡¯t glow anywhere near as brightly as Juan¡¯s do. But his build is a little bit taller than Juan¡¯s, and he has vibrant red hair. Unlike his father whose hair is all gray.

    And the other Class S magician is just as surprising as he is the neutral Class S magician who often wanders the continent healing people. One of precious few nearly pacifistic magicians on the abandoned continents.

    Leith Allen. A nature affinity Class S neutral magician.

    This one has semi-long gray hair with glowing green eyes and is wearing a green robe. Which is an unusual fashion sense on the abandoned continents.

    Putting aside his fashion sense though, the man looks rather peaceful as he sits there amidst the discussions without saying a word.

    Why he came here is beyond me when he isn¡¯t going to say anything.

    Then again, I¡¯m barely saying anything myself. The one representing the Kingdom of the Fallen and doing most of the negotiations for us is the skeleton.

    He is still the king of the nation after all. Even if he has left a lot to me during the war.

    At this point we have discussed most of the important details that need discussing. Like the exact layout of things after the war is over. With Natra going under our banner as self-governing, Hardlight just being diffused into us, albeit with some individuality and say even if they don¡¯t have the final say over things, and the Republic just being diffused entirely into us. Without a single shred of their original nation left.

    Not that it¡¯s very surprising, considering that the Republic has never had all that much unity beyond it being the strongest nation in the abandoned continents. Especially with so many Class S magicians within it.

    And when you think about it, two of those Class S magicians ended up going rogue. So¡­

    The Chairman and the doctor.

    It¡¯s a large reason behind the entire war in the first place.

    Other than that discussion, the Class S magicians also discuss how the ruling of the nation will end up along with the name of the nation that we¡¯ll all be forming. And while they end up deciding on a monarchy, simply because that¡¯s what the Kingdom of the Fallen is, they take out the nobility entirely. Removing those pesky nobles that have been pecking at my feet for so long from the picture.

    So it¡¯ll be an absolute monarchy for now until we can set up a voted council like what the Republic had. And even after the council is set up, the monarch will have most of the power.

    The only way the council would be able to veto some of the monarch¡¯s decisions is if the council gets a vote with every last person on the council deciding against a decision.

    And at the end of the day, they can only vote on certain subjects. Not everything.

    As for the name of the new nation? Everyone just decided to table that discussion until after the war is over.

    We do still have to deal with the Collective Kingdoms and the doctor after all. Said doctor who I keep seeing appear on Afvalder¡¯s screen before disappearing again every once in a while. Which I find amusing.

    Just the sight of the doctor fleeing for his life.

    The slightest hint of a smile spreads across my face at that.

    ¡°To end this discussion, let us decide on an attack plan for the enemies,¡± the skeleton states before glancing at Afvalder and saying, ¡°Radiation magician, please make sure Leodmir can¡¯t hear you through the call.¡± And after Afvalder nods his head at that, the skeleton focuses on everyone as a whole and continues, ¡°We need to designate which magicians will go after the Collective Kingdoms and which will go after the doctor.¡±

    I immediately chime in upon mention of this subject, drawing attention to myself as I say, ¡°I will be going after the doctor.¡±

    The skeleton stares at me for a second before stating, ¡°I was already expecting that. But keep up with your mana manipulation training while you¡¯re at it.¡± Then he turns to the others and says, ¡°Everyone can have a say in which target they would like to go after. I personally don¡¯t care who attacks who so long as the plan works in the end.¡±

    And just like that, all of the Class S magicians immediately begin chiming in, saying which targets they want to go after.

    All while I sit here with the thought of tearing the doctor to shreds after using his magic to free even the smallest sliver of an arc of space mana from my bones.

    Because that thought is a beautiful one to me.

    Chapter 61

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 26

    After the discussions with the Class S magicians come to an end, which takes longer than I thought it would, I find myself with a good chunk of free time until the plan begins. Specifically a few days to myself.

    And during those days several other things happen. Some of which I am very happy about.

    First off, the skeleton finally decides to free my parents. Something about the war being so close to an end that he doesn¡¯t see the need to keep them locked up anymore.

    Which makes sense. After all, even if I don¡¯t fight in the war at this point it will still end with our victory. And I¡¯m very determined to fight the doctor. So whether they¡¯re locked up or not won¡¯t change my plans.

    I think this might be one of the first times I¡¯ve felt even the slightest shred of gratitude towards him.

    Other than that, the Undying Caverns ends up playing host to a few more guests. Including but not limited to the parents of some of my friends.

    The reason we didn¡¯t bring all of their parents here was because of the war and all, so there¡¯s no reason for them not to at least visit now that we¡¯re on the same side of the war. And the team is very happy about this new set of events.

    And with all of this going on, I end up spending the next few days just relaxing with my family and friends. Taking the time off from experimenting and fighting to do so. To play games with them. Talk with them. Catch up with them.

    To introduce my family to my friends. And to make up for lost time with them all.

    As for the other Class S magicians during this time? Most of them have gone off to their own nations to deal with matters at home. Seeing as time isn¡¯t just stopping simply because they¡¯re not home or anything.

    Even Juan heads back to Natra to handle a few things there. Although he won¡¯t say what things.

    But I don¡¯t really care what he¡¯s doing. At this point I trust him more than I trust the skeleton.

    Juan hasn¡¯t ever done anything to hurt me after all. Unlike the skeleton who turned me into a vampire and locked away my parents. All without a single say from me.

    After the rest period ¨C during which I hear the doctor has just been fleeing everywhere, especially since one of the Class S magicians actually did head straight to him to back up the others instead of taking this little break ¨C all of the Class S magicians return. With each one of them ready for their own little assignments for the war.

    Most of them will be heading to the Collective Kingdom¡¯s territory, whether within the Kingdom of the Fallen or on the mainland continent itself. But a couple will be going to the doctor with me.

    Amongst them all, the skeleton will be fighting against the Collective Kingdoms within the Kingdom of the Fallen, Juan will be following me to the doctor in the Barren Pass, and Archibald has already headed over towards the doctor before any of us took our break. Where he plans to freeze those little ice caverns the doctor has been hiding in solid to block his safe places.

    Next up are Katherine and the newly advanced Class S magician, both of whom are heading towards the Collective Kingdoms territory on the mainland.

    Leaving just one Class S magician who won¡¯t be participating in the war. However, the man will be staying behind in the Kingdom of the Fallen to heal our people.

    Leith. Which is a bit surprising, but that¡¯s apparently why he came here.

    To heal the injured here since he knew we were absolutely going to win at this point.

    Although another reason for him coming was apparently to see me for some reason. One I¡¯m not absolutely certain about.

    He says it is just curiosity to see an immortal, but I¡¯m not really sure what¡¯s going on in his head.

    Either way, he can¡¯t actually harm me. And he wouldn¡¯t dare do anything with the skeleton watching over the Kingdom of the Fallen. So it should be fine to let him heal people.

    As for the people themselves? The soldiers and lower Class magicians amongst the many nations on our side? They are all assigned to different Class S magicians to join in their separate missions.

    Albeit without any of them being assigned to the Class S magicians or me going to fight the doctor. Seeing as the doctor would just slaughter them all.

    Plus the doctor doesn¡¯t actually have any soldiers of his own. So there isn¡¯t all that much reason for them to join.

    And his teleportation spells would cause a major problem with bringing an army anyways. Specifically how he could just teleport in and destroy the army¡¯s supplies or kill the leading officers.

    All he has to do is manage to give the Class S magicians chasing him the slip for even a brief moment after all.

    But before anyone heads anywhere ¨C except Archibald who is already long gone ¨C we have one last meeting within the Undying Caverns. One that even the three Class S magicians chasing the doctor attend through video call.

    A meeting where we share intel with each other one last time before what hopefully is the last mission of the war begins.

    Although not all that much actually happens at the meeting, what with everyone keeping up to date with their own sources of intel. So it mostly ends up being a last chance to make sure everyone is on the same page before the mission begins.

    And after the meeting ends, we all begin to make our last minute preparations to leave.

    Which for me means heading over to see my friends and family one last time before going to the Barren Pass.

    Chapter 62

    <hr>

    Nathan

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 26

    To my surprise, when I head back to the main lobby area for the suite in which my family and friends are staying, I find everyone already gathered together there. And they all stop talking the moment I come in before shouting, ¡°Good luck, Nathan!¡± All at once.

    The faintest hint of a smile spreads across my face as I see everyone.

    My parents, Aidan, Amelia, Rebecca, Cyria, Sofia, and even Leo and Anabel from my time at the academy. Every single one of the people I care about is here.

    Even the top officers of the Undying Caverns are here, with Claire, Ryan, and Benjamin all sitting in a corner with drinks in hand.

    I can¡¯t help but chuckle a little at that sight.

    They¡¯ve certainly come to know my friends and family at this point.

    Actually, the entire reputation I¡¯ve kind of built here has pretty much crumbled by now. With everyone in the caverns previously thinking I was cold and friendless. But now everyone knows better.

    Although I may actually be pretty cold. Both literally and figuratively, seeing as I¡¯m a vampire.

    I end up joining everyone as drinks and food are all brought into the suite for a bit of a party. And for the first time in ages, I actually drink and eat with them despite not needing to.

    Which feels really strange as I haven¡¯t had anything to drink or eat in a long time. Other than blood.

    But then something unexpected happens.

    Everyone suddenly turns to look at my parents as they turn to me with a smile.

    I blink for a moment before tilting my head a little.

    Are they going to say farewell prior to the mission or something?

    I glance out of the corner of my eye to find Incendia being fed by a couple random soldiers on a table closer to the wall. Then I turn back to my parents as they begin speaking.

    ¡°Nathan, I would like to thank you for everything you¡¯ve done these years,¡± Dad says, surprising me that it¡¯s not just a farewell. But he keeps going regardless of my surprise, ¡°You¡¯ve protected us with everything you can, and your mother and I can¡¯t thank you enough for that.¡±

    I feel a slight twinge in my chest as his words get to me.

    ¡°You have always been protecting us, even back in the Republic,¡± Mom says with a warm smile on her face. ¡°Even when we haven¡¯t been able to do anything to protect you in return. We even got in your way by being used as hostages against you.¡±

    I begin to shake my head to deny their words, but Dad just shakes his head and continues, ¡°No, Nathan, you can¡¯t refute the truth. I didn¡¯t raise you to deny what¡¯s right in front of you.¡±

    That makes me shut my mouth again.

    ¡°Before you go, there¡¯s something we wanted to tell you,¡± Dad continues with a faint smile spreading across his face as he puts his drink down. With Mom doing the same right after him. ¡°Something we all have to tell you.¡±

    I feel more and more confused the more he speaks. But then he slowly begins to approach me.

    ¡°You¡¯ve been alone for too long,¡± Dad says, with mom soon following him towards me. ¡°But you aren¡¯t alone anymore.¡±

    When he reaches me he wraps his arms around me in a hug, with Mom doing the same thing immediately afterwards.

    Both of them then say the exact same thing at the same time.

    ¡°I don¡¯t care what you are or how twisted you think you might become. I will always love you, Nathan, and nothing will change that.¡±

    In the middle of their warmth, I feel tears beginning to come from my eyes. And to make matters worse, the other people in the room all begin to shout their own agreements with my parents¡¯ words.

    ¡°Yeah! You¡¯ll always be Nathan and nothing more!¡± ¡°Three cheers for the King!¡± ¡°Save the crying for after the war is over, Nathan!¡± ¡°Nothing will ever change the fact that we¡¯re best friends!¡±

    Their words, all of them, make the tears flow ever faster. And for the first time in years, I find myself sobbing in the middle of all of them.

    Then, once I finally manage to recover, we all go back to drinking again. For an entire three hours before I have to head out.

    And so, with Incendia jumping onto my shoulder, I head back to my lab to change into more suitable attire for battle, grab my newly created Arcadian Metal weapons courtesy of the Republic, and begin marching through the Undying Caverns. Where I¡¯m greeted by my own people, all of whom are kneeling to me.

    ¡°May good tidings follow you, Your Majesty!¡±

    I feel the corner of my lips quirking upwards at their continues stubborn use of the term ¡®Your Majesty¡¯ despite my title technically being a prince. With ¡®Your Highness¡¯ being the correct term.

    But none of them ever budge. To the point that they¡¯ll even refer to me as king even when the skeleton is right next to me.

    Although it doesn¡¯t help that the skeleton welcomes it as well and finds it amusing.

    And just like this I continue marching through the Undying Caverns while wearing a set of pitch black military armor with both of my blades sheathed at my waist and my boots echoing off the floor of the caverns amidst their shouts. All the way until I make it out of the Undying Caverns, just to find the entire military force of the Undying Caverns waiting outside while kneeling on the ground.

    ¡°We greet His Majesty, the King of the Kingdom of the Fallen and Immortal Ruler!¡± all of the soldiers and officers shout at once. With Ryan, Claire, and Benjamin being front and center amongst them all, despite them having been at the party. ¡°And we wish him good tidings in his mission!¡±

    Then again, I did notice that they snuck out at one point.

    I look around at everyone before floating up into the air a little using my fire magic. And without hesitation, I draw one of my swords and raise it into the air while coating it in death flames in a display of power.

    ¡°I will come back with the doctor¡¯s head! Of that I swear!¡± I shout at the top of my lungs for the first time in as long as I can remember.

    And the moment I do, the entire army bursts into disciplined cheers in one loud roar.

    Then, with a proud grin on my face, I take off flying in the direction of where the doctor is. Which is on the opposite end of the continents from where we are.

    The time of my revenge is finally nigh.

    And I¡¯m going to savor this with everything I have.

    Epilogue

    <hr>

    Somewhere on Chrono Island

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 26

    The Chrono of the current era watches with intrigue as the Undying Magician ¨C as everyone calls the candidate ¨C makes a grand exit from his base. With all of his soldiers seeing him off like a king.

    Every single thing that candidate does has surprised Chrono in some manner. Whether it¡¯s his immortality, his attitude towards things and enemies, or even how he managed to poke a hole through the boundary between a mana plane and the mortal plane.

    And it seems the candidate won¡¯t stop surprising him any time soon.

    At the rate things are going, his immortality isn¡¯t the only thing the other continents will want to ally with him for.

    He is the one at the center of the unifying of the abandoned continents. That alone will get him influence with the other continents just barely beneath the Tower Masters.

    Adding his immortality on top of that makes him a force to be reckoned with.

    But for now he is still just a Class A magician. Which does not qualify for the position of a Tower Master.

    And yet¡­

    Chrono narrows his eyes a little as he watches the candidate fly through the sky. And more specifically, as he watches him practice his mana manipulation during the journey over towards the Barren Pass on the abandoned continents.

    It may not take him long to master mana manipulation.

    This discovery has the Chrono feeling the faintest hint of excitement. Something he rarely ever feels nowadays.

    Let¡¯s see what changes you can bring to this ever stagnant world, young immortal.

    <hr>

    At the Peak of the First Magician¡¯s Tower

    Year 2851 | Month 3 | Day 26

    The Tower Master of the First Tower watches in silence as the recording of the Undying Magician¡¯s final battle with the anti-magic magician comes to an end. With it showing Chrono as he appears and fixes the hole in the boundary. And not a single Tower Master within the First Tower says a word for several minutes.

    But that silence is eventually broken when the Tower Master of the First Tower declares without any hesitation, ¡°The moment their war ends, we will be handing out an invitation to the Undying Magician to compete for the position of Tower Master. Are there any objections to this decision?¡±

    Not a single Tower Master raises their voice in objection.

    ¡°This proposal passes,¡± the Tower Master of the First Tower states, his voice echoing throughout the vast expanse of the First Tower. ¡°Should the Undying Magician pass the exam, he will be granted the status of a Tower Master, and a new Magic Tower will be constructed within the abandoned continents. Officially welcoming the abandoned continents back into the world once again.¡±

    After he finishes speaking, the Tower Master of the First Tower snaps his fingers, making the sound of a bell ring out through the tower. Following which the other Tower Masters all leave without another word.

    The Tower Master of the First Tower turns his gaze in the direction of the abandoned continents with more than a little worry on his face. Because the coming of a new era will arrive soon.

    And it¡¯s not just his assumption but a vision of the future one of the other Tower Masters had.

    With this new era will come the rise of a dead kingdom, the prosperity of a continent long since forgotten, and the upturning of the political society as the continents and major nations know it.

    As the very first Class S magician with four affinities rises and shakes everything everyone knows to their core.

    It¡¯s a frightening prospect, even to the Tower Master of the main tower. The very First Tower and the heart of the Magicians Towers organization.

    But at the same time, he finds it invigorating.

    Because while many fear change, some welcome it.

    And he finds himself feeling excited to see all of the many changes the Undying Magician will bring to the world.

    The Tower Master of the First Tower walks over to the edge of the Tower, where he sees the grand cities beneath the Tower and the clouds around it. Then he spreads both of his arms out to his sides with a wide grin on his face as he shouts, ¡°Come, Undying Magician! Show the world what the lone immortal is capable of! Show us how little we know and turn our views inside out as many times as you can!¡±

    His grin grows wider.

    ¡°Because I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡±